AU2004211637C1 - Macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors - Google Patents

Macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors Download PDF

Info

Publication number
AU2004211637C1
AU2004211637C1 AU2004211637A AU2004211637A AU2004211637C1 AU 2004211637 C1 AU2004211637 C1 AU 2004211637C1 AU 2004211637 A AU2004211637 A AU 2004211637A AU 2004211637 A AU2004211637 A AU 2004211637A AU 2004211637 C1 AU2004211637 C1 AU 2004211637C1
Authority
AU
Australia
Prior art keywords
absent
substituted
tboc
hydrogen
aryl
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
AU2004211637A
Other versions
AU2004211637A1 (en
AU2004211637B2 (en
Inventor
Zhenwei Miao
Suanne Nakajima
Yat Sun Or
Ying Sun
Zhe Wang
Frank Wu
Guoyou Xu
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Enanta Pharmaceuticals Inc
Original Assignee
Enanta Pharmaceuticals Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US10/384,120 external-priority patent/US20040180815A1/en
Application filed by Enanta Pharmaceuticals Inc filed Critical Enanta Pharmaceuticals Inc
Publication of AU2004211637A1 publication Critical patent/AU2004211637A1/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of AU2004211637B2 publication Critical patent/AU2004211637B2/en
Publication of AU2004211637C1 publication Critical patent/AU2004211637C1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/12—Cyclic peptides with only normal peptide bonds in the ring
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D487/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00
    • C07D487/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D487/04—Ortho-condensed systems
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00—Medicinal preparations containing peptides
    • A61K38/04—Peptides having up to 20 amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K38/12—Cyclic peptides, e.g. bacitracins; Polymyxins; Gramicidins S, C; Tyrocidins A, B or C
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12—Antivirals
    • A61P31/14—Antivirals for RNA viruses
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D513/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed system at least one hetero ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for in groups C07D463/00, C07D477/00 or C07D499/00 - C07D507/00
    • C07D513/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed system at least one hetero ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for in groups C07D463/00, C07D477/00 or C07D499/00 - C07D507/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D513/04—Ortho-condensed systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/02—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing at least one abnormal peptide link
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/08—Tripeptides
    • C07K5/0802—Tripeptides with the first amino acid being neutral
    • C07K5/0804—Tripeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aliphatic
    • C07K5/0806—Tripeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aliphatic the side chain containing 0 or 1 carbon atoms, i.e. Gly, Ala
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00—Medicinal preparations containing peptides

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Virology (AREA)
  • Communicable Diseases (AREA)
  • Oncology (AREA)
  • Gastroenterology & Hepatology (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Medicines That Contain Protein Lipid Enzymes And Other Medicines (AREA)
  • Peptides Or Proteins (AREA)

Description

MACROCYCLIC HEPATITIS C SERINE PROTEASE INHIBITORS CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS This application claims benefit to US application serial nos. US 10/365,854, filed 5 February 13, 2003; US 10/360,947, filed February 7, 2003; and US 10/384,120, filed March 7, 2003, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety for any purpose. TECHNICAL FIELD 10 The present invention relates to novel macrocycles having activity against hepatitis C virus (HCV) and useful in the treatment of HCV infections. More particularly, the invention relates to macrocyclic compounds, compositions containing such compounds and methods for using the same, as well as processes for making such compounds. 15 BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION Any discussion of the prior art throughout the specification should in no way be considered as an admission that such prior art is widely known or forms part of common general knowledge in the field. 20 HCV is the principal cause of non-A, non-B hepatitis and is an increasingly severe public health problem both in the developed and developing world. It is estimated that the virus infects over 200 million people worldwide, surpassing the number of individuals infected with the human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) by nearly five fold. HCV infected patients, due to the high percentage of individuals inflicted with chronic 25 infections, are at an elevated risk of developing cirrhosis of the liver, subsequent hepatocellular carcinoma and terminal liver disease. HCV is the most prevalent cause of hepatocellular cancer and cause of patients requiring liver transplantations in the western world.
There are considerable barriers to the development of anti-HCV therapeutics, which include, but are not limited to, the persistence of the virus, the genetic diversity of the virus during replication in the host, the high incident rate of the virus developing drug-resistant mutants, and the lack of reproducible infectious culture systems and 5 small-animal models for HCV replication and pathogenesis. In a majority of cases, given the mild course of the infection and the complex biology of the liver, careful consideration must be given to antiviral drugs, which are likely to have significant side effects. Only two approved therapies for HCV infection are currently available. The 10 original treatment regimen generally involves a 3-12 month course of intravenous interferon-a (IFN-a), while a new approved second-generation treatment involves co treatment with IFN-c and the general antiviral nucleoside mimics like ribavirin. Both of these treatments suffer from interferon-related side effects as well as low efficacy against HCV infections. There exists a need for the development of effective antiviral 15 agents for treatment of HCV infection due to the poor tolerability and disappointing efficacy of existing therapies. In a patient population where the majority of individuals are chronically infected and asymptomatic and the prognoses are unknown, an effective drug must possess significantly fewer side effects than the currently available treatments. The hepatitis C 20 non-structural protein-3 (NS3) is a proteolytic enzyme required for processing of the viral polyprotein and consequently viral replication. Despite the huge number of viral variants associated with HCV infection, the active site of the NS3 protease remains highly conserved thus making its inhibition an attractive mode of intervention. Recent success in the treatment of HIV with protease inhibitors supports the concept that the 25 inhibition of NS3 is a key target in the battle against HCV. HCV is a flaviridae type RNA virus. The HCV genome is enveloped and contains a single strand RNA molecule composed of circa 9600 base pairs. It encodes a polypeptide comprised of approximately 3010 amino acids. The HCV polyprotein is processed by viral and host peptidase into 10 discrete 30 peptides which serve a variety of functions. There are three structural proteins, C, El and E2. The P7 protein is of unknown function and is comprised of a highly variable 2 sequence. There are six non-structural proteins. NS2 is a zinc-dependent metalloproteinase that functions in conjunction with a portion of the NS3 protein. NS3 incorporates two catalytic functions (separate from its association with NS2): a serine protease at the N-terminal end, which requires NS4A as a cofactor, and an ATP-ase 5 dependent helicase function at the carboxyl terminus. NS4A is a tightly associated but non-covalent cofactor of the serine protease. The NS3.4A protease is responsible for cleaving four sites on the viral polyprotein. The NS3-NS4A cleavage is autocatalytic, occurring in cis. The remaining three hydrolyses, NS4A-NS4B, NS4B-NS5A and NS5A-NS5B all occur in trans. NS3 is 1o a serine protease which is structurally classified as a chymotrypsin-like protease. While the NS serine protease possesses proteolytic activity by itself, the HCV protease enzyme is not an efficient enzyme in terms of catalyzing polyprotein cleavage. It has been shown that a central hydrophobic region of the NS4A protein is required for this enhancement. The complex formation of the NS3 protein with NS4A seems necessary to the 15 processing events, enhancing the proteolytic efficacy at all of the sites. A general strategy for the development of antiviral agents is to inactivate virally encoded enzymes, including NS3, that are essential for the replication of the virus. Current efforts directed toward the discovery of NS3 protease inhibitors were reviewed by S. Tan, A. Pause, Y. Shi, N. Sonenberg, Hepatitis C Therapeutics: Current Status and 20 Emerging Strategies, Nature Rev. Drug Discov., 1, 867-881 (2002). More relevant patent disclosures describing the synthesis of HCV protease inhibitors are: WO 00/59929 (2000); WO 99/07733 (1999); WO 00/09543 (2000); WO 99/50230 (1999); US5861297 (1999). SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION 25 According to a first aspect, the present invention provides a compound having the Formula I: W O N H 0 G A R4O ] L E 3 wherein: A is selected from the group consisting of H, -(C=O)-R 2 , -(C=0)-O-R', -C(=0)
NH-R
2 , -C(=S)-NH-R 2 , -S(O) 2
-R
2 , -(C=NR')-R', and -(C=NR)-NH-R'; G is selected from the group consisting of -OH, -O-(CI-C 1 2 alkyl), -NHS(0) 2 -R', 5 -(C=0)-R', -(C=O)-O-R', and -(C=O)-NH-R'; L is selected from the group consisting of absent, -S-, -SCH 2 -, -SCH 2
CH
2 -,
-S(O)
2 -, -S(0) 2
CH
2
CH
2 -, -S(O)-, -S(O)CH 2
CH
2 -, -0-, -OCH 2 -, -OCH 2
CH
2 -, -(C=O)
CH
2 -, -CH(CH 3
)CH
2 -, -CFHCH 2 -, -CF 2
CH
2 -, and -CRx=CRx- where R, = H or halogen; j is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4; 10 m is 0, 1, or 2; s is 0, 1 or2; R' is selected from the group consisting of H, CI-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, 15 heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl;
R
2 is selected from the group consisting of H, CI-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino, arylamino, diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; 20 R 3 and R4 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, OH, CH 3 , CN, SH, halogen, NO 2 , NH 2 , amide, methoxy, trifluoromethoxy, and trifluoromethyl; E is selected from -CH=CH- or -CH 2
-CH
2 -; and W is a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic ring system. 25 According to a second aspect, the present invention provides a compound of Formula II 3a W mi H 0 N CH N C H Formula II wherein: A is selected from the group consisting of H, -(C=O)-R 2 , -(C=0)-O-R', -C(=0) NH-R ,-C(=S)-NH-R2, -S(O) 2 -R2, -C(=NR )-R', and -(C=NR')-NH-R'; 5 G is selected from the group consisting of -OH, -O-(C 1
-C
1 2 alkyl), -NHS(O) 2 -R',
-(C=O)-R
2 , -(C=0)-O-R', and -(C=O)-NH-R 2 ; L is selected from the group consisting of absent, -S-, -SCH 2 -, -SCH 2
CH
2 -,
-S(O)
2 -, -S(0) 2
CH
2
CH
2 -, -S(O)-, -S(O)CH 2
CH
2 -, -0-, -OCH 2 -, -OCH 2
CH
2 -, -(C=O)
CH
2 -, -CH(CH 3
)CH
2 -, -CFHCH 2 -, -CF 2
CH
2 -, and -CRx=CRx- where Rx = H or halogen; N=N N, Y \ N Q' 10 W is selected from the group consisting of N=N N N-N / N/3 N,- N N- ,I NII Q NN and Q is selected from the group consisting of absent, -CH 2 -, -0-, -NH-, -N(R')-, -S-,
-S(O)
2 -, and -(C=0)-; Q' is selected from the group consisting of absent, -CH 2 -, and -NH-; 15 Y is selected from the group consisting of H, CI-C 6 alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; j = 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4; m = 0, 1, or 2; 20 s = 0, 1 or 2; 3b R1 is selected from the group consisting of H, CI-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; 5 R 2 is selected from the group consisting of H, Ci-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino, arylamino, diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; and 10 R 3 and R 4 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and methyl. According to a third aspect, the present invention provides a compound of Formula III: W Im H 0 NYN ]H N N G 1R3Os A R4 Formula III 15 wherein A is selected from the group consisting of H, -(C=O)-R 2 , -(C=O)-O-Ri, -C(=0) NH-R2, -C(=S)-NH-R 2 , -S(O) 2
-R
2 , -(C=NR')-R', and -(C=NR)-NH-R; G is selected from the group consisting of -OH, -0-(C-C 1 2 alkyl), -NHS(O) 2 -R',
-(C=O)-R
2 , -(C=O)-O-R', and -(C=O)-NH-R 2 ; 20 L is selected from the group consisting of absent, -S-, -SCH 2 -, -SCH 2
CH
2 -,
-S(O)
2 -, -S(O) 2
CH
2
CH
2 -, -S(O)-, -S(O)CH 2
CH
2 -, -0-, -OCH 2 -, -OCH 2
CH
2 -, -(C=O)
CH
2 -, -CH(CH 3
)CH
2 -, -CFHCH 2 -, -CF 2
CH
2 -, and -CRx=CRx- where R, = H or halogen; N=N N - Y "N W is selected from the group consisting of 3c N=N N=N N-N Y/ y N N , N N N NN N .Q, 'and Q is selected from the group consisting of absent, -CH 2 -, -0-, -NH-, - N(R')-, -S-, -S(0) 2 -, and -(C=0)-; Q' is selected from the group consisting of absent, -CH 2 , and -NH-; 5 Y is selected from the group consisting of H, CI-C 6 alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; j = 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4; m = 0, 1, or 2; 10 s = 0, 1 or 2; R' is selected from the group consisting of H, CI-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; 15 R 2 is selected from the group consisting of H, CI-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino, arylamino, diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; and 20 R 3 and R 4 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and methyl. According to a fourth aspect, the present invention provides a compound of Formula II: 3d W IM H | NN G H O, 0S N .. 3 CH / C A R Formula II wherein A is selected from the group consisting of H, -(C=O)-R 2 , -(C=0)-O-R', -C(=0) NH-R2, -C(=S)-NH-R2, -S(O) 2 -R2, -(C=NR )-R', and -(C=NR)-NH-R'; 5 G is selected from the group consisting of -OH, -0-(C 1
-C
12 alkyl), -NHS(0) 2 -R',
-(C=O)-R
2 , -(C=O)-O-R', and -(C=O)-NH-R 2 ; L is selected from the group consisting of absent, -S-, -SCH 2 -, -SCH 2
CH
2 -, -S(0) 2 -, -S(0) 2
CH
2
CH
2 -, -S(O)-, -S(O)CH 2
CH
2 -, -0-, -OCH 2 -, -OCH 2
CH
2 -, -(C=O)
CH
2 -, -CH(CH 3
)CH
2 -, -CFHCH 2 -, -CF 2
CH
2 -, and -CRx=CRx- where R. = H or halogen; x Y x N N N N \ N N 10 W is selected from the group consisting of and i where X and Y are independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen,
CI-C
6 alkyl, C 3
-CI
2 cycloalkyl, -CH 2 -alkylamino, -CH2-dialkylamino, -CH 2 -arylamino, -CH2-diarylamino, -(C=0)-alkylamino, -(C=0)-dialkylamino, -(C=0)-arylamino, -(C=0)-diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, 15 substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; in the alternative, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms occupying the 4 and 5 positions of the triazole ring, to which X and Y are attached, form a cyclic moiety selected from the group consisting of aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, and substituted heteroaryl; 20 j = 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4; m = 0, 1, or 2; 3e s = 0, 1 or 2; R' is selected from the group consisting of H, CI-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, 5 heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl;
R
2 is selected from the group consisting of H, CI-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino, arylamino, diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted 10 heterocycloalkyl; and
R
3 and R 4 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and methyl. According to a fifth aspect, the present invention provides a compound of Formula III: W mH N N N G H O IS N .. R3 A R4 J 15 Formula III wherein A is selected from the group consisting of H, -(C=O)-R 2 , -(C=0)-O-R', -C(=0) NH-R2, -C(=S)-NH-R 2 , -S(O) 2
-R
2 , -(C=NR')-R', and -(C=NR)-NH-R'; G is selected from the group consisting of -OH, -0-(C 1
-C
12 alkyl), -NHS(0) 2 -R', 20 -(C=O)-R 2 , -(C=0)-O-R', and -(C=O)-NH-R 2 ; L is selected from the group consisting of absent, -S-, -SCH 2 -, -SCH 2
CH
2 -,
-S(O)
2 -, -S(0) 2
CH
2
CH
2 -, -0-, -OCH 2 -, -OCH 2
CH
2 -, -(C=O)CH 2 -, -CH(CH 3
)CH
2 -,
-CFHCH
2 -, -CF 2
CH
2 -, and -CRx=CRx- where Rx = H or halogen; 3f X y X N N N N N N W is selected from the group consisting of and L , where X and Y are independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, Ci-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl, -CH 2 -alkylamino, -CH 2 -dialkylamino, -CH 2 -arylamino, -CH 2 -diarylamino, -(C=O)-alkylamino, -(C=O)-dialkylamino, -(C=O)-arylamino, -(C=O)-diarylamino, aryl, 5 substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; in the alternative, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms occupying the 4 and 5 positions of the triazole ring, to which X and Y are attached, form a cyclic moiety selected from the group consisting of aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, 10 and substituted heteroaryl; j = 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4; m= 0, 1, or 2; s = 0, 1 or 2; R' is selected from the group consisting of H, CI-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl, 15 substituted C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; R2 is selected from the group consisting of H, CI-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino, arylamino, diarylamino, aryl, 20 substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; and R3 and R 4 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and methyl. 25 According to a sixth aspect, the present invention provides a compound of Formula IV: 3g Y x z II H N N O O N IG A - R4 O S 'L C "C H (IV) wherein A is hydrogen, -(C=0)-R', -(C=0)-0-R', -C(=0)-NH-R2, -C(=S)-NH-R2, -S(O)2-R 2, -(C=NR')-R', or -(C=NR')-NH-R'; 5 G is -OH, -O-(CI-CI2 alkyl), -NHS(0)2-R l, -(C=0)-R 2, -(C=0)-0-Rl, or -(C=0) NH-R 2 L is absent, -S-, -SCH2-, -SCH2CH2-, -S(0)2-, -S(0)2CH2CH2-, -S(O)-, -S(O)CH2CH2-, -O-, -OCH2-, -OCH2CH2-, -(C=0)-CH2-, -CH(CH3)CH2-, -CFHCH2-, -CF2CH2-, or -CR,, = CRx- where R,, = H or halogen; 10 X, Y, and Z are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, N3, halogen, CI-C6 alkyl, C3-Ci2 cycloalkyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino, CI-C6 alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, substituted aryl, -S-aryl, -S-substituted aryl, -O-aryl, -O substituted aryl, NH-aryl, NH-substituted aryl, diarylamino, diheteroarylamino, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, -S-heteroaryl, -S 15 substituted heteroaryl, -O-heteroaryl, -O-substituted heteroaryl, -NH-heteroaryl, -NH substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; or, in the alternative, X and Y or Y and Z taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached form an aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or substituted 20 heteroaryl cyclic moiety; j = 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4; m= 0, 1, or2 ; Ah s = 0, 1 or 2; R' is hydrogen, CI-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-CI
2 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, or substituted 5 heterocycloalkyl;
R
2 is hydrogen, Ci-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino, arylamino, diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, or substituted heterocycloalkyl; and 10 R 3 and R 4 are each independently hydrogen or methyl. According to a seventh aspect, the present invention provides a compound of Formula V: Y x XN 0 N XZ O N, 3' NG I m O4G - R A (~%R4 JL (V) wherein 15 A is hydrogen, -(C=0)-Rl, -(C=0)-O-R, -C(=O)-NH-R 2 , -C(=S)-NH-R 2 , or -S(0) 2
-R
2 , -(C=NR)-R', or -(C=NR')-NH-R'; G is -OH, -O-(CI-C 2 alkyl), -NHS(O) 2 -R', -(C=O)-R 2 , -(C=O)-O-R', or -(C=O)
NH-R
2 ; L is absent, -S-, -SCH 2 -, -SCH 2
CH
2 -, -S(O) 2 -, -S(0) 2
CH
2
CH
2 -, -S(O)-, 20 -S(O)CH 2
CH
2 -, -0-, -OCH 2 -, -OCH 2 C1 2 -, -(C=O)-CH 2 -, -CH(CH 3
)CH
2 -, -CFHCH 2 -,
-CF
2
CH
2 -, or -CR.=CRx- where R, = H or halogen-; 3i X, Y, and Z are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,
N
3 , halogen, CI-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino, CI-C 6 alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, substituted aryl, -S-aryl, -S-substituted aryl, -0-aryl, -0 substituted aryl, NH-aryl, NH-substituted aryl, diarylamino, diheteroarylamino, 5 arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, -S-heteroaryl, -S substituted heteroaryl, -0-heteroaryl, -0-substituted heteroaryl, -NH-heteroaryl, -NH substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl ; or, in the alternative, X and Y or Y and Z taken together with the carbon atoms to 10 which they are attached form an aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or substituted heteroaryl cyclic moiety; j = 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4; m = 0, 1, or 2; s = 0, 1 or 2 ; 15 R' is hydrogen, CI-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, or substituted heterocycloalkyl;
R
2 is hydrogen, CI-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, 20 alkylamino, dialkylamino, arylamino, diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, or substituted heterocycloalkyl; and R3 and R 4 are each independently hydrogen or methyl. According to an eighth aspect, the present invention provides a pharmaceutical 25 composition comprising an anti-hepatitis C virally effective amount of a compound according to any one of the first to seventh aspects, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or prodrug thereof, in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient. 3j According to ninth aspect, the present invention provides a compound selected from the group consisting of:. 0 Br Q - Br Qn-r 0 o 0 R R 50 0 Br30 00 0 00A 0 7 O 0 NN 0 0 31 0 0 0r O OF 0F 00 F 0 F 0 0 3m 0 0 0O~ N\ 00 NQ0 VN 0 0 #-O)N 0 0 CI 3n 00 0 Fj F F F F <0 O~F0 ~. 0 0 3o N to N y> N N N ~N 0 0 ONN 00 3 p o 0 Br Cr 00 N 0 OK0KN / Q Br 0 ci NO N NQ0 R 0 00 3q Qci N~O N R 00 00 O Br NQ N R 0 z94 0 Br N 0 NJ0 3r Qci O ci 00 N ci0 0 0 3s 01\1 N NNO 00 00 AYo q- 00 3t 00 0 0N N N 00 NP 5 and pharmaceutically acceptable salts and isomers thereof, According to a tenth aspect, the present invention provides a compound selected from the group consisting of: 3u to 00 o 0l 00 00 0 0 N 0 3v B00 0 0 0 0 NQN 0 N 3w 0-I/ 0 00 UN ON NQON 00 0 4-0 3x 0 0 0 RR 00 0 3 y 00 00 00 QNQ 0 oo3z 0 aN"( 0 00 NO0 0 0 04 0 0 0 3aa qNQ 0 0QN 0 0 0 0 J 00 ON 0 0 00 0 '*4 -V3b0 0 0 R 000 %0001 00 00 co W.11 LiCork0 0 O K > 10* 0 00 3cc 0 0 s~ 0 0 0 00 0 0 O 0 RR 0 0 3dd 000 0 O and pharmaceutically acceptable salts and isomers thereof According to an eleventh aspect, the present invention provides a compound selected from the group consisting of: F F 0 0NF Q 0 0 0 5 3ee 0 0 01 0 0 0v 0 I1 N
N
3f 0 07 0 N QN IN 0 3gg 00 eN 00 and pharmaceutically acceptable salts and isomers thereof According to a twelfth aspect, the present invention provides a method for making a compound of Formula I in the first aspect, comprising the steps of: (i) reacting 5 a proline derivative of formula VI: L P/" R VI wherein, P is a nitrogen-protecting group; L is a leaving group; 10 R is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aralkyl, or optionally substituted heteroaralkyl; with a nucleophilic heterocyclic compound; and (ii) converting the resulting compound to a compound of Formula I in the first aspect. According to a thirteenth aspect, the present invention provides a method for 15 making a compound of Formula I in the first aspect, comprising the steps of: (i) reacting a compound of formula VII: 3hh L om N H N N S R 3 G A O R4 L E wherein, L is a leaving group; A is a nitrogen protecting group; and the remaining variables are as defined in claim 1; 5 with a nucleophilic heterocyclic compound; and (ii) converting the resulting compound to a compound of Formula I in the first aspect. According to a fourteenth aspect, the present invention provides a compound produced by the method according to the twelfth or thirteenth aspect. According to a fifteenth aspect, the present invention provides a method of 10 treating a hepatitis C viral infection in a subject, comprising administering to the subject an anti-hepatitis C virally effective amount of a compound according to any one of the first to seventh aspects or a pharmaceutical composition according to the eighth aspect or a compound according to any one of the ninth to eleventh or fourteenth aspects. According to a sixteenth aspect, the present invention provides a method of 15 inhibiting the replication of hepatitis C virus, the method comprising supplying a hepatitis C viral NS3 protease inhibitory amount of a compound according to any one of the first to seventh aspects or a pharmaceutical composition of the eighth aspect or a compound of any one of the ninth to eleventh or fourteenth aspects. According to a seventeenth aspect, the present invention provides use of a 20 compound according to any one of the first to seventh or ninth to eleventh or fourteenth aspects for the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of hepatitis C viral infection in a subject. According to a eighteenth aspect, the present invention provides use of a hepatitis C viral NS3 protease inhibitory amount of a compound according to any one of 3ii the first to seventh aspects or ninth to eleventh or fourteenth aspects for the manufacture of a medicament for inhibiting the replication of hepatitis C virus. Unless the context clearly requires otherwise, throughout the description and the claims, the words "comprise", "comprising", and the like are to be construed in an 5 inclusive sense as opposed to an exclusive or exhaustive sense; that is to say, in the sense of "including, but not limited to". The present invention relates to novel macrocyclic compounds and methods of treating a hepatitis C infection in a subject in need of such therapy with said macrocyclic compounds. The present invention further relates to pharmaceutical compositions 10 comprising the compounds of the present invention, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, esters, or prodrugs thereof, in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient. 3jj WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 I It '. 'hV-- hP H t0 H W .W A compound having the Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester or prodrug thereof: W 0 0 N H H NN N -R3 G A 0 LE wherein: A is selected from the group consisting of H, - (C=O)-R 2 , -(C=O)-O-R', -C(=0)
NH-R
2 , -C(=S)-NH-R 2 , -S(O)rR 2 , -(C=NR')-R', and -(C=NR')-NH-R'; G is selected from the group consisting of -OH, -O-(C-C 1 2 alkyl), -NHS(O) 2
-R
1 , (C=O)-R', -(C=O)-R 2 , -(C=O)-O-R', -(C=O)-NH-R', and -(C=O)-NH-R 2 ) L is selected from the group consisting of absent, -S-, -SCH 2 -, -SCH2CHr, S(O) 2 -, -S(0) 2
CH
2 CH-, -S(O)-, -S(O)CH 2
CH
2 -, -0-, -OCH 2 -, -OCH 2 CH-, -(C=0)-CHr, CH(CH 3
)CH
2 -, -CFHCH 2 -, -CF 2 CHr, and -CRx=CRx- where Rx = H or halogen; j is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4; m is 0, 1, or 2; 5 s is 0, 1 or2; R' is selected form the group consisting of H, C-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; ) R 2 is selected from the group consisting of H, C-C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C1 2 cycloalkyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino, arylamino, diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylakyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; 4 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Fri" ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ t H-1.i '1 111':A 1"01
R
3 and R 4 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, OH, CH 3 , CN, SH, halogen, NO 2 , NH 2 , amide, methoxy, trifluoromethoxy, and trifluoromethyl; E represents either a single bond or a double bond between the two carbon atoms attached thereto; and W is a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic ring system. In one embodiment of the present invention E represents a double bond, resulting in Formula 11 or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, esters, or prodrugs thereof: 43> HH H NN A R4 ~ /CH JLCH2 C H (11) wherein the remaining substitutents are as described above. In one embodiment of the present invention E represents a single bond, resulting in Formula IIl or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, esters, or prodrugs thereof: W HH H N N -. R] G A 0 S R4 JL (Ill) 5 wherein the remaining substituents are as described above. 5 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 In one embodiment of the present invention there are disclosed compounds represented by Formulas I and Ill, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, esters, or prodrugs thereof: wherein N-N N-N YY N-N W is selected from the group consisting of: N-N and Q is selected from the group consisting of: absent, -CH 2 -- , -0-, -NH-, -N(R 1 )-, -S-, -S(0) 2 -, and -(C=0)-; Q' is selected from the group consisting of: absent, -CH 2 -, and -NH-; Y is ) selected from the group consisting of: H, C 1
-C
6 alkyl, aryl,.substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalky, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; All other substituents are as defined above. 5 In one. embodiment of the present invention there are disclosed compounds represented by Formulas II and Ill, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, esters, or prodrugs thereof wherein x y x NN N N W is selected from the group consisting of: -L , and -L ; X and Y are ) independently selected from the group consisting of: H, halogen, C-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl, -CH 2 -alkylamino, -CH 2 -dialkylamino, -CH 2 -arylamino, -CH 2 -diarylamino, -(C=O)-alkylamino, -(C=0)-dialkylamino, -(C=O)-arylamino, -(C=O)-diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted 5 heterocycloalkyl; in the alternative, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms occupying the 4 and 5 positions of the triazole ring, to which X and Y are attached, form 6 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 it -' It v' 4 - .... I I Al W a cyclic moiety selected from the group consisting of aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, and substituted heteroaryl; All other substituents are as defined above. In one embodiment of the present invention there are disclosed compounds represented by Formulas I and Ill, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, esters, or prodrugs thereof wherein: Y x z 0 N' W is d and X, Y, and Z are independently selected from the group consisting of H, N 3 , halogen, C-C 6 alkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, alkylamino, dialkyramino, Cr1C6 alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, substituted aryl, -S-aryl, -S-substituted aryl, -0-aryl, -0-substituted aryl, NH-aryl, NH-substituted aryl, diarylamino, diheteroarylamino, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, -S-heteroaryl, -S-substituted heteroaryl, -0-heteroaryl, -0-substituted heteroaryl, -NH-heteroaryl, -NH-substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; or, in the alternative, X and Y or Y and Z taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached form an aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or substituted heteroaryl cyclic moiety. Other aspects of the invention are: A compound according to any of the formulae herein wherein W is substituted with one or more substituents, each of said substituents being independently selected from any of (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e): (a) alkenyl; alkoxy; alkoxyalkyl; alkyl; alkylamino; alkylaryl; alkylsulfonyl; alkynyl; amide; amido optionally mono-substituted with C-C 6 alkyl; aryl; arylalkanoylalkyl; arylalkyl; arylaminoalkyl; aryloxyalkyl; arylsulfonyl; cycloalkoxy; cycloalkyl; dialkylamino; dialkylaminoalkyl; diarylaminoalkyl; haloalkyl; heteroaryl; heteroarylalkyl; heterocyclo; 7 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 heterocycloalkyl; heterocycloalkylalkyl; thioalky; monoalkylaminoalky; sulfonyl; (lower alkyl)sulfonyl; haloalkyl; carboxyl; amide; (lower alkyl)amide; heterocyclo optionally substituted with Cr1C6 alkyl; perhaloalkyl; sulfonyl; i thioalkyl; urea, C(=0)-R"; OC(=O)R"; C(=O)O-R"; C(=O)N(R") 2 ; C(=S)N(R") 2 ; SO 2 R"; NHS(0 2 )R"; N(R 2
)
2 ; 5 N(R' 2 )C(=O)R"; wherein each of the foregoing can be optionally be substituted with up to three groups selected from halogen, OH, alkoxy, perhaloalkyl; (b) CrC14 aralkyl; C 2
-C
7 cycloalkyl; C 6
-C
10 aryl; heterocyclo; (lower alkyl) heterocyclo; 0 wherein each aralkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heterocyclo or (lower alkyl)-heterocyclo may be optionally substituted with R, where R 6 is halogen, Cl-C 6 alkyl, C3-C 6 cycloalkyl, Cl-C 6 alkoxy, C 3- C 6 cycloalkoxy, NO 2 , N(R 7
)
2 , NH-C(O)-R 7 or NH-C(O) NHRI; where RT is H, C-C 6 alkyl or C 3
-C
6 cycloalkyl; or R 6 is NH-C(O)-OR 8 where R is C-C 6 alkyl or C3-C 6 cycloalkyl; 5 (c) N(R 5
)
2 , NH-C(O)-R 5 , or NH-C(O)-NH-R where R 5 is independently H, Cr-C6 alkyl or C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C6 or C1o aryl, C7-C 14 aralkyl, heterocyclo or (lower alkyl) heterocyclo; (d) NH-C(O)-OR 8 where R 8 is C-C 6 alkyl or C3-C 6 cycloalkyl; (e) formyl; halogen;, hydroxy; NO 2 ; OH; SH; halo; CN; 0 wherein each R 1 1 is independently H, OH, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, perhaloalkyl, alkoxy, aryl, arylalkyl, alkylaryl, heterocyclo, heterocycloalkyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, arylalkanoylalkyl,. heterocycloalkylalkyl aryloxyalkyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino, monoalkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, 5 arylaminoalkyl, diarylaminoalkyl, wherein any of the foregoing can be.optionally be substituted with up to three groups selected from halogen, OH, alkoxy and perhaloalkyl; and each R 1 2 is independently H, formyl, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, perhaloalkyl, alkoxy, aryl, arylalkyl, alkylaryl, heterocyclo, heterocycloalkyl, alkylsulfonyl, D arylsulfonyl, heteroarylakyl, heteroaryl, arylalkanoylalkyl, heterocycloalkylalkyl aryloxyalkyl, monoalkylaminoalky, dialkylaminoalkyl, arylaminoalkyl, or 8 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 diarylaminoalkyl, wherein any of the foregoing can be optionally be substituted with up to three groups selected from halogen, OH, alkoxy and perhaloalkyl; The compound of any of the formulae herein wherein W is selected from the group consisting of: (a) an aliphatic heteromonocyclic, heterobicyclic or heterofricyclic ring system having from five to sixteen ring at6ms and up to four ring hetero atoms selected from 0, N and S, wherein said ring system is optionally substituted with up to three ring substituents selected from the group consisting of OH, CN, halogen, formyl, R' 0 and ) R"; and (b) an aromatic heteromonocyclic, heterobicyclic or heterotricyclic ring system having from five to sixteen ring atoms and up to four ring hetero atoms selected from 0, N and S, wherein said ring system is optionally substituted with up to three ring substituents selected from the group consisting of OH, CN, halogen, formyl, and R 1 0 ; 5 wherein: each RO is independently alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, perhaloalkyl, alkoxy, aryl, arylalkyl, alkylaryl, heterocyclo, heterocycloalky, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, heretoaryl, heteroarylalkyl, arylalkanoylalkyl, heterocycloalkylalkyl aryloxyalkyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino, monoalkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, arylaminoalkyl, diarylaminoalkyl, 3 heteroaryl or urea, wherein any of the foregoing can be optionally be substituted with up to three groups selected from halogen, OH, alkoxy and perhaloalky; C(=O)-R", OC(=O)R", C(=O)O-R", C(=O)N(R') 2 , C(=S)N(R") 2 , SO 2 R", NHS(0 2 )R", N(R1 2
)
2 , and N(R' 2 )C(=O)R"; each R" is independently H, OH, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, perhaloalkyl, alkoxy, 5 aryl, arylalkyl, alkylaryl, heterocyclo, heterocycloalkyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, arylalkanoylalkyl, heterocycloalkylalkyl aryloxyalkyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino, monoalkylaminoalky, dialkylaminoalkyl, arylaminoalkyl, diarylaminoalkyl, wherein any of the foregoing can be optionally be substituted with up to three groups selected from halogen, OH, alkoxy and perhaloalkyl; D each R 1 2 is independently H, formyl, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, perhaloalkyl, alkoxy, aryl, arylalkyl, alkylaryl, heterocyclo, heterocycloalkyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, 9 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 heteroarylalkyl, heteroaryl, arylalkanoylalkyl,. heterocycloalkylalkyl aryloxyalkyl, monoalkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, arylaminoalkyl, or diarylaminoalkyl, wherein any of the foregoing can be optionally be substituted with up to three groups selected from halogen, OH, alkoxy and perhaloalkyl; The compound of any of the formulae herein wherein W is aii aliphatic heteromonocyclic, heterobicyclic or heterotricyclic ring system having from five to sixteen ring atoms and up to four ring hetero atoms selected from 0, N and S, wherein said ring system is optionally substituted with up to three ring substituents selected from the group consisting of OH, CN, halogen, formyl, R 10 and R 11 ; The compound of any of the formulae herein wherein W is an aliphatic heteromonocyclic ring system having from five to seven ring atoms and up to four ring hetero atoms selected from 0, N and S, wherein said ring system is optionally substituted with up to three ring substituents selected from the group consisting of OH, CN, halogen, formyl, R 10 and R"; The compound of any of the formulae wherein said optionally substituted aliphatic heteromonocyclic ring system has five ring atoms and 1 or 2 ring hetero atoms ) selected from 0, N and S; The compound of any of the formulae herein wherein said optionally substituted aliphatic heteromonocyclic ring system is selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidines, pyrazolidines, pyrrolines, tetrahydrothiophenes, dihydrothiophenes, 5 tetrahydrofurans, dihydrofurans, imidazolines, tetrahydroimidazoles, dihydropyrazoles, tetrahydropyrazoles, and oxazolines; The compound of any of the formulae herein wherein said optionally substituted aliphatic heteromonocyclic ring system has six ring atoms and I or 2 ring hetero atoms 0 selected from 0, N and S; 10 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 The compound of any of the formulae herein wherein said optionally substituted aliphatic heteromonocyclic ring system is selected from the group consisting of pyridines, piperidines, dihydropyridines, tetrahydropyridines, dihydropyrans, tetrahydropyrans, dioxanes, piperazines, dihydropyrimidines, tetrahydropyrimidines, perhydro pyrimidine, morpholine, thioxane, and thiomorpholine; The compound of any of the formulae herein wherein said optionally substituted aliphatic heteromonocyclic ring system has seven ring atoms and 1 or 2 ring hetero atoms selected from 0, N and S; ) The compound of any of the formulae herein wherein said optionally substituted aliphatic heteromonocyclic ring system is selected from the group consisting of hexamethyleneimine, and hexamethylenesulfide; ) The compound of any of the formulae herein wherein W is an aliphatic heterobicyclic ring system having from five to sixteen ring atoms and up to four ring hetero atoms selected from 0, N and S, wherein said ring system is optionally substituted with up to three ring substituents selected from the group'consisting of OH, CN, halogen, formyl and Rio. ) The compound of any of the formulae herein wherein said optionally substituted aliphatic heterobicyclic ring system has eight to twelve ring atoms and I to 4 ring hetero atoms selected from 0, N and S; The compound of any of the formulae herein wherein said optionally substituted aliphatic heterobicyclic ring system eight to twelve ring atoms and 1 or 2 ring hetero atoms selected from 0 and N; The compound of any of the formulae herein wherein W is an aromatic ) heteromonocyclic, heterobicyclic or heterotricyclic ring system having from five to sixteen ring atoms and up to four ring hetero atoms selected from 0, N and S, wherein 11 said ring system is optionally substituted with up to three ring substituents selected from the group consisting of OH, CN, halogen, formyl and RIO; The compound of any of the formulae herein wherein W is an aromatic 5 heteromonocyclic ring system having from five to seven ring atoms and up to four ring hetero atoms selected from 0, N and S, wherein said ring system is optionally substituted with up to three ring substituents selected from the group consisting of OH, CN, halogen, formyl and Rio; 10 The compound of any of the formulae herein wherein said optionally substituted aromatic heteromonocyclic ring system has five ring atoms and 1 or 2 ring hetero atoms selected from 0, N and S; The compound of any of the formulae herein wherein said optionally substituted 15 aromatic heteromonocyclic ring system is selected from the group consisting of pyrroles, pyrazoles, porphyrins, furans, thiophenes, imidazoles, oxazoles, oxadiazoles, isoxazoles, thiazoles, thiadiazoles, and isothiazoles; The compound of any of the formulae herein wherein said optionally substituted 20 aromatic heteromonocyclic ring system has six ring atoms and 1, 2 or 3 ring hetero atoms selected from 0, N and S; The compound of any of the formulae herein wherein said optionally substituted aromatic heteromonocyclic ring system is selected from the group consisting of 25 pyridines, pyrimidines, pyrazines, pyrans, and triazines; The compound of any of the formulae herein wherein said optionally substituted aromatic heteromonocyclic ring system has five ring atoms and 3 or 4 ring hetero atoms selected from 0, N and S; 12 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 The compound of any of the formulae herein wherein said optionally substituted aromatic heteromonocyclic ring system is triazolyl or tetrazolyl; The compound of any of the formulae herein wherein W is an aromatic heterobicyclic ring system having from eight to twelve ring atoms and up to four ring hetero atoms selected from 0, N and S, wherein said ring system is optionally substituted with up to three ring substituents selected from the group consisting of OH, CN, halogen, formyl and R 10 ; The compound of any of the formulae herein wherein said optionally substituted aromatic heterobicyclic ring system is selected from the group consisting of adenines, azabenzimidazoles, azaindoles, benzimidazoles, benzo isothiazoles, benzofurans, benzoisoxazoles, benzooxazoles, benzothiadiazoles, benzothiazoles, benzothienes, benzothiophenes, benzoxazoles, carbazoles, cinnolines, guanines, imidazopyridines, indazoles, indoles, isoindoles, isoquinolines, phthalazines, purines, pyrrolo pyridines, quinazolines, quinolines, quinoxalines, thianaphthenes, and xanthines; The compound of any of the formulae herein wherein W is an aromatic heterotricyclic ring system having from ten to sixteen ring atoms and up to four ring hetero atoms selected from 0, N and S, wherein said ring system is optionally substituted with up to three ring substituents selected from the group consisting of OH, CN, halogen, formyl, R 10 and R 1 1 ; and The compound of any of the formulae herein wherein said optionally substituted aromatic heterotricyclic ring system is selected from the group consisting of carbazoles, bibenzofurans, psoralens, dibenzothiophenes, phenazines, thianthrenes, phenanthrolines, phenanthridines. Other embodiments are a compound of Formula i 13 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 W m H N N G N -,R 3 I A' R4 CH H Formula II Wherein: A is selected from the group consisting of H, -(C=O)-R 2 , -(C=O)-O-R', C(=O)-NH-R', -C(=S)-NH-R 2 , -S(O) 2
-R
2 , -(C=NR')-R', and -(C=NR')-NH-R'; G is selected from the group consisting of -OH, -O-(C-C 12 alkyl), NHS(O) 2 R, -(C=O)-R 2 , -(C=0)-O-R; and -(C=O)-NH-R 2 ; L is selected from the group consisting of absent, -S-, -SCH 2 -, -SCH 2
CH
2 -, -S(O)-, -S(O) 2
CH
2
CH
2 -, -S(O)-, -S(O)CH 2
CH
2 -, -0-, -OCH 2 , -OCH 2
CH
2 -, -(C=O)-CH 2 ,
-CH(CH
3
)CH
2 -, -CFHCH 2 -, -CF 2
CH
2 -, and -CRx=CRx- where Rx = H or halogen; N Q W is selected from the group consisting of N N--N N==N ' Q N==\ N NyNN Y an and .~v. Q is selected from the group consisting of absent, -CH 2 , -0-, -NH-, N(R)-, -S-, -S(O) 2 -, and -(C=O)-; Q' is selected from the group consisting of absent, -CH 2 -, and -NH-; Y is selected from the group consisting of H, CrC6 alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; j = 0, 1, 2,3, or4; m = 0, 1, or 2; 14 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 s =0,1 or 2; R' is selected from the group consisting -of -H, C-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl;
R
2 is selected from the group consisting of H, C-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl, alkylamino, dialkyl amino, arylamino, diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalky, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalky, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; and
R
3 and R 4 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and methyl; A compound of theabove formula 11, wherein: A is -(C=O)O-R; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; j = 3; m = s = 1; and
R
3 and R 4 are hydrogen; A compound of theabove formula 1I, wherein: A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; j = 3; m = s = 1; and
R
3 and R 4 are hydrogen; ) A compound of theabove formula 11, wherein: A is -(C=O)-O-R 1 , 15 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 G is hydroxyl; L. is absent; N===N W is j=3; m = s = 1; and
R
3 and R 4 are hydrogen; and A compound of theabove formula 1I, wherein: A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; ) G is hydroxyl; L is absent; N--N N W is j = 3; m = s = 1; and 5 R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen. Other embodiments are: A compound of Formula IlI: W 'm H 0 N N O N G H O is N -,R 3 A' '' R4 L Formula III 16 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 wherein A is selected from the group consisting of H, -(C=O)-R 2 , -(C=O)-O-R', C(=O)-NH-R 2 , -C(=S)-NH-R 2 , -S(O)-R 2 , -(C=NR')-R', and -(C=NR')-NH-R'; G is selected from the group consisting of -OH, -O-(C 1
-C
12 alkyl), NHS(0) 2 -R, -(C=O)-R 2 , -(C=O)-O-R', and -(C=O)-NH-R 2 ; L is selected from the group 'consisting of absent, -S-, -SCH 2 -, -SCH 2 CH-, -S(0)2-, -S(O) 2
CH
2 CHr, -S(O)-, -S(0)CH 2
CH
2- , -0-, -OCH 2 -, -OCH 2
CH
2- , -(C=0)-CHr,
-CH(CH
3
)CH
2 -, -CFHCHr , -CF 2 CHr, and -CRx=CRx- where Rx = H or halogen; N N W is selected from the group consisting of N N N----N N== NY N Q N Y N N Y J, and Q is selected from the group consisting of absent, -CH 2- , -0-, -NH-, N(R')-, -S-, -S(O) 2 -, and -(C=O)-; Q' is selected from the group consisting of absent, -CH 2- , and -NH-; Y is selected from the group consisting of H, CrC6 alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; j = 0, 1, 2,3, or 4; m = 0, 1, or 2; s = 0,1 or 2; R' is selected from the group consisting of H, CrC alkyl, CrC 12 cycloalkyl, substituted C3-C12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylakyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl;
R
2 is selected from the group consisting of H, CrC6 alkyl, C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, alkylamino, dialkyl amino, arylamino, 17 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; and
R
3 and R 4 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and methyl; A compound according to formula ill above, wherein: A is -(C=0)-O-R'; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; j = 3; m = s = 1; and
R
3 and R 4 are hydrogen; A compound according to formula IlIl above, wherein: A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; j = 3; m = s = 1; and
R
3 and R 4 are hydrogen; A compound according to formula IlIl above, wherein: A is -(C=0)-O-R'; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; N N W is ; j = 3; m = s =1; and 18 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479
R
3 and R 4 are hydrogen; A compound according to formula Ill above, wherein: A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; N N W is j =3; m = s = 1; and
R
3 and R 4 are hydrogen; A compound of Formula II: W 'm H N 0 N G H 0 Is N - R 3 A' R4 CH H Formula II wherein A is selected from the group consisting of H, -(C=0)-R 2 , -(C=O)-O-R', -C(=0)-NH-R 2 , -C(=S)-NH-R 2 , -S(0) 2
-R
2 , -(C=NR)-R', and -(C=NR')-NH-R'; G is .selected from the group consisting of -OH, -O-(C-C1 2 alkyl), -NHS(0) 2 -R', -(C=O)-R 2 , -(C=O)-O-R', and -(C=O)-NH-R 2 ; L is selected from the group consisting of absent, -S-, -SCH 2 -, -SCH 2 CHr, 19 -S(0) 2 -, -S(0) 2
CH
2
CH
2 -, -S(O)-, -S(O)CH 2
CH
2 -, -0-, -OCH 2 -, -OCH 2
CH
2 -, -(C=0)-CH 2 -, -CH(CH 3
)CH
2 -, -CFHCH 2 -, -CF 2
CH
2 -, and -CRx=CRx- where Rx = H or halogen; x Y x N N N "\N " N N N Y W is selected from the group consisting of and 5 where X and Y are independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, Cj
C
6 alkyl, C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, -CH 2 -alkylamino, -CH 2 -dialkylamino, -CH2-arylamino,
-CH
2 -diarylamino, -(C=0)-alkylamino, -(C=0)-dialkylamino, -(C=0)-arylamino, -(C=O)-diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and 10 substituted heterocycloalkyl; in the alternative, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms occupying the 4 and 5 positions of the triazole ring, to which X and Y are attached, form a cyclic moiety selected from the group consisting of aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, and substituted heteroaryl; j = 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4; 15 m= 0, 1, or 2; s = 0, 1 or 2; R' is selected from the group consisting of H, CI-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, 20 heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl;
R
2 is selected from the group consisting of H, CI-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-CI
2 cycloalkyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino, arylamino, diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted 25 heterocycloalkyl; and
R
3 and R 4 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and methyl; 20 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 A compound according to formula i above, wherein: A is -(C=O)-O-R'; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; j = 3; m=s=1; and
R
3 and R 4 are hydrogen; A compound according to formula i above, wherein: A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; j = 3; m = s = 1; and
R
3 and R 4 are hydrogen; A compound according to formula 11 above, wherein: A is -(C=O)-O-R', G is hydroxyl; L is absent; - x y N N 111N W is j = 3; m = s = 1; and
R
3 and R 4 are hydrogen; A compound according to formula 11 above, wherein: A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; G is hydroxyl; 21 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 L is absent; x y N N/ N W is J = 3; M = s = 1; and
R
3 and R 4 are hydrogen. Other embodiments are a compound of Formula Ill: W lm H G N N G AH O s N , 3 A R4 L Formula III ) wherein A is selected from the group consisting of H, -(C=O)-R 2 , -(C=0)-O-R',
-C(=O)-NH-R
2 , -C(=S)-NH-R 2 , -S(O)rR 2 , -(C=NR')-R', and -(C=NR 1 )-NH-R'; G is selected from the group consisting of -OH, -O-(C1-C 12 alkyl), -NHS(O)rR', -(C=O)-R 2 , -(C=O)-O-R', and -(C=O)-NH-R 2 ; 5 L is selected from the group consisting of absent, -S-, -SCH 2 -, -SCH 2 CH-, S(O) 2 -, -S(O) 2
CH
2 CHr, -0-, -OCHr, -OCH 2
CH
2 , -(C=0)-CH 2 , -CH(CH 3
)CH
2 ,
-CFHCH
2 - , -CF 2
CH
2 -, and -CRx=CRx- where R. = H or halogen; 22 X Y X NN N N N N N W is selected from the group consisting of vw and , where X and Y are independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, CI-C 6 alkyl,
C
3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl, -CH2-alkylamino, -CH2-dialkylamino, -CH2-arylamino, -CH 2 diarylamino, -(C=0)-alkylamino, -(C=0)-dialkylamino, -(C=O)-arylamino,
-(C=O)
5 diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; in the alternative, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms occupying the 4 and 5 positions of the triazole ring, to which X and Y are attached, form a cyclic moiety selected from the group consisting of aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, 10 and substituted heteroaryl; j = 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4; m = 0, 1, or 2; s = 0, 1 or 2; R1 is selected from the group consisting of H, C 1
-C
6 alkyl, C 3
-C
12 15 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl;
R
2 is selected from the group consisting of H, C 1
-C
6 alkyl, C 3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl, substituted
C
3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino, arylamino, 20 diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; and
R
3 and RW are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and methyl; 25 A compound according to formula III above, wherein: A is -(C=0)-O-R'; G is hydroxyl; 23 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 L is absent; j = 3; m = s = 1; and
R
3 and R 4 are hydrogen; A compound according to formula III above, wherein: A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; ) j=3; m = s = 1; and
R
3 and R 4 are hydrogen; A compound according to formula III above, wherein: A is -(C=O)-0-R', G is hydroxyl; L is absent; x Y N N N W is j =3; m = s =I; and
R
3 and R 4 are hydrogen; A compound according to formula III above, wherein: A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; 24 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 x y N N N W is ; j=3; rn = s =1; and
R
3 and R 4 are hydrogen; A compound of Formula IV: Y x z I N O Bl N IN O G R s j L -- CH2 C (TV) wherein ) A is hydrogen, -(C=O)-R' , -(C=O)-O-R', -C(=O)-NH-R 2 , -C(=S)-NH-R 2 , S(O) 2
-R
2 , -(C=NR)-R', or -(C=NR')-NH-R'; G is -OH, -O-(C-C 12 alkyl), -NHS(O) 2 -R', -(C=O)-R 2 , -(C=O)-O-R', or
-(C=O)-NH-R
2 ; L is -S-, -SCH 2 -, -SCH 2
CH
2 -, -S(O) 2 -, -S(O) 2
CH
2
CH
2 -, -S(O)-, 5 -S(O)CH 2
CH
2 -, -0-, -OCH-, -OCH 2
CH
2 -, -(C=O)-CH-, -CH(CH 3
)CH
2 -, -CFHCH 2 CF 2
CH
2 -, or -CRx=CRx- where Rx = H or halogen; 25 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 X, Y, and Z are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, N 3 , halogen, C-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino, CrC 6 alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, substituted aryl, -S-aryl, -S-substituted aryl, -0-aryl, -0-substituted aryl, NH-aryl, NH-substituted aryl, diarylamino, diheteroarylamino, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, -S-heteroaryl, -S-substituted heteroaryl, -0-heteroaryl, -0-substituted heteroaryl, -NH-heteroaryl, -NH-substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyi, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; or, in the alternative, X and Y or Y and Z taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are -attached form an aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or substituted heteroaryl cyclic moiety; j =0,1,2,3, or4; m =0,, 1, or 2; s =0,1 or 2; R' is hydrogen, C-C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C1 2 cycloalky, substituted C 3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalky, heterocycloalkyl, or substituted heterocycloalkyl;
R
2 is hydrogen, C1-C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C1 2 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3 -C1 2 cycloalkyl, alkylamino, dialkyl amino, arylamino, diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, or substituted heterocycloalkyl; and Ra and R 4 are each independently hydrogen or methyl; A compound according to formula IV above, wherein: A is -(C=O)-O-R'; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; j=3; m = s = 1; and
R
3 and R 4 are hydrogen; 26 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 A compound according to formula IV above, wherein: A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; j = 3; m = s = 1; and
R
3 and R 4 are hydrogen; A compound of Formula V: Y z 0 N o I N G H N (V) wherein A is hydrogen, -(C=O)-R' , -(C=O)-O-R', -C(=O)-NH-R 2 , -C(=S)-NH-R 2 , or
-S(O)
2
-R
2 , -(C=NR)-R', or -(C=NR')-NH-R'; G is -OH, -O-(C-C 12 alkyl), -NHS(O) 2 -R', -(C=O)-R 2 , -(C=0)-O-R', or -(C=0)-NH-R2 27 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 L is absent, -S-, -SCHr, -SCH 2
CH
2 -, -S(0)r, -S(0) 2
CH
2
CH
2 -, -S(O)-,
-S(O)CH
2
CH
2 -, -0-, -OCH 2 -, -OCH 2
CH
2 -, -(C=0)-CH 2 -; -CH(CH 3
)CH
2 -, -CFHCH 2 , -
CF
2
CH
2 -, or -CRx=CRx- where R, = H or halogen -; X, Y, and Z are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, N 3 , halogen, C-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino, C-C 6 alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, substituted aryl, -S-aryl, -S-substituted aryl, -0-aryl, -0-substituted aryl, NH-aryl, NH-substituted aryl, diarylamino, diheteroarylamino, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, -S-heteroaryl, -S-substituted heteroaryl, -0-heteroaryl, -0-substituted heteroaryl, -NH-heteroaryl, -NH-substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; or, in the, alternative, X and Y or Y and Z taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached form an aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, and substituted heteroaryl cyclic moiety; j=0, 1, 2,3, or4; m=0, 1, or2; s =0, 1 or2; R is hydrogen, C-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalky, or substituted heterocycloalkyl;
R
2 is hydrogen, C-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3 -C12 cycloalkyl, alkylamino, dialkyl amino, arylamino, diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, or substituted heterocycloalkyl; and
R
3 and R 4 are each independently hydrogen or methyl; A compound according to formula V above, wherein: A is -(C=O)-O-R; G is hydroxyl; 28 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 L is absent; j =3; m = s = 1; and
R
3 and R 4 are hydrogen; and A compound according to formula V above, wherein: A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; j=3; m = s = 1; and
R
3 and R 4 are hydrogen. Other embodiments are: compounds of formulae i or III as delineated herein, wherein: A is selected from the group consisting of: H, -(C=O)-R 2 , -(C=O)-O-R',
-C(=O)-NH-R
2 , -C(=S)-NH-R 2 , and -S(O)-R 2 ; G is selected from the group consisting of: -OH, -O-(C-C 1 2 alkyl), -NHS(O) 2 -R, -(C=O)-R', -(C=O)-O-R', and -(C=O)-NH-R'; L is selected from the group consisting of: absent, -S-, -SCH 2 -,
-SCH
2 CH-, -S(O) 2 -, -S(O) 2
CH
2
CH
2 -, -S(O)-, -S(O)CH 2
CH
2 -, -0-, -OCH 2 -,
-OCH
2
CH
2 -, -(C=O)-CH 2 -, -CH(CH 3
)CH
2 -, -CFHCH 2 -, and -CF 2
CH
2 -; W is selected N-N N-N Y y I' from the group consisting of: 4 ,N-~~ ,\ ,and ~ ;Qis selected from the group consisting of: absent, -CH 2 -, -0-, -NH-, -N(R 1 )-, -S-,
-S(O)
2 -, and -(C=O)-; Q' is selected from the group consisting of: absent, -CH 2 -, and -NH-; Y is selected from the group consisting of: H, C-C 6 alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; j = 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4; m = 0, 1, or 2; s = 0, 1 or 2; R' is selected from the group consisting of: H, C,-Cr alkyl, C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3 -C1 2 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, 29 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; R 2 is selected from the group consisting of: H, C-C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C1 2 cycloalkyl, alkylamino, dialkyl amino, arylamino, diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; and R 3 and R 4 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and methyl; compounds of formula 1I, wherein A is -(C=O)-0-R', R' is selected from the group consisting of H, C-C 6 alkyl, C-rC1 2 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, aryl, ) substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted N-N N_-N y N-N N Y N, heterocycloalkyl; G is hydroxyl; L isabsent; W is N N I \ N-Ne N- N ,,Y and ; Q is selected from the group consisting of: absent, -CH 2 -, -0-, -NH-, -N(R')-, -S-, -S(0) 2 -, and -(C=0)-; Q' is selected from the group consisting of: absent, -CH 2 -, and -NH-; Y is selected from the group consisting of: H, C-C 6 alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; j=3; m=s=1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen; Compounds of formula 11 wherein A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; G is hydroxyl; L is N-N N-N N-NN-N I N Y N Nk N , N Q*' \ 'N N QY IQ 'Y T ) absent; W is ,- , \ , and - ; Q is selected from the group consisting of: absent, -CH 2 -, -0-, -NH-, -N(R')-, -S-, -S(0) 2 -, and -(C=0)-; Q' is selected from the group consisting of: absent, -CH 2 -, and -NH-; Y is selected from the group consisting of: H, C-C 6 alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, i heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; j=3; m=s=1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen; 30 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Compounds of Formula 11, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-Rl, R 1 is selected from the group consisting of H, C-C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C1 2 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted N-N heterocycloalkyl; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; W is \ N ; Q is selectedifrom the group consisting of: absent, -CH 2 -, -0-, -NH-, -N(R')-, -S-, -S(0)2-, and -(C=O)-; Y is selected from the group consisting of: H, C 1
-C
6 alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; j=3; m=s=1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen; Compounds of Formula 1I, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; G is hydroxyl; L is N-N absent; W is N Q ; Q is selected from the group consisting of: absent, -CH-, -0-, -NH-, -N(R')-, -S-, -S(O)r7, and -(C=0)-; Y is selected from the group consisting of: H, C-C6 alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; j=3; m=s=1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen; ) Compounds of Formula IlIl, wherein A is -(C=0)-O-R', R' is selected from the group consisting of H, C-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, substituted C3-C12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted.heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalky, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted N-N N-N is y I ~N 'Y N= heterocycloalkyl; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; W is \ , N-. N ,.. and - ; Q is selected from the group consisting of: absent, -CH-, -0-, -NH-, -N(R')-, -S-, -S(O)-, and -(C=0)-; Q' is selected from the group consisting of: absent, -CH 2- , and -NH-; Y is selected from the group consisting of: H, Cr-C6 alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, 31 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 r' - I L ' J heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalky, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; j=3; m=s=1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen; Compounds of Formula Ill, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; G is hydroxyl; L is N-N N-N .N N Y XNS I absent; W is , - , and ; Q is selected from the group consisting of: absent, -CHr-, -0-, -NH-, -N(R')-, -S-, -S(0) 2 -, and -(C=0)-; Q' is selected from the group consisting of: absent, -CH-, and -NH-; Y is selected from the group consisting of: H, Cr-C 6 alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; j=3; m=s=1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen; Compounds of Formula Ill, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-R, R' is selected from the group consisting of H, Cr1C6 alkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, substituted C3-C12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted N-N heterocycloalkyl; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; W is N ; Q is selected from the group consisting of: absent, -CH
-
, -0-, -NH-, -N(R')-, -S-, -S(O)-, and -(C=0)-; Y is selected from the group consisting of: H, C1C6 alkyl, aryl, substituted aryj, ) arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; j=3; m=s=1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen; and Compounds of Formula 111, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; G is hydroxyl; L is N-N N Q 5 absent; W is N Q ; Q is selected from the group consisting of: absent, -CH
-
, -0-, -NH-, -N(R')-, -S-, -S(0) 2 -, and -(C=0)-; Y is selected from the group consisting of: H, Cr1C6 alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; j=3; m=s=1; and R 3 and R 4 are 3 hydrogen. Other embodiments are: 32 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Compounds of formulae II or III wherein wherein A is selected from the group consisting of: H, -(C=O)-R 2 , -(C=O)-O-R', -C(=O)-NH-R 2 , -C(=S)-NH-R 2 , and
-S(O)
2
-R
2 ; G is selected from the group consisting of: -OH, -O-(C-CI 2 alkyl),
-NHS(O)
2 -R', -(C=O)-R 2 -(C=O)-O-R', and -(C=O)-NH-R 2 ; L is selected from the group consisting of: absent, -S-, -SCH-, -SCH 2
CH
2 -, -S(O)-, -S(O) 2
CH
2 CH-, -S(O)-, -S(O)CH 2 CH-, -0-, -OCH-, -OCH 2
CH
2 -, -(C=O)-CH 2 -, -CH(CH 3
)CH
2 -, x Y N,
-CFHCH
2 - and -CF 2
CH
2 -; W is selected from the group consisting of: J , and x N ,yY J; X and Y are independently selected from the group consisting of: H, halogen,
C
1
-C
6 alkyl, C 3
-C,
2 cycloalkyl, -CH 2 alkylamino, -CHrjialkylamino, -CH 2 -arylamino, ) -CH 2 -diarylamino, -(C=O)-alkylamino, -(C=O)-dialkylamino, -(C=O)-arylamino, -(C=O)-diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl,. heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; in the alternative, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms occupying the 4 and 5 positions of the triazole ring, to which X and Y are 5 attached, form a cyclic moiety selected from the group consisting of aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, and substituted heteroaryl; j = 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4; m = 0, 1, or 2; s = 0, 1, or 2; R 1 is selected from the group consisting of: H, C 1
-C
6 alkyl, C-CU cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, D heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; R 2 is selected from the group consisting of: H, C-C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C1 2 cycloalkyl, alkylamino, dialkyl amino, arylamino, diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; and R 3 and R 4 are each independently selected from the group 5 consisting of hydrogen and methyl; A compound of Formula 1I, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-R, R' is selected from the group consisting of H, C-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl, aryl, 33 .WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalky, and substituted heterocycloalky; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; W is selected from the group consisting x Y x NANJy NN, N N' N of:, ± , and J ; X and Y are independently selected from the group consisting of: 5 H, halogen, C-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl -CH-alkylamino, -CH 2 -dialkylamino, -CH 2 arylamino, -CHr-diarylamino, -(C=O)-alkylamino, -(C=0)-dialkylamino, -(C=0) arylamino, -(C=0)-diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; in the alternative, X and Y taken ) together with the carbon atoms occupying the 4 and 5 positions of the triazole ring, to which X and Y are-attached, form a Syclic moiety selected from the group consisting of aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, and substituted heteroaryl; j=3; m=s=1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen; 5 A compound of Formula 11, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; G is hydroxyl; L is x Y x N N Y absent; W is selected from the group consisting of: Ji or ± ; X and Y are independently selected from the group consisting of: H, halogen, CI-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, -CH 2 -alkylamino, -CH 2 -dialkylamino, -CH 2 -arylamino, -CH 2 -diarylamino, -(C=0)-alkylamino, -(C=0)-dialkylamino, -(C=0)-arylamino, -(C=O)-diarylamino, aryl, 3 substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; in the alternative, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms occupying the 4 and 5 positions of the triazole ring, to which X and Y are attached, form a cyclic moiety selected from the group consisting of aryl; substituted aryl, heteroaryl, 5 and substituted heteroaryl; j=3; m=s=1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen; 34 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 A compound of Formula 11, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-R, R! is selected from the group consisting of H, C-C 6 alkyl, C3-C 12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted x Y N heterocycloalkyl; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; W is ± ; X and Y are independently selected from the group consisting of: H, halogen, C-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, -CH 2 alkylamino, -CH 2 -dialkylamino, -CH 2 -arylamino, -CH 2 -diarylamino, -(C=0)-alkylamino, -(C=O)-dialkylamino, -(C=O)-arylamino, -(C=O)-diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; in the alternative, X and. Y taken togetherWith the carbon atoms occupying the 4 and 5 positions of the triazole ring, to which X and Y are attached, form a cyclic moiety selected from the group consisting of aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, and substituted heteroaryl; j=3; m=s=1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen; A compound of Formula 11, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; G is hydroxyl; L is x Y N N absent; W is i ; X and Y are independently selected from the group consisting of: H, halogen, C-C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C1 2 cycloalkyl, -CH 2 -alkylamino, -OH 2 -dialkylamino, -CH 2 . arylamino, -CH 2 -diarylamino, -(C=0)-alkylamino, -(C=O)-dialkylamino, -(C=O) ) arylamino, -(C=O)-diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; in the alternative, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms occupying the 4 and 5 positions of the triazole ring, to which X and Y are attached, form a cyclic moiety selected from the group consisting of aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, and substituted heteroaryl; j=3; m=s=1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen; 35 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 A compound of Formula IlIl, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-R', R' is selected from the group consisting of H, C1C6 alkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3 -C1 2 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; W is selected from the group consisting x Y x N N of:, L , and - ; X and Y are independently selected from the group consisting of: H, halogen, Cr-C6 alkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, -CH 2 -alkylamino, -CH 2 -dialkylamino, -CH2r arylamino, -CH 2 -diarylamino, -(C=0)-alkylamino, -(C=O)-dialkylamino, -(C=0) arylamino, -(C=0)-diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; in the alternative, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms occupying the 4 and 5 positions of the triazole ring, to which X and Y are attached, form a cyclic moiety selected from the group consisting of aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, and substituted heteroaryl; j=3; m=s=1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen; A compound of Formula Ill, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; G is hydroxyl; L is X \ Y N-X x N N absent; W is selected from the group consisting of: 1. or ; X and Y are independently selected from the group consisting of: H, halogen, Cr-C 6 alkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, -CHralkylamino, -CH 2 -dialkylamino, -CH 2 -arylamino, -CH 2 -diarylamino, -(C=O)-alkylamino, -(C=O)-dialkylamino, -(C=O)-arylamino, -(C=O)-diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; in the alternative, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms occupying the 4 and 5 positions of the triazole ring, to which X and Y are attached, form a cyclic moiety selected from the group consisting of aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, and substituted heteroaryl; j=3; m=s=1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen; 36 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 A compound of Formula Ill, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-R', R 1 is selected from the group consisting of H, C-C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C1 2 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C,
2 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted x Y N, heterocycloalkyl; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; W is -L ; X and Y are independently selected from the group consisting of: H, halogen, C,-C 6 alkyl, G 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, -CH 2 alkylamino, -CH 2 -dialkylamino, -CH 2 -arylamino, -CH 2 -diarylamino, -(C=O)-alkylamino, -(C=O)-dialkylamino, -(C=O)-arylamino, -(C=O)-diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; in the alternative, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms occupying the 4 and 5 positions of the triazole ring, to which X and Y are attached, form a cyclic moiety selected from the group consisting of aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, and substituted heteroaryl; j=3; m=s=1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen; and A compound of Formula ll, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; G is hydroxyl; L is x Y absent; W is i ; X and Y are independently selected from the group consisting of: H, halogen, C-C 6 alkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, -CH 2 -alkylamino, -CH 2 -dialkylamino, -CHr arylamino, -CHrdiarylamino, -(C=O)-alkylamino, -(C=O)-dialkylamino, -(C=O) arylamino, -(C=0)-diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; in the alternative, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms occupying the 4 and 5 positions of the triazole ring, to which X and Y are attached, form a cyclic moiety selected from the group consisting of aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, and substituted heteroaryl; j=3; m=s=1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen. 37 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Other embodiments are compounds of formulae IV or V: Y Y x Yzx z NJN JNo N 0 InM H o I0 o' H N N H N NA N- R3 IG N .3 G L CH CHL H (IV) (V) wherein A is H, -(C=O)-R 2 , -(C=O)-O-R', -C(=O)-NH-R 2 , -C(=S)-NH-R 2 , or
-S(O)-R
2 ; G is -OH, -O-(C 1
-C
12 alkyl), -NHS(0) 2 -R', -(C=O)-R 2 , -(C=O)-O-Rl, or
-(C=O)-NH-R
2 ; L is absent, -S-, -SCH 2 -, -SCH 2 CH-, -S(O)--; -S(O) 2
CH
2
CH
2 -, -S(O)-, -S(O)CH 2
CH
2 -, -0-, -OCH 2 -, -OCH 2 CH-, -(C=O)-CH 2 -, -CH(CH3)CH 2 -, -CFHCH- or -CF 2
CH
2 -; X, Y, and Z are independently selected from the group consisting of H, N 3 , halogen, C-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino, ) C-C 6 .alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, substituted aryl, -S-aryl, -S-substituted aryl, -0-aryl, -0-substituted aryl, NH-aryl, NH-substituted aryl, diarylamino, diheteroarylamino, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, -S-heteroaryl, -S-substituted heteroaryl, -0-heteroaryl, -0-substituted heteroaryl, -NH-heteroaryl, -NH-substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted 5 heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; or, in the alternative, X and Y or Y and Z taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached form an aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or substituted heteroaryl cyclic moiety; j = 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4; m = 0, 1, or 2; s = 0, 1, or 2; R' is H, C-C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C1 2 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3 -C1 2 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, 38 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, or substituted heterocycloalkyl; R 2 is H, C 1
-C
6 alkyl, C 3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl, alkylamino, dialkyl amino, arylamino, diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, or substituted heterocycloalky; and R 3 and R 4 are each independently hydrogen or methyl; A compound of Formula IV, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-R' ; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; ; j=3; m=s=1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen; ) A compound of Formula IV, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; j=3; m=s=1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen; A compound of Formula V, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-R'; L is absent; j=3; m=s=1; 5 and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen; and A compound of Formula V, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; j=3; m=s=1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen. ) x Y Another aspect is a compound of formula 1, wherein W is wherein V, X, Y, and Z are each independently selected from: a) -C 1
-C
6 alkyl containing 0, 1, 2, or 3 heteroatoms selected from 0, S, or N, optionally substituted with one or more substituent selected from halogen, 5 aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, or substituted heterocycloalkyl; b) -C 2
-C
6 alkenyl containing 0, 1, 2, or 3 heteroatoms selected from 0, S, or N, optionally substituted with one or more substituent selected from 39 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 halogen, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocygloalkyl, or substituted heterocycloalkyl; c) -C-C 6 alkynyl containing 0, 1, 2, or 3 heteroatoms selected from 0, S, or N, optionally substituted with one or more substituent selected from halogen, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, or substituted heterocycloalkyl; d) aryl; e) substituted aryl; f) heteroaryl; ) g) substituted heteroaryl; h) heterocycloalkyl; or i) substituted heterocycloalkyl; or in the alternative, V and X, X and Y, or Y and Z are taken together with the carbons to which they are attached to for a cyclic moiety selected from: aryl, 5 substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, or substituted heterocycloalkyl; Y Another aspect is a compound of formula I, wherein W is ~L wherein X, Y, and Z are each independently selected from: 3 a) -C-C 6 alkyl containing 0, 1, 2, or 3 heteroatoms selected from 0, S, or N, optionally substituted with one or more substituent selected from halogen, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, or substituted heterocycloalkyl; b) -C-C 6 alkenyl containing 0, 1, 2, or 3 heteroatoms selected from 0, S, or 5 N, optionally substituted with one or more substituent selected from halogen, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, or substituted heterocycloalkyl; c) -C-C 6 alkynyl containing 0, 1, 2, or 3 heteroatoms selected from 0, S, or N, optionally substituted with one or more substituent selected from 40 WO20041072243 PCT/US2004/003479 halogen, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, or substituted heterocycloalkyl; d) aryl; e) substituted aryl; f) heteroaryl; g) substituted heteroaryl; h) heterocycloalkyl; or i) substituted heterocycloalkyl; or in the alternative, Y and Z are taken together with the carbons to which they ) are attached to for a cyclic moiety selected from: aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, or substituted heterocycloalkyl; All remainingsubstituents areas listed above. Another aspect is a method for making a compound of Formula I herein, comprising the steps of: (i) reacting a proline derivative of formula VI: L R VI wherein, P is a nitrogen-protecting group (e.g., BOC); L is a leaving group (e.g., halide, OMs); R is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aralkyl, or optionally substituted heteroaralkyl; with a nucleophilic heterocyclic compound; and (ii) converting the resulting compound to a compound of Formula I as delineated herein. 41 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Another aspect is a method for making-a compound of Formula I herein, comprising the steps of: (i) reacting a compound of formula VII: L N J H N N HM N G AR3 L E 5 Formula VII wherein, L is a leaving group (e.g., halide, OMs); A is a nitrogen protecting group (e.g., BOC); and 0 the remaining variables are as defined for formula I; with a nucleophilic heterocyclic compound; and (ii) converting the resulting compound to a compound of Formula I as delineated herein. In other aspects, the invention relates to a method for making a compound of any 15 of the formulae delineated herein (e.g., Formulae I to VII with substituent variables as defined anywhere herein) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester or prodrug thereof, comprising the steps of: (i) reacting a proline derivative described herein (including that having a mesylate substituent) with a nucleophilic form (e.g., protonated or corresponding metal salt form) of a heterocyclic compound; and (ii) converting the ?0 resulting compound to a compound of any of the formulae delineated herein. In other aspects the method includes reacting any one or more intermediate compounds as 42 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 described herein, or includes any one or more steps or reagents or combination of transformations as specifically delineated in the examples and schemes herein. In another aspect, the invention relates to a method of making a pharmceutical composition comprising combining a compound of any of the formulae herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester or prodrug thereof, with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. Another aspect is a compound of formulae VI or VII wherein L is OMs and A and the remaining variables are as defined for any of the formulae (e.g., I, 1I, 111) herein. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION A first embodiment of the invention is a compound represented by Formula I as described above, or a pharmaceuticaIly acceptable salt, ester or prodrug thereof, in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient. In some embodiments , the compounds may be of any of the formulae delineated herein (including any substituent variables as defined anywhere delineated herein) wherein W is selected from the following aromatics, which may optionally be substituted: 43 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Aromatic N N' N H H H 1H4-Pyrrole 1 H-lmidazole 1 H-pyrazole Furani Thiophene Oxazole Thiazole Isoxazole Isothiazole N N (NN NNNN N H' H Benotialre Byiaiezooxazole 1H-miazo[4,5-chpyrine 1unxln ,3-ihyr ziiazolne-~one N N N XI) NH Sinrn N H H,-iyr-Hidl NH HId~-,-in H 113Di Hr-benzoimdaole2-thpione 1-Idl HBnomdzl 1 -Di rol - iemdo NN 0 0 1H - Quanti)- - n H H N ) H-midao H,-Qupioin-4e 1HQ uiNazol-4-o H NHCrbzl NNH H 2,3-Dihydro-l iH-Quinazolin-2e2,--donn In oihero-enombaodienttecmnsaye Ho nyo t,-h fobomae dlnae heren (ncldin an sustiuen vaibesadfined anwhr-dlneaehrin N \ S ON 44 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 wherein W is selected from the following non-aromatics, which may be optionally substituted: Non-Aromatic NN NH H H H H Aziridine Azetidine Pyrrolidine 4,5-Dihydro-1H-pyrazole Pyraiofidine 0-- Qo 0 Q.__o O N OX O O -H H _ Imidazolidin-2-one Imidazolidine-2-thione Pyrrolidin-2-one Pyrrolidine-2,5-dione Piperidine-2,6-dione H H H O O N1 O ON) H H H H H N Piperidin-2-one Piperazine-2,6-dione Piperazin-2-one Piperazine Morpholine H Thiomorpholine 1,1-dioxide HNQ O O o Q H H N Pyrazolidin-3-one Imidazolidine-2,4-dione Pidine a 0 . 0-0)HND Tetrahydro-furan Tetrahydro-pyran [1,4]Dioxane 1,2,3,6-Tetrahydro-pyridine Another embodiment of the invention is a compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester or prodrug thereof, represented by Formula i as described above where W is a tetrazole or derivative thereof, in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient. 45 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Another embodiment of the invention is a compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester or prodrug thereof, represented by Formula Ill as described above wherein W is a tetrazole, or derivative thereof, in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient. Exemplary tetrazolyl macrocyclic compounds and associated methods of the invention are disclosed in US Provisional Patent application no. (conversion of US 10/365,854), filed February 13, 2003. Representative subgenera of the invention include, but are not limited to: Compounds of Formula 11, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-R', R' is selected from the group consisting of H, C-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted N-N - . N--N y- N 'QY N-N heterocycloalkyl; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; W is N-=N N- N ,Y and - ; Q is selected from the group consisting of: absent, -CH 2 -, -0-, -NH-, -N(R')-, -S-, -S(0)2-, and -(C=0)-; Q' is selected from the group consisting of: absent, -CH 2 -, and -NH-; Y is selected from the group consisting of: H, C-C 6 alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; j=3; m=s=1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen; Compounds of Formula 11, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; G is hydroxyl; L is N-N N -N N-N N" 1-1 Y N ,,. ' Y O'W absent; W is ,NQ \N , and ; Q is selected from the group consisting of: absent, -CH-, -0-, -NH-, -N(R')-, -S-, -S(O)-, and -(C=0)-; Q' is selected from the group consisting of: absent, -CH 2 -, and -NH-; Y is selected from the group consisting of: H, C-C 6 alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, 46 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; j=3; m=s=1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen; Compounds of Formula 11, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-R', R' is selected from the group consisting of H, C-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted N-N heterocycloalky; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; W is \ ; Q is selected from the group consisting of: absent, -CH 2 -, -0-, -NH-, -N(R')-, -S-, -S(0) 2 -, and -(C=0)-; Y is selected from the group consisting of: H, C 1
-C
6 alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalky; j=3; m=s=1; and R 3 andR 4 are hydrogen; Compounds of Formula 11, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; G is hydroxyl; L is N-N absent; W is N Q; Q is selected from the group consisting of: absent, -CH 2 -, -0-, -NH-, -N(R')-, -S-, -S(0) 2 -, and -(C=O)-; Y is selected from the group consisting of: H, C 1
-C
6 alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; j=3; m=s=1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen; Compounds of Formula IlIl, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-R', R 1 is selected from the group consisting of H, C-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted N-N N-::N NN f N-N N- Q Q heterocycloalkyl; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; W is , , N N , and - ; Q is selected from the group consisting of: absent, -CH 2 -, -0-, -NH-, -N(R)-, -S-, -S(O) 2 -, and -(C=0)-; Q' is selected from the group consisting of: 47 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 absent, -CH 2 -, and -NH-; Y is selected from the group consisting of: H, C 1
-C
6 alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; j=3; m=s=1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen; Compounds of Formula Ill, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; G is hydroxyl; L is N-NNN N Y N absent; W is \ , , , and ; Q is selected from the group consisting of: absent, -CH-, -0-, -NH-, -N(R')-, -S-, -S(0) 2- , and -(C=0)-; Q' is selected from the group consisting of: absent, -CH
-
, and -NH-; Y is selected from the group consisting of: H, C1-C6 alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; j=3; m=s=1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen; Compounds of Formula l1l, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-R', R' is selected from the group consisting of H, C1-C6 alkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, substituted C3-C12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted N-:N heterocycloalkyl; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; W is \N ; Q is selected from the group consisting of: absent, -CH 2- , -0-, -NH-, -N(R 1 )-, -S-, -S(0) 2- , and -(C=0)-; Y is selected from the group consisting of: H, C1-C6 alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; j=3; m=s=1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen; and Compounds of Formula Ill, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; G is hydroxyl; L is N-N absent; W is NQ ; Q is selected from the group consisting of: absent, -CH 2- , -0-, -NH-, -N(R')-, -S-, -S(0)-, and -(C=0)-; Y is selected from the group consisting of: H, C1-C6 alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, 48 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 heterocycloalky, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; j=3; m=s=1; and Ra and R 4 are hydrogen. Representative compounds of the invention include, but are not limited to, the following compounds: TABLE 1 A G L W Y Compounds of Formula i, where m = s = 1 tBOC OH Absent N=: Absent phenyl 3 R*=W=H; tBOC OH Absent N=N Absent 2-bromophenyl 3 W = W = H; N Q tBOC OH Absent N=N Absent 3-bromophenyl 3 R= W= H; NQ tBOC OH Absent N-N Absent 4-bromophenyl 3 W=W=H; N Q tBOC OH Absent N--N Absent 5-Bromo-2- 3 W = R= H; N,.: k Y.thienyl N Q TBOC OH Absent N- N Absent 2-bromo-4- 3 R = W = H; N,-Az.rkQ pyridyl NQ TBOC OH Absent N=N Absent 2-biphenyl 3 W = = H; TBOC OH Absent N- Absent 3-biphenyl 3 = H; N Q TBOC OH Absent N-N Absent 4-biphenyl 3 R4= H; NQ TBOC OH Absent N:N Absent 3-(3- 3 W= =H; _______ NSN*Q~Ythienyl)phenyl TBOC OH Absent N-N Absent 3-(p- 3 W= W=H; ff'.zk 'Ytrifuoromethoxy N a _____________ _________phenyt)phenyl TBOC OH Absent AN Absent 3-(p- 3 W=W=H; VN .z;k ' cyanophenyl)ph N Q ey TBOC OH Absent N=N Absent 4-(3- 3 W=R 4 H; thienyl)phenyl TBOC OH Absent N-N absent 4-(p- 3 R = R 4 = H; N,~ triluoromethoxy o phenyl)phenyl 3R TBOC OH Absent Absent 4-(p- 3 R = R= H; m 3 R = R Hyanophenyl)ph enyl 2-brom-4- 3 Ra= 49 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 TABLE I A G L W Q Y J R_,R* TBOC OH Absent N-N Absent 5-phenyl-2- 3 R= R= H; SN. Ythienyl TBOC OH Absent N=N Absent 5-phenyl-3- 3 R = R 4 = H; N Y pyridyl TBOC OEt Absent N=N Absent 3-chloro-4- 3 R- = = H; N, Y hydroxyphenyl TBOC OH Absent N=N Absent 3-chloro-4- 3 R= = H; N, Y hydroxyphenyl TBOC OH Absent NN Absent 3-bromo-4- 3 R= R 4 = H; N !L.'Y hydroxyphenyl TBOC OH Absent N=N Absent 2-methyl-4- 3 R = R = H; N Ybromophenyl TBOC OH Absent NN Absent 3-methyl-4- 3 Rd = R 4 = H; N Y bromophenyl TBOC OH Absent N=N Absent n-propyl 3 R = R 4 = H; N NY TBOC OH Absent N--N Absent n-butyl 3 R=R 4 =H; TBOC OH Absent -- N Absent 4-ethoxyphenyl 3 R = R 4 = H; TBOC OH Absent N Absent 4- 3 R 3 = = H; . N' "Y propoxyphenyl TBOC OH Absent N Absent 4-butoxyphenyl 3. R 3 = R 4 = H; N Q TBOC OH Absent N-N Absent 3- 3 R=R= H; N Y methoxyphenyl TBOC OH Absent N-N Absent 3,4- 3 R 3 = = H; N, -zJ-. 'Y dimethoxypheny QI TBOC OH Absent . -N Absent 4-methoxy-1- 3 R 4 = R 4 = H; N Y naphthyl N -Q TBOC OH Absent N-N Absent 4- 3 R= R 4 = H; N, -I, ,Y phenoxyphenyl ____ ___ __ ___ _ \ N Q TBOC OH Absent N-N Absent benzyl 3 R = R = H; N Q TBOC OH Absent N-N Absent p-phenylbenzyl 3 R = R4= H; N Q 50 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 TABLE I A G L W Q YJ R_,_R4 TBOC OH Absent N-N Absent 3-chlorophenyl 3 R 6 = R 4 = H; TBOC OH Absent N:-N Absent 3-fluorophenyl 3 R* 4 H; N Q TBOC OH Absent N=N Absent 3- 3 R = H; N Y methoxyphenyl TBOC OH Absent N-N Absent 3- 3 .R = R 4 = H; N, N-kQ,,Y phenoxyphenyl TBOC OH Absent N=N Absent 3- 3 R'= R 4 = H; N Y enzyloxypheny TBOC OH Absent NN Absent 3- 3 R = = H; N d 'QY trifluormethylph 'N enyl TBOC OH Absent N:N Absent 4-bromophenyl 3 R=R 4 = H; TBOC OH Absent N-N Absent 4-fluorophenyl 3 R 3 = R 4 = H; N ,Y TBOC OH Absent N=N Absent 4- h3 R" = H; NN-kQ Y methoxyphenyl TBOC OH Absent 'N NAbsent 4-ethoxyphenyl 3 R'= R=H; N N Q TBOC OH Absent N---N Absent 4- 3 R* = R= H; N Y trhfluoromethylp heny TBOC OH Absent N=N Absent 5- 3 R 3 = R 4 = H; N Y di(trifluoromethy N_ Q I)phenyl TBOC OH Absent N-N Absent 4-(N, N- 3 R = R = H; dimethylamino) 3,5 di(trifluoromethy I I)phenyl TBOC OH Absent N-N Absent 2,4- 3 R 6 = R 4 = H; NA dichiorophenyl TBOC OH Absent NN Absent 3,5- 3 R = R 4 = H; AN !kQY dichlorophenyl TBOC OH Absent N-N Absent 3,4- 3 R 3 = R 4 = H; AN N; Y dichlorophenyl TBOC OH Absent N=N Absent 2-pyridyl 3 R W= R 4 = H; N Y 51 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 TABLE I A G L W Q Y J R_,R4 TBOC OH Absent N-N Absent 2-pyridyl 3 R = R 4 = H; N'N Q TBOC OH Absent N=N Absent 3-pyridyl 3 R 3 = = H; TBOC OH Absent N=N Absent 4-pyridyl 3 = R 4 = H; N Q Y TBOC OH Absent N Absent 4-methoxy-3- 3 R* = R 4 = H; N Y bromophenyl TBOC OH Absent N=N Absent 4- 3 R = R 4 = H; \ N QY (methylcyclopro pane)phenyl TBOC OH Absent N=N Absent 3-chloro-4- 3 R 3 = R 4 = H; Y (methylcyclopro V,_ pane)phenyl TBOC OH Absent N-N Absent 3-chloro-4- 3 R = R 4 = H; N Y methoxyphenyl TBOC OH Absent NN Absent 3-chloro-4- 3 R' = R 4 = H; N Y ethoxyphenyl TBOC OH. Absent N-N Absent 3-bromo-4- 3 R = R 4 = H; IN Y ethoxyphenyl TBOC OH Absent N=N Absent 3-chloro-4-(2- 3 R 6 = = H; N N Q Y hydroxyethoxy) phenyl TBOC OH Absent N-N Absent 3-bromo-4-(2- 3 R = R 4 = H; N Y hydroxyethoxy) 'N Q phenyl TBOC OH Absent N N Absent 3-chloro-4-(O- 3 R = R 4 = H; N Y allyl)phenyi TBOC OH Absent N N Absent 3-bromo-4-(O- 3 Rd = R 4 = H; N Y allyl)phenyi TBOC OH Absent N-N Absent 3-chloro-4-(O- 3 R = = H; N Y CH 2
SCH
3 )phen N A TBOC OH Absent N N Absent 3-chloro-4-(O- 3 R= R= H; N YCH 2
SCH
3 )phen TBOC OH Absent -'=_ - 3 R = R H; -CH TBOC OH Absent NQ= 3 R = R 4 H; N N Y -Cl-52 52 WO 2004/072243 - ~ PCT/US2004/003479 TABLE 1 ____ A GL. W Q Y R, 4 -(C=O)-O OH Absent N-N Absent phenyl 3 R=R 4 = H; wherein N Q W= cyclopenty I _____________________________________________ __________________________ -(C=O)-O OH Absent N-N Absent phenyl 3 R = H; whereinN Q cyclobutyl -Asetbsntphny_3H -(C=O)-O OH Abet N -NAbet hny3 R = =H whereinN 0 Rl= cyclohexyl ________________ ____ -(C=O)-O OH Absent N-N Asn hnl3 R 4 = wherein Y N, 0 -(C=O)-O OH Absent N-N Absent phenyl 3 R 3 = =H; N,-zL kY wherein ' -(C=O)-O OH Absent N-N Abet pey 3 = = H; wherein -(C=O)-R OH Absent NN bet pey 3 = =H whri N,. k, NQ cyclopenty I ____________ ________________________ -(C0)-N OH Absent N-N Absent phenyl 3 R' = H;
H-R
1 N, wherein V ' W= cyclopenty I _____________ ____________ ________________________ ____________ _______________________ ___________________ 53 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 TABLE 1 A G L W Q Y J -(C=S)-N OH Absent N-N Absent phenyl 3 R = R= H; H-R N Y wherein N R = cyclopenty -S(O)rjd OH . Absent N-N Absent phenyl 3 = H; wherein N Y R =N Q. cyclopenty tBOC -0-CH 2 - Absent N-N Absent phenyl 3 R3 = R4 = H; cyclopent N tBOC -NHS(O) Absent N-N Absent phenyl 3 R= R 4 = H; -CH-rcy N Y clopentyl tBOC -(C=O) Absent N7N Absent phenyl 3 R 3 = = H;
-CH
2 -cy - N Y clopenty - ____ tBOC -(C=0)- Absent NN Absent phenyl 3 R=R 4 =H; O-CHz-c NN Y yclopenty tBOC -(C=O)- Absent N-N Absent phenyl 3 R'= R 4 = H; OH N Y tBOC -(C=O)- Absent N-N Absent phenyl 3 R 3 = H; NH-CH N Y -cyclop entyl tBOC OH -(C=O) N-N Absent phenyl I R = = H; CH- NN Y tBOC OH -CH(C N-N Absent phenyl I R = methyl,
H
3
)CH
2 . N Y = H; IBOC OH -O_ N -N Absent phenyl 0 Rd = methyl N N Q V tBOC OH -S- N N - Absent phenyl 0 R= methyl, N, Y Re= H; BOC OH -S(O)- N-N Absent phenyl 0 R 3 = methyl, N Y R 4 = H; N Q tBOC OH -S(O) - N-N Absent phenyl 0 Rd = methyl, N Y R 4 = H; tBOC OH -SCH 2 N Absent phenyl 0 R= R= OHN, ,NN~QY OH 3 ; CHr N YQC 54 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 TABLE I A G L W Q Y J RR BOC OH -- CF 2 C I-N Absent phenyl 1 R = R = H; HrCN Y tBOC OH -CFHC N-N Absent phenyl 1 R R 4 = H;
H
- NN Y Compounds of Formula III, where m = s = 1 tBOC OH Abse N--N Absent Iphenyl 13 R =iR4= H. nt N% Y , The following additional tetrazolyl macrocyclic molecules of the invention were made by the methods and procedures described herein. While stereochemistry is shown, the invention is not limited to the stereochemistry depicted. Those of ordinary skill in the art will readily appreciate that other isomers of these compounds are also within the scope of the invention. 00 0 55 WO9 2004/072243 ,,*.-- PCT/US2004/003479 ooo 0 07- J 01 56 .WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 0 0 F '0 57 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 0 0~58 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 11. 1- lhI.. A NQ ON 0. 0 0 00 0 0Q5 0 59 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 0 00 00 0 0 0j 0 Another embodiment of the invention is a compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester or prodrug thereof, represented by Formula 11 as described above where W is a triazole or derivative thereof, in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient. ) Another embodiment of the invention is a compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester or prodrug thereof, represented by Formula Ill as described above 60 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 where W is a triazole or derivative thereof, in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient. Exemplary triazole macrocyclic compounds and associated methods of the invention are disclosed in US Provisional Patent application no. (conversion of US 10/360,947), filed February 7, 2003. Representative subgenera of the invention include, but are not limited to: A compound of Formula It, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-R', R' is selected from the group consisting of H, CI-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; W is selected from the group consisting X Y X N N N N. of:, J. , and . ; X and Y are independently selected from the group consisting of: H, halogen, C-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, -CH 2 -alkylamino, -CH 2 -dialkylamino, -CH 2 arylamino, -CHr-diarylamino, -(C=0)-alkylamino, -(C=O)-dialkylamino, -(C=O) arylamino, -(C=O)-diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; in the alternative, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms occupying the 4 and 5 positions of the triazole ring, to which X and Y are attached, form a cyclic moiety selected from the group consisting of ) aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, and substituted heteroaryl; j=3; m=s=1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen; A compound of Formula II, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; G is hydroxyl; L is x Y X - N NN, N IN absent; W is selected from the group consisting of: JL or L ; X and Y are independently selected from the group consisting of: H, halogen, C-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl, -CH 2 -alkylamino, -CH 2 -dialkylamino, -CH 2 -arylamino, -CH 2 -diarylamino, -(C=O)-alkylamino, -(C=O)-dialkylamino, -(C=O)-arylamino, -(C=0)-diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, 61 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; in the alternative, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms occupying the 4 and 5 positions of the triazole ring, to which X and Y are attached, form a cyclic moiety selected from the group consisting of aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, and substituted heteroaryl; j=3; m=s=1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen; A compound of Formula 1I, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-R', R' is selected from the group consisting of H, C-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3 -C1 2 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted x Y - NN ) heterocycloalkyl; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; W is -L ; X and Y are independently selected from the group consisting of: H, halogen, C-C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C1 2 cycloalkyl, -CH 2 alkylamino, -CHr-dialkylamino, -CH 2 -arylamino, -CH 2 -diarylamino, -(C=O)-alkylamino, -(C=O)-dialkylamino, -(C=O)-arylamino, -(C=O)-diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, 5 substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; in the alternative, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms occupying the 4 and 5 positions of the triazole ring, to which X and Y are attached, form a cyclic moiety selected from the group consisting of aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, and substituted heteroaryl; j=3; m=s=1; and R 3 and R 4 -are hydrogen; ) A compound of Formula 1I, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; G is hydroxyl; L is x Y N, absent; W is . ; X and Y are independently selected from the group consisting of: H, halogen, C 1
-C
6 alkyl, C 3 -C1 2 cycloalkyl, -CH 2 -alkylamino, -CH 2 -dialkylamino, -CH 2 arylamino, -CH-diarylamino, -(C=O)-alkylamino, -(C=O)-dialkylamino, -(C=O) arylamino, -(C=O)-diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, 5 heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalky, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; in the alternative, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms occupying the 4 and 5 positions of the triazole ring, to 62 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 which X and Y are attached, form a cyclic moiety selected from the group consisting of aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, and substituted heteroaryl; j=3; m=s=1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen; A compound of Formula 111, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-R', R 1 is selected from the group consisting of H, C-C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C1 2 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; W is selected from the group consisting x y x N N of:, i , and i ; X and Y are independently selected from the group consisting of: H, halogen, C-C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C1 2 cycloalkyl, -CH-alkylamino, -CH 2 -dialkylamino, -CHr arylamino, -CH 2 -diarylamino, -(C=Q)-alkylamino, -(C=O)-dialkylamino, -(C=0) arylamino, -(C=O)-diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; in the alternative, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms occupying the 4 and 5 positions of the triazole ring, to which X and Y are attached, form a cyclic moiety selected from the group consisting of aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, and substituted heteroaryl; j=3; m=s=1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen; A compound of Formula IlIl, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; G is hydroxyl; L is x y x N N ) absent; W is selected from the group consisting of: -L or i ; X and Y are independently selected from the group consisting of: H, halogen, CI-Cs alkyl, C 3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl, -CH-alkylamino, -CH 2 -dialkylamino, -CH-arylamino, -CH 2 diarylamino, -(C=O)-alkylamino, -(C=O)-dialkylamino, -(C=O)-arylamino, -(C=O)-diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, 5 heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; in the alternative, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms occupying the 4 and 5 positions of the triazole ring, to which X and Y are attached, form 63 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 a cyclic moiety selected from the group consisting of aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, and substituted heteroaryl; j=3; m=s=1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen; A compound of Formula -11, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-R', R is selected from the group consisting of H, C1-C 6 alkyl, C 3
-C,
2 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted x Y heterocycloalkyl; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; W is L ; X and Y are independently selected from the group consisting of: H, halogen, C 1
-C
6 alkyl, C 3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl, -CHr alkylamino, -CH 2 -dialkylamino, -CH 2 -arylamino, -CH 2 -diarylamino, -(C=O)-alkylamino, -(C=O)-dialkylamino, -(C=0)-arylamino, -(C=Q)-diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, hetergaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalky; in the alternative, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms occupying the 4 and 5 positions of the triazole ring, to which X and Y are attached, form a cyclic moiety 5 selected from the group consisting of aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, and substituted heteroaryl; j=3; m=s=1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen; and A compound of Formula 1I, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; G is hydroxyl; L is x Y N, absent; W is -L ;,X and Y are independently selected from the group consisting of: H, halogen, C 1
-C
6 alkyl, C 3
-C,
2 cycloalkyl, -CH 2 alkylamino, -CH 2 -dialkylamino, -CH 2 ) arylamino, -CH 2 -diarylamino, -(C=O)-alkylamino, -(C=O)-dialkylamino, -(C=O) arylamino, -(C=O)-diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylajkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalky, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; in the alternative, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms occupying the 4 and 5 positions of the triazole ring, to 5 which X and Y are attached, form a .yclic moiety selected from the group consisting of aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, and substituted heteroaryl; j=3; m=s=1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen. 64 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Representative compounds of the invention include, but are not limited to, the following compounds: TABLE 2 Compounds of Formula 11 where m = s I A G L W J RR tBOC OH absent X Y 3 =W=H; N X = Y = phenyl tBOC OH absent X 3 R*=R=H. -X = Y = phenyl tBOC OH absent X y 3 W=W=H; NVN X = n-propyl Y = phenyl tBOC OH absent X Y 3 R=R=H; N, NN X = m-methoxypheny; Y = p-methoxyphenyl tBOC OH absent X Y 3 R=IR N, N X = m-bromophenyl; Y = p-methoxyphenyl tBOC OH absent X Y 3 W=R=H; N, X = 1-napthyl; Y = p-methoxyphenyl tBOC OH absent X Y 3 R' R= H; N, N X = 2-thienyl; Y = p-methoxyphenyl tBOC OH absent X Y 3 R= R= H; N, N I N X = 3-thieny; i___ . Y = p-methoxyphenyl , 65 RW 12004107-2243 1 1 PCT/US2004/003479 TABLE 2 Compounds of Formula 11 where m = I A G -L W j R, tBOC OH a bsent X y ~ 3 W=W=HW X = 4-pyrazolyi; ________________Y = pmethoxypheny tBOC OH absent x ~ 3 RW* TH; N X = 3-pyridyl; Y = p1-methoxypheny __ tBOC OH absent X 3 W=W=H; X = 2-pyridyl; Y pmethoxyphenyl __ tBOC OH absent X ' 3 W=W=; N, N X = 2-thiazolyi; ___Y = p-methoxyphenyl __ tBOC OH absent X ' 3 W=R=H; N, N X =benzyl; __________Y YPhenyl tBOC OH absent X 'y 3 R =R =H; X = n-butyi; ______________ Y= phenyl tBOC OH absent x Y 3 W H X = n-propyl; ____Y =n-propyi tBOC OH absent x Y 3 W=W=; X = 4-(N, N dimethylamino)phenyl; _____ ____ _____ _ __ _____ ____ ___ _ ____ Y = phenyl _ _ _ _ _ 66 WO02004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 TABLE 2 Compounds of Formula 11 where m =s=1 A G L WRW tBOC OH absent x ' 3 W=IWT1Y N, N X = (N, N diethylamino)methyl; _____________Y =__ Yphenyl tBOC OH 'absent X "3 R =R =H; X = N, N diethylaminocarbonyl; ___________Y Y=phenyl tBOC OH absent x ' 3 R =R=H; X =mr-chlorophenyl; ________________Y = 4-ethoxyphenyl tBOC OH absent X 3 R3 W H; X = 2-phenylethenyl; OH absent = Yphenyl tBOC OHabsen Benzotriazole - 3 R = H; tBOC OH absent 5, 6-methylbenzotriazole 3 W=RTi; _______and tBOC OH absent x " 3 W=W=H; X =N ethylaminocarbonyl; ____________ = Phenyl -(=)OROH absent X 3 W =R=H; wherein W 1 = N, IN cyclopentyl NN X = phenyl; ____________Y =__ Yphenyl -CO-- OH absent x " 3 R=R=H; wherein W 1 = cyclobutylNNI X = phenyl; _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ ____ _____ Y = phenyl_ _ _ _ _ 67 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 TABLE 2 Compounds of Formula 11 where m = s= I A G L W j R, R. -(C=0)-O-R ; OH absent X 3 R=R4= H; wherein R' = N cyclohexyl N X = phenyl; Y = phenyl -(C=0)-O-R ; OH absent X Y 3 RW=WR=H; N, N I wherein R1 =X henyl; Y = phenyl -(C=O)-O-R OH absent X 3 R = =H; N, NIN wherein R, = q NNL X = phenyl; Y = phenyl - OH absent X 3 R*=R=H; wherein RN, I O N NN X = phenyl; Y = phenyl -(C=0 ; OH -absent x Y 3 R 4= H; wherein R 2 N cyclopentyl N X = phenyl; Y = phenyl -(C=O)-NH-R; OH absent X Y 3 R =R =H; wherein R 2 cyclopentyl N'NN X = phenyl; Y = phenyl wherein RW_= OH absent X Y 3 R= 4=H; cyclopenty N N X = phenyl; -Y = Phenyl
-S(O)
2
-R
2 ; OH absent x 3 Rp=h Rw =H; wherein R N IN cyclopentyl N X = phenyl; Y = phenyl 68 ~WO200-4/072243~, PCT/US2004/003479 TABLE 2 Compounds of Formula 11 where mr= s= I A G L W T i -=O-- -0-phenethyl absent X ~'3 R3=R4= wherein R' N=I H; cyclopentyl N. X = phenyl; Y__ Y=phenyl -=O-- -NH-phenethyl absent X ~'3 R3 =R4 wherein R'=NNH; cyctopentyl N A. X = phenyl; ____ ____ ____ __ _ ____ Y = phenyl -(=)oW-NHS(O)z-phenethyl absent -X 3 R3 R4 wherein R' N=I H; cyclopentyl N~ ±. X = phenyl; ____Y = phenyl -(=)OW-(C=O)-O.H absent X Y 3 R* R= H wherein R 1 I
N
2 cyclopentyl NNN A. X = phenyl; _______________~~~ p__ _ __ _ _ _ __ Y p enyt -(=)OR; -(C=O)-O-phenethyl absent x Y 3 R = R=H; wherein W A' cyclopentylNNN X = phenyl; -(C=O-O-R-(C=O)--NH-pheneth absent A 3 RphR= H wherei R' AI, IN cyclopentyl NNN X penl Y = phenyl; -C-)o -(C=O)-NH-S(O) 2 - absent -X 'y 3 R =WR=H; wherein R' =benzyl cyclopentyt ,NI X = phenyl; tBOC OH -(C=O AY I W R= H X = phenyl; _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ ____ _____ Y = phenyl _ _ _ _ _ 69 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 TABLE 2 ________________ Compounds of Formula 11 where m =s- I _____ A G L W____ tBOC OH -CH(C X I 1W' = methyl
H
3
)CH
2 Hix W=H N- N I X =phenyl; tBOC OH Y0x= p enyl -. NIN methyl; X = phenyl; tBOC OH YS-hA y 0 methyl; X = phenyl; tBOC OH -S(O)- 0~he NIN methyl; N WH X = phenyl; tBOC OH -S(0) 2 Y-X en0 N-I methyl; X = phenyl; tBOC OH -SCH 2 Yx ey 0 CH Z N, INCH 3 ; X = phenyl; ___________Y Y=phenyl tBOC OH -CF 2 C A y I R =R=H; N X = phenyl; Y =phenyl tBoc OH -- CFH A I WTFH CHr- N N IN X = phenyl; _____ ____ _____ _ __ _____ ____ ___ _ ____ Y = phenyl _ _ _ _ _ 70 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 TABLE2 Compounds of Formula.1I where m = s= I A G L W j R, R tBOC OH absent X Y 3 R=R=H; N, NN nL X = phenyl; ____= Ypenyl tBOC OH absent H 3 C Br 3 R R H;
H
3 C tBOC OH absent s 3 R=R=H; HAC
H
3 C *N N N tBOC OH absent N 3 R= R=H. N, N N, The following additional triazole macrocyclic molecules of the invention were made by the methods and procedures described herein. While stereochemistry is shown, the invention is not limited to the stereochemistry depicted. Those of ordinary skill in the art will readily appreciate that other isomers of these compounds are also within-the scope of the invention. 71 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 o 0O 072 72 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 O O 73 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 00®rQN 04 pQ0 a 0 0 0 0 00 74 ~WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 %00 %o0 75 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 C) 76 WO 204/02243PCT/US2004/003479 0 o 01 77 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 %0O 00 O -W- 0 O O 5 Another embodiment of the invention is a compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester or prodrug thereof, represented by Formula II as described above where W is a pyridazinone or derivative thereof, in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient. Another embodiment of the invention is a compound, or a pharmaceutically ) acceptable salt, ester or prodrug thereof, represented by Formula Ill as described above 78 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 where W is a pyridazinone or derivative thereof, in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient. Exemplary pyridazinone macrocyclic compounds and associated methods of the invention are disclosed in US Provisional Patent application no. (conversion of US 10/384,120), filed March 7, 2003. Representative subgenera of the invention include, but are not limited to: A compound of Formula 11, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-R' ; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; Y j=3; m=s=1; W= J , and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen; A compound of Formula 11, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-tert-buty; G is hydroxyl; L is Y absent; j=3; m=s=1; W= J- , and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen; A compound of Formula IlIl, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-R'; L is absent; j=3; m=s=1; Y W=1 , and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen; and A compound of Formula 111, wherein A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; Gis hydroxyl; L is Y A absent; j=3; m=s=1; W= -i- , and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen. Representative compounds of the invention include, but are not limited to, the following compounds: TABLE 3 Y 0 tN compounds of formula 11 where W J~ and m = s 1 A G L X,Y Z j R TBOC OEt absent X = Y = bromo Z = hydrogen 3 RS = R 4 = TBOC OEt absent X=Y= Z = hydrogen 3 R =R thiophen-3-y hydrogen; TBOC OH absent X=Y= Z = hydrogen 3 R= R = thiophen-3-yI y hydrogen; TBOC OH absent X= Y = phenyl Z = hydrogen 3 R = R = I hydrogen; 79 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 TABLE 3 Y x zN compounds of formula I where W= -1- and m = s= 1 A G L X,Y Z j R ,R 4 TBOC OH absent X = Y = 4-(N, Z = hydrogen 3 R = R4= N.- .hydrogen; dimethylamino )phenyl~ TBOC OH. absent X=Y=4- Z = hydrogen 3 R=R 4 = (trifluorometho hydrogen; xy)phenylhyrgn TBOC OH absent X=Y=4- Z = hydrogen 3 R= R 4 = (methanesulfo hydrogen; nyl)phenyl TBOC OH absent X = Y = 4- Z = hydrogen 3 R'= R 4 = (cyano)phenyl hydrogen; TBOC OH absent X = Y = 3- Z = hydrogen 3 R = R= -pyridyl hydrogen; TBOC OH absent X=Y=4- Z = hydrogen 3 R = R4= (morpholin-4- hydrogen; y methanonyl)ph enyl TBOC OH absent X = Y = bromo Z = hydrogen 3 R 3 = R= TBOC OH absent X and Y taken Z =4- 3 h Rg together = methoxyphen hydrogen; phenyl y TBOC OH absent X and Y taken Z=4- 3 R=R 4 = together = chloropheny! ~ hydrogen; phenyl TBOC OH absent X = 4- Z = phenyl 3 R 3
=R
4 = fluorophenyl hydrogen; Y = hydrogen TBOC OH absent X = hydrogen Z = phenyl 3 R = R 4 = ____ OR Y = 1-piperidyl hydrogen; TBOC OEt absent X = hydrogen Z = phenyl 3 R = R7= Y = bromo hyarogen TBOC OH absent X = hydrogen Z = phenyl 3 R = R = Y = thiophen- hydrogen; 3-yi TBOC OEt absent . X = bromo . Z = hydrogen 3 R' = R 4 = Y = pyrrolid-1- hydrogen; TBOC OH absent X = thiophen- Z = hydrogen 3 R = R 4 3-y hydrogen; Y = pyrrolid-1 TBOC OEt absent X = bromo Z = hydrogen 3 Rd = R 4 Y = azido hydrogen; 80 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 TABLE 3 Y x z, compounds of formula 11 where W= J- and m = s I A G L X,Y Z j R, R 4 TBOC OEt absent X = thiophen- Z = hydrogen 3 R = R= 3-yi .,hydrogen; Y = azido TBOC OH absent ,X = thiophen- Z = hydrogen 3 R* = R 4 = 3-yI . hydrogen; Y = azido TBOC OH absent X = thiophen- Z = hydrogen 3 R = 3-yl hydrogen; Y = tetrazol-2 TBOC OH absent X=Y= Z = hydrogen 3 R=R 4 = mercapto-2-p hydrogen; yrimidine TBOC OH absent X = bromo Z = hydrogen 3 R = R4= y = hydrogen; mercapto-2-p yrimidine TBOC OH absent X = thiophen- Z = hydrogen 3 R = = 3-yI hydrogen; Y = mercapto-2-p yrimidine TBOC OH absent X=Y= Z = hydrogen 3 R*R= thiazol-2-yi hydrogen; TBOC OH absent X=Y= Z = hydrogen 3 R=R = imidazol-1-yi hydrogen; TBOC OH absent X = 2- Z = hydrogen 3 R = R7= (cyclopropyla hydrogen; mino)-thiazol 4-yi Y =4 methoxypheny TBOC OH absent X and Y taken Z = hydrogen 3 R = 4= together = 6- hydrogen; methoxy isoquinolinyl -(C=0)-O-R' OH absent X=Y= Z = hydrogen 3 R*=R 4 = Wherein R' = thiophen-3-yI hydrogen; cyclopenty -(C=O)-O-R' OH absent X = Y = Z = hydrogen 3 R=R= wherein R' = thiophen-3-y hydrogen; cyclobutylY==W -(C=O)-O-R' OH absent XY Z= hydrogen 3 R= = wherein R = thiophen-3-y hydrogen; cyclohexyl 81 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 TABLE 3 Y' 0 z compoun s of formula 11 where W= 2- and m s= 1 A G IL .X,Y Z R -(C=O)-O-R' OH absent X = Y = Z = hydrogen 3 R' = R= wherein R = thiophen-3-yl Jiydrogen; 0 -(C=O)-O-R OH absent X = Y = Z = hydrogen 3 R= R 4 = wherein R'= thiophen-3-y hydrogen; -(C=O)-O,-R OH absent X = Y = Z = hydrogen 3 W=W= wherein R = thiophen-3-y hydrogen; TBOC OH -(C=O)CH 2 - X= Y = Z = hydrogen 1 W=W= thiophen-3-y TBOC OH -CH(CH 3
)CH
2 X = Y = Z = hydrogen 1 R = methyl thiophen-3-yi = hydrogen TBOC OH -0- X=Y= Z = hydrogen 0 W =methyl thiophen-3-y and W= TBOC OH -S-X = Y = Z = hydrogen 0 Ry=rmet thiophen-3-yl a = m TBOC OH -S(O)- X = Y = Z = hydrogen 2 R=mty thiophen-3-yiand TBOC OH -S(O)- X=Y= Z = hydrogen 2 R methyl thiophen-3-yl and R 4 = TBOC OH -SCH 2 CHr- Z = hydrogen 2 R mt thlopen-33 Rn= R4 = I hydrogen TBOC OH -C 2 CH- X=Y= Z =hydrogen 0 I R7 thiophen-3-yl Chdo; TBOC OH -CFHCHz- X=Y= Z =hydrogen 1 R= thiophen-3-yl hydrogen; O -OHeeth a t X=Y3= Z = hydrogen R= R 4 = thiophen-3-y hydrogen; : F=)-OR' 0-penetyl bset XY= Z= hdroen 1 R = R4= R = thlphnR3 hydrogen cy0lRpe= methy I =O)-O-R' -NH-pheneth absent X = Y = Z = hydrogen 3 h R 4 = R = A thiophen-3-yl hydrogen;y cyclopentyl Ih 82 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 TABLE 3 Y X z compoun s of formula 11 where W= -L and m = s= 1 A G L XY Z j R, R 4 -C=O)-O-R -NHS(O) absent X = Y = Z = hydrogen 3 R = R 4 = R = 2 -phenethyl thiophen-3-yi .hydrogen;. cyclopenty -SC=O)-O-R -(C=O)-OH absent X = Y = Z = hydrogen 3 R = R= R = thiophen-3-yi hydrogen; cyclopentyl C=O)-O-R -(C=0)--ph absent X = Y = Z = hydrogen 3 R 3 = R 4 = -S=O)-O-R -(C=O)-N-p absent X=Zhdoe ~=R R = enethyl thiophen-3-yi hydrogen; cyclopenty - C=0)-O-R -(C=0)-NH-p absent X= Y-= Z = hydrogen 3i R = R4= R = henethyl thiophen-3-yl hydrogen; cyclopentyl C=0)-O-R -(C=O)-NH- absent X = Y = Z = hydrogen 3 R 3 = R 4 = R = S(O) 2 -benzyl thiophen-3-yi hydrogen. cyclopentyl The following additional pyridazinone macrocyclic molecules of the invention were made by the methods and procedures described herein. While stereochemistry is shown, the invention is not limited to the stereochemistry depicted. Those of ordinary skill in the art will readily appreciate that other isomers of these compounds are also within the scope of the invention. 83 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 0 84 0 0 0 N < QN 0 N 0 00 B Additional compoNofteivninaetoeofomlIIorIwhen 5 i a s b s it te e n i m d a o yl i cl d n g th s e w er in th en z m d z l l i susitAddithoa 1omphonys oupeac inetof whicths ormaya be independentlyrei substituted. Examples of such compounds include: 85 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 00 0 O O H HO-- According to an alternate embodiment, the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention may further contain other anti-HCV agents. Examples of anti-HCV agents include, but are not limited to, a-interferon, p-interferon, ribavirin, and amantadine. According to an additional alternate embodiment, the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention may further contain other HCV protease inhibitors. ) According to yet another alternate embodiment, the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention may further comprise inhibitor(s) of other targets in the HCV life cycle, including, but not limited to, helicase, polymerase, metalloprotease, and internal ribosome entry site (IRES). According to a further embodiment, the present invention includes methods of 5 treating hepatitis C infections in a subject in need of such treatment by administering to said subject an anti-HCV virally effective amount of the pharmaceutical compounds or compositions of the present invention. The methods can further include administration of an additional therapeutic agent, including another antiviral agent or an anti-HCV agent. The additional agent can be co-administered, concurrently administered or 86 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 sequentially administered with the compound or composition delineated herein. The methods herein can further include the step of identifying that the subject is in need of treatment for hepatitis C infection. The identification can be by subjective (e.g., health care provider determination) or objective (e.g., diagnostic test) means. All references, including patents, patent publications, articles, texts, etc. disclosed throughout this specification are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety. Definitions The following definitions of various terms and phrases used to describe the invention are consistent with their normal use in the art and apply to the terms as they are used throughout this specification and claims unless otherwise limited in specific instances, either individually or as part of a larger group. The term "C-Cy," as used herein, is used in conjunction with the name of a carbon-containing group to indicate that the group contains from x to y carbort atoms where x and y are whole numbers. The term "halo" and "halogen," as used herein, refer to an atom selected from fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine. The term "alkyl," as used herein, refers to saturated, straight- or branched-chain ) hydrocarbon radicals. Examples include, but are not limited to methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, tert-butyl, neopentyl, n-hexyl, octyl, decyl, dodecyl radicals. The term "substituted alkyl," as used herein, refers to an "alkyl" group substituted by independent replacement. of one or more (e.g., 1, 2, or 3) of the hydrogen atoms thereon with F, Cl, Br, I, OH, NO 2 , CN, CrC 6 -alkyl-OH, C(O)-C-C-alkyl, OCHr(C 3
-C
12 5 cycloalkyl), C(O)-aryl, C(O)-heteroaryl, C0 2 -alkyl, C0 2 -aryl, C0 2 -heteroaryl, CONH 2 , CONH-(CrC 6 -alkyl), CONH-aryl, CONH-heteroaryl, OC(O)-(C-C 6 -alkyl), OC(O)-aryl, OC(O)-heteroaryl, OCOralkyl, OC0 2 -aryl, OC0 2 -heteroaryl, OCONH 2 , OCONH-(CrC& alkyl), OCONH-aryl, OCONH-heteroaryl, NHC(O)-(C-Cs-alkyl), NHC(O)-aryl, NHC(O) heteroaryl, NHCO 2 alkyl, NHCO 2 -aryl, NHCOrheteroaryl, NHCONH 2 , NHCONH-(CrC 6 3 alkyl), NHCONH-aryl, NHCONH-heteroaryl, S0 2 -C-C6 alkyl, S0 2 -aryl, SOrheteroaryl,
SO
2
NH
2 , SO 2 NH-CrC-alkyl, SO 2 NH-aryl, SO 2 NH-heteroaryl, C-C 6 -alkyl, C 3
-C
6 87 cycloalkyl, CF 3 , CH 2
CF
3 , CHC1 2 , CH 2
NH
2 , CH 2
SO
2
CH
3 H, haloalkyl, C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-CI
2 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, benzyl, benzyloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, C-C 6 alkoxy, methoxymethoxy, methoxyethoxy, amino, benzylamino, arylamino, 5 heteroarylamino, Ci-C 3 -alkylamino, thio, aryl-thio, heteroarylthio, benzyl-thio, Ci-C 6 alkyl-thio, or methylthiomethyl. The term "haloalkyl," as used herein, refers to an acyclic, straight or branched chain alkyl substituent having one or more hydrogen substituted for a halogen selected from bromo, chloro, fluoro, or iodo. 10 The term "thioalkyl," as used herein, refers to an acyclic, straight or branched chain alkyl substituent containing a thiol group, such as, for example and not limited to, thiopropyl. The term "alkoxy," as used herein, refers to an alkyl group, as previously defined, attached to the parent molecular moiety through an oxygen atom. Examples of 15 alkoxy include, but are not limited to, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, tert-butoxy, neopentoxy and n-hexoxy. The term "alkenyl," as used herein, denotes a monovalent group derived by the removal of a single hydrogen atom from a hydrocarbon moiety having at least one carbon-carbon double bond. Alkenyl groups include, but are not limited to, for example, 20 ethenyl, propenyl, butenyl, 1-methyl-2-buten-1-yl, and the like. The term "substituted alkenyl," as used herein, refers to an "alkenyl" group substituted by independent replacement of one or more of the hydrogen atoms thereon with F, Cl, Br, I, OH, NO 2 , CN, Ci-C 6 -alkyl-OH, C(O)-(CrC 6 -alkyl), OCH 2
-(C
3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl), C(O)-aryl, C(O)-heteroaryl, C0 2 -alkyl, C02-aryl, C02-heteroaryl,
CONH
2 , 25 CONH-CIC 6 -alkyl, CONH-aryl, CONH-heteroaryl,
OC(O)-(CI-C
6 -alkyl), OC(O)-aryl, OC(O)-heteroaryl, OCO 2 -alkyl, OC02-aryl, OC0 2 -heteroaryl, OCONH 2 , OCONH-Ci
C
6 -alkyl, OCONH-aryl, OCONH-heteroaryl, NHC(O)-Ci-C 6 -alkyl,NHC(O)-aryl, NHC(O)-heteroaryl,
NHCO
2 -alkyl, NHCO 2 -aryl, NHCO 2 -heteroaryl, NHCONH 2 ,
NHCONH-(C-C
6 -alkyl), NHCONH-aryl, NHCONH-heteroaryl, S0 2
-(CIC
6 -alkyl), 30 S02-aryl, S02-heteroaryl, SO 2
NH
2 , SO 2
NH-(CI-C
6 -alkyl), SO 2 NH-aryl, SO 2
NH
heteroaryl, CI-C 6 -alkyl, C 3
-C
6 -cycloalkyl, CF 3 , CH 2
CF
3 , CHC12, CH 2
NH
2 ,
CH
2
SO
2
CH
3 H, haloalkyl, C 3
-C
1 2 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, benzyl, 88 benzyloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, Ci-C 6 -alkoxy, methoxymethoxy, methoxyethoxy, amino, benzylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, Ci-C 3 -alkylamino, thio, aryl-thio, heteroarylthio, benzyl-thio, Ci-C 6 -alkyl-thio, or methylthiomethyl. The term "alkynyl," as used herein, denotes a monovalent group derived by the 5 removal of a single hydrogen atom from a hydrocarbon moiety having at least one carbon-carbon triple bond. Representative alkynyl groups include, but are not limited to, for example, ethynyl, 1 -propynyl, 1 -butynyl, and the like. The term "substituted alkynyl," as used herein, refers to an "alkynyl" group substituted by independent replacement of one or more of the hydrogen atoms thereon io with F, Cl, Br, I, OH, NO 2 , CN, Ci-C 6 -alkyl-OH, C(O)-(Ci-C 6 -alkyl), OCH 2
-(C
3
-CI
2 cycloalkyl), C(O)-aryl, C(O)-heteroaryl, C0 2 -alkyl, C0 2 -aryl, C0 2 -heteroaryl, CONH 2 , CONH-(Ci-C 6 -alkyl), CONH-aryl, CONH-heteroaryl, OC(O)-(CI-C 6 -alkyl), OC(O) aryl, OC(O)-heteroaryl, OC0 2 -alkyl, OCO 2 -aryl, OC02-heteroaryl, OCONH 2 , OCONH (Ci-C 6 -alkyl), OCONH-aryl, OCONH-heteroaryl, NHC(O)-(C-C 6 -alkyl), NHC(O)-aryl, 15 NHC(O)-heteroaryl,
NHCO
2 -alkyl, NHCO 2 -aryl, NHCO 2 -heteroaryl, NHCONH 2 , NHCONH-(Ci-C 6 -alkyl), NHCONH-aryl, NHCONH-heteroaryl, S0 2 -(Ci-C 6 -alkyl), S0 2 -aryl, S02-heteroaryl, SO 2
NH
2 , SO 2 NH-(Ci-C 6 -alkyl), SO 2 NH-aryl, SO 2
NH
heteroaryl, C 3
-C
6 -cycloalkyl, CF 3 , CH 2
CF
3 , CHC1 2 , CH 2
NH
2 , CH 2
SO
2
CH
3 H, haloalkyl,
C
3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-CI
2 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, 20 heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, benzyl, benzyloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, Ci-C 6 -alkoxy, methoxymethoxy, methoxyethoxy, amino, benzylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, Ci-C 3 -alkylamino, thio, aryl-thio, heteroarylthio, benzyl-thio, CI-C 6 alkyl-thio, or methylthiomethyl. The term "aryl," as used herein, refers to a mono- or bicyclic carbocyclic ring 25 system having one or two aromatic rings including, but not limited to, phenyl, naphthyl, tetra hyd rona phthyl, indanyl, idenyl and the like. The term "substituted aryl," as used herein, refers to an aryl group, as defined herein, substituted by independent replacement of one or more of the hydrogen atoms thereon with F, Cl, Br, I, OH, NO 2 , CN, Ci-C 6 -alkyl-OH, C(O)-(Ci-C 6 -alkyl), OCH 2 30 (C 3 -Cl2-cycloalkyl), C(O)-aryl, C(O)-heteroaryl, C0 2 -alkyl, C02-aryl, C02-heteroaryl,
CONH
2 , CONH-(Ci-C 6 -alkyl), CONH-aryl, CONH-heteroaryl, OC(O)-(Ci-C 6 -alkyl), OC(O)-aryl, OC(O)-heteroaryl, OC0 2 -alkyl, OC0 2 -aryl, OC02-heteroaryl, OCONH 2 , OCONH-(Ci-C 6 -alkyl), OCONH-aryl, OCONH-heteroaryl, NHC(O)-(Ci-C 6 -alkyl), 89 NHC(O)-aryl, NHC(O)-heteroaryl, NHCO 2 -alkyl, NHCO 2 -aryl, NHCO 2 -heteroaryl,
NHCONH
2 , NHCONH-(Ci-C 6 -alkyl), NHCONH-aryl, NHCONH-heteroaryl, S0 2 -(Ci
C
6 -alkyl), S02-aryl, S02-heteroaryl, SO 2
NH
2 , SO 2 NH-(Ci-C 6 -alkyl), SO 2 NH-aryl,
SO
2 NH-heteroaryl, CI-C 6 -alkyl, C 3
-C
6 -cycloalkyl, CF 3 , CH 2
CF
3 , CHC12, CH 2
NH
2 , 5 CH 2
SO
2
CH
3 H, CI-C 6 alkyl, haloalkyl, C 3 -Cu 2 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
2 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, benzyl, benzyloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, CI-C 6 -alkoxy, methoxymethoxy, methoxyethoxy, amino, benzylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, Ci-C 3 -alkylamino, thio, aryl-thio, heteroarylthio, benzyl-thio, Ci-C 6 -alkyl-thio, or methylthiomethyl. 10 The term "arylalkyl," as used herein, refers to a Cl-C3 alkyl or Cl-C6 alkyl residue attached to an aryl ring. Examples include, but are not limited to, benzyl, phenethyl and the like. The term "substituted arylalkyl," as used herein, refers to an arylalkyl group, as previously defined, substituted by independent replacement of one or more of the 15 hydrogen atoms thereon with F, Cl, Br, I, OH, NO 2 , CN, Ci-C 6 -alkyl-OH, C(O)-C-C 6 alkyl, OCH 2
-(C
3 -C2-cycloalkyl), C(O)-aryl, C(O)-heteroaryl, CO 2 -alkyl, C0 2 -aryl, CO2-heteroaryl, CONH 2 , CONH-Cl-C 6 -alkyl, CONH-aryl, CONH-heteroaryl, OC(O) (Ci-C 6 -alkyl), OC(O)-aryl, OC(O)-heteroaryl, OCO 2 -alkyl, OC0 2 -aryl, OC0 2 heteroaryl, OCONH 2 , OCONH-(Ci-C 6 -alkyl), OCONH-aryl, OCONH-heteroaryl, 20 NHC(O)-(Ci-C 6 -alkyl), NHC(O)-aryl, NHC(O)-heteroaryl,
NHCO
2 -alkyl, NHC0 2 -aryl,
NHCO
2 -heteroaryl, NHCONH 2 , NHCONH-(C-C 6 -alkyl), NHCONH-aryl, NHCONH heteroaryl, S0 2 -(Ci-C 6 - alkyl), S02-aryl, S02-heteroaryl, SO 2
NH
2 , SO 2 NH-(Ci-C 6 -alkyl),
SO
2 NH-aryl, SO2NH-heteroaryl, C 3
-C
6 -cycloalkyl, CF 3 , CH 2
CF
3 , CHC12, CH 2
NH
2 ,
CH
2
SO
2
CH
3 H, haloalkyl, C 3
-CI
2 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
2 cycloalkyl, aryl, 25 substituted aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, benzyl, benzyloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, Ci-C 6 -alkoxy, methoxymethoxy, methoxyethoxy, amino, benzylamino, 90 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 arylamino, heteroarylamino, C 1
C
3 -alkylamino, thio, aryl-thio, heteroarylthio, benzyl-thio,
C
1
-C
6 -alkyl-thio, or methylthiomethyl. The term "cycloalkyl" denotes a monovalent group derived by the removal of a single hydrogen atom from a monocyclic or bicyclic saturated carbocyclic ring compound. Examples include, but not limited to, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, bicyclo [2.2.1] heptyl, and bicyclo [2.2.2] octyl. The term "substituted cycloalkyl," as used herein, refers to a cycloalkyl group as defined herein, substituted by independent replacement of one, two or three of the hydrogen atoms thereon with F, Cl, Br, I, OH, NO 2 , CN, CrC 6 -alkyl-OH, C(O)-(CrC 6 alkyl), OCH 2
-(C
3
-C
12 -cycloalkyl), C(O)-aryl, C(O)-heteroaryl, CO 2 -alkyl, CO 2 -aryl, CO 2 heteroaryl, CONH 2 , CONH-(C-C 6 -alkyl), CONH-aryl, CONH-heteroaryl, OC(O)-(C-C alkyl), OC(O)-aryl, OC(O)-heteroaryl, OCO 2 -alkyl, OCO 2 -aryl, OCO2-heteroaryl, OCONH2, OCONH-CI-C6-alkyl, OCONH-aryl, OCONH-heteroaryl, NHC(O)-(C-C 6 -alkyl, NHC(O)-aryl, NHC(O)-heteroaryl, NHCOralkyl, NHCO 2 -aryl, NHCO 2 -heteroaryl,
NHCONH
2 , NHCONH-(C-C 6 -alkyl), NHCONH-aryl, NHCONH-heteroaryl, S0 2
-(C-C&
alkyl), S0 2 -aryl, S0 2 -heteroaryl, SO 2
NH
2 , SO 2
NH-(C-C
6 -alkyl), SO 2 NH-aryl, SO 2
NH
heteroaryl, C-C 6 -alkyl, C 3
-C
6 -cycloalkyl, CF 3 , CH 2
CF
3 , CHC1 2 , CH 2
NH
2 , CH 2
SO
2
CH
3 H,
C
r
C
6 alkyl, halo alkyl, C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3 -C1 2 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, benzyl, benzyloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, C-C-alkoxy, methoxymethoxy, methoxyethoxy, amino, benzylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, C-C 3 -alkylamino, thio, aryl-thio, heteroarylthio, benzyl-thio, CrC-alkyl-thio, or methylthiomethyl. The terms "heterocyclo" and "heterocyclic" as used herein, refer to a monovalent substituent derived by removal of a hydrogen from a three to seven-membered saturated or unsaturated (including aromatic) cycle having 1 to 4 non-carbon ring atoms selected from the heteroatoms consisting of N, 0, and S. Examples of suitable heterocycles include but are not limited to tetrahydrofuran, thiophene, diazepine, isoxazole, piperidine, dioxane, morpholine, and pyrimidine. The term also includes a heterocycle as defined herein fused to one or more other cycles whether hetero or carbocyclic. One example is thiazolo[4,5-b]-pyridine. Although the terms "heterocycloalky," "aliphatic heteromonocyclic ring system," "aliphatic heterobicyclic ring 91 WO 2004/072243 - PCT/US2004/003479 system," "aliphatic heterotricyclic ring system," "heteroaryl," "aromatic heteromonocyclic ring system," "aromatic heterobicyclic ring system," "aromatic heterotricyclic ring system," "heteroarylalkyl," are covered generally by the term "heterocycle," their specific meanings are set forth in further detail below. The term "heterocycloalkyl," as used herein, refers to a non-aromatic 5-, 6- or 7 membered ring or a bi- or tri-cyclic group comprising fused six-membered rings having between one and three heteroatoms independently selected from oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen, wherein (i) each 5-membered ring has 0 to I double bonds and each 6 membered ring has 0 to 2 double bonds, (ii) the nitrogen and sulfur heteroatoms may optionally be oxidized, (iii) the nitrogen heteroatom may optionally be quatemized, and (iv) any of the above heterocyclic rings may be fused to a benzene ring. Representative heterocycles include, but are not limited to; pyrrolidinyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrazolidinyl, imidazolinyl, imidazolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, oxazolidinyl, isoxazolidinyl, morpholinyl, thiazolidinyl, isothiazolidinyl, and tetra hydrofuryl. The term "substituted heterocycloalkyl," as used herein, refers to a heterocycloalkyl group, as previously defined, substituted by independent replacement of one or more of the hydrogen atoms thereon with F, Cl, Br, I, OH, NO 2 , CN, C-C 6 alkyl-OH, C(O)-CrC6-alkyl, OCH 2
-(C
3
-C
12 -cycloalkyl), C(O)-aryl, C(O)-heteroaryl, CO alkyl, C0 2 -aryl, CO 2 -heteroaryl, CONH 2 , CONH-C-C 6 -alkyl, CONH-aryl, CONH heteroaryl, OC(O)-C-C 6 -alkyl, OC(O)-aryl, OC(O)-heteroaryl, OC0 2 -alkyl, OCO 2 -aryl, OC0 2 -heteroaryl, OCONH 2 , OCONH-(Cr-C 6 -alkyl), OCONH-aryl, OCONH-heteroaryl,
NHC(O)-(C-C
6 -alkyl), NHC(O)-aryl, NHC(O)-heteroaryl, NHCO 2 -alkyl, NHCO 2 aryl,
NHCO
2 -heteroaryl, NHCONH 2 , NHCONH-(CrC 6 -alkyl), NHCONH-aryl, NHCONH heteroaryl, S0 2 -(CrCs-alkyl), S0 2 -aryl, SO-heteroaryl, SO 2
NH
2 , SO 2 NH-(CrC 6 -alkyl),
SO
2 NH-aryl, SO 2 NH-heteroaryl, C-C 6 -alkyl, C 3 -CS-cycloalkyl, CF 3 , CH 2
CF
3 , CHC1 2 ,
CH
2
NH
2 , CH 2
SO
2
CH
3 H, CrC 6 alkyl, halo alkyl, CrC 1 2 cycloalkyl, substituted CrC 12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, benzyl, benzyloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, C-C 6 -alkoxy, methoxymethoxy, methoxyethoxy, amino, benzylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, CrC 3 -alkylamino, ) thio, aryl-thio, heteroarylthio, benzyl-thio, CrC 6 -alkyl-thio, or methylthiomethyl. 92 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 As used herein, the term "aliphatic heteromonocyclic ring system" is intended to mean a ring system containing a non-aromatic ring that includes at least one ring hetero (i.e., non-carbon) atom selected from 0, N and S. The term "aliphatic heterobicyclic ring system" is intended to mean a ring system containing a two fused rings, at least one of which is a non-aromatic ring that includes at least one ring hetero (i.e., non carbon) atom selected from 0, N and S. The term "aliphatic heterotricyclic ring system" is intended to mean a ring system containing three fused rings, at least one of which is a non-aromatic ring that includes at least one ring hetero (i.e., non-carbon) atom selected from 0, N and S. As will be appreciated, the aliphatic heterocyclic ring systems can possess any degree of saturation (i.e., double or triple bonds) provided that none of the heteroatom-containing constituent rings are aromatic. Thus, structures such as indoline, which contains a non-aromatic heterocyclic ring (i.e., a pyrroline ring) fused to an aromatic carbocyclic ring (specifically, a phenyl ring), and phthalimide, are examples of an "aliphatic heterobicyclic ring systems." As used herein, the term "aromatic heteromonocyclic ring system" is intended to mean an aromatic ring that includes at least one ring hetero (i.e., non-carbon) atom selected from 0, N and S. The term "aromatic heterobicyclic ring system" is intended to mean an aromatic ring system containing two fused rings that includes at least one ring hetero (i.e., non-carbon) atom selected from 0, N and S. The term "aromatic heterotricyclic ring system" is intended to mean an aromatic ring system containing three fused rings that includes at least one ring hetero (i.e., non-carbon) atom selected from 0, N and S. Substituent atoms of the aromatic heterocyclic ring systems can, together with additional atoms, form further fused ring structures that are not aromatic. Thus, 5,6, 7,8 tetrahydroisoquinoline is an example of an aromatic heterobicyclic ring system, whereas 1,2,3,4 tetrahydroisoquinoline is an example of an aliphatic heterobicyclic ring system. The term "heteroaryl," as used herein, refers to a cyclic aromatic radical having from five to ten ring atoms of which at least one ring atom is selected from S, 0 and Nand the remaining ring atoms are carbon, the radical being joined to the rest of the molecule via any of the ring atoms, such as, for example, pyridinyl, pyrazinyl, 93 WO2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 pyrimidinyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, isooxazolyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiophenyl, furanyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, and the like. The term "substituted heteroaryl," as used herein, refers to a heteroaryl group as defined herein, substituted by independent replacement of one, two or three of the hydrogen atoms thereon with F, CI, Br, I, OH, NO 2 , CN, CrC 6 -alkyl-OH, C(O)-CrC 6 alkyl, OCH 2
-(C
3 -Crcycloalkyl), C(O)-aryl, C(O)-heteroaryl, COralkyl, C0 2 -aryl, COr heteroaryl, CONH 2 , CONH-(CrC 6 -alkyl), CONH-aryl, CONH-heteroaryl, OC(O)-(C-C 6
)
alkyl, OC(O)-aryl, OC(O)-heteroaryl, OCOralkyl, OCOraryl, OC0 2 -heteroaryl,
OCONH
2 , OCONH-(CrC 6 -alkyl), OCONH-aryl, OCONH-heteroaryl, NHC(O)-(CrC& alkyl), NHC(O)-aryl, NHC(O)-heteroaryl, NHCO 2 -alkyI, NHCO 2 -aryl, NHCO 2 -heteroaryl,
NHCONH
2 , NHCONH-(C-Ce-alkyl), NHCONH-aryl, NHCONH-heteroaryl, SOr(CrC6 alkyl), S0 2 -aryl, S0 2 -heteroaryl, SO 2
NH
2 , SO 2 NH-(C-Cg-alkyl), SO 2 NH-aryl, SO 2
NH
heteroaryl, Cr-Cralkyl, C 3
-C
6 -cycloalkyl, CF 3 , CH 2
CF
3 , CHC12, CH 2
NH
2 , CH 2
SO
2
CH
3 H, C1-C6 alkyl, halo alkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, benzyl, benzyloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, C-C 6 -alkoxy, methoxymethoxy, methoxyethoxy, amino, benzylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, C-C 3 -alkylamino, thio, aryl-thio, heteroarylthio, benzyl-thio,
C-C
6 -alkyl-thio, or methylthiomethyl. The term "heteroarylalkyl," as used herein, refers to a Cr-C3 alkyl or Cr1C6 alkyl ) residue attached to a heteroaryl ring. Examples include, but are not limited to, pyridinylmethyl, pyrimidinylethyl and the like. The term "substituted heteroarylakyl," as used herein, refers to a heteroarylalkyl group, as previously defined, substituted by independent replacement of one or more of the hydrogen atoms thereon with F, Cl, Br, I, OH, NO 2 , CN, C-C6-alkyl-OH, C(O)-CrC6 alkyl, OCH 2
-(C
3
-C
2 -cycloalkyl), C(O)-aryl, C(O)-heteroaryl, COralkyl, COraryl, CO heteroaryl, CONH 2 , CONH-CrC 6 -alkyl, CONH-aryl, CONH-heteroaryl, OC(O)-C-C6 alkyl, OC(O)-aryl, OC(O)-heteroaryl, OC0 2 -alkyl, OC0 2 -aryl, OC0 2 -heteroaryl,
OCONH
2 , OCONH-(C-C 6 -alkyl), OCONH-aryl, OCONH-heteroaryl, NHC(O)-(CrC 6 alkyl), NHC(O)-aryl, NHC(O)-heteroaryl, NHCOralkyl, NHCO 2 -aryl, NHCO 2 -heteroaryl, ) NHCONH 2 , NHCONH-(C-C&-alkyl), NHCONH-aryl, NHCONH-heteroaryl, SOr(CrC6 alkyl), S0 2 raryl, S0 2 -heteroaryl, SO 2
NH
2 , SO 2 NH-(CrC-alkyl), SO 2 NH-aryl, SO 2
NH
94 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 heteroaryl, C-C 6 -alkyl, C 3
-C
6 -cycloalkyl, CF 3 , CH 2
CF
3 , CHC1 2 , CH 2
NH
2 , CH 2
SO
2
CH
3 H,
CI-C
6 alkyl, halo alkyl, C 3 -C1 2 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, benzyl, benzyloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, CrCg-alkoxy, methoxymethoxy, methoxyethoxy, amino, benzylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, CrC 3 alkylamino, thio, aryl-thio, heteroarylthio, benzyl-thio,
C
1
-C
6 -alkyl-thio, or methylthiomethyl. Substituent groups substituted on any group (e.g., alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, heterocyclic) delineated herein also include any of -F, -Cl, -Br, -1, -OH, protected hydroxy, aliphatic ethers, aromatic ethers, oxo,
-NO
2 , -CN, -C-C 1 2 -alkyl optionally substituted -with halogen (such as perhaloalkyls),
C
2
-C,
2 -alkenyl optionally substituted with halogen, -C 2
-C
12alkynyl optionally substituted with halogen, -NH 2 , protected amino, -NH -C-C 12 alkyl, -NH -C 2
C
12 -alkenyl, -NH -C2
C
1 2 alkynyl, -NH -C 3
-C
1 2 -cycloalkylr-NH -aryl, -NH -heteroaryl, -NH -heterocycloalkyl, -dialkylamino, -diarylamino, -diheteroarylamino, -O-C-C 12 -alkyl, -O-C 2 -C1 2 -alkenyl,
-O-C
2
C
2alkynyl, -O-C 3
-C
1 2 -cycloalkyl, -0-aryl, -0-heteroaryl, -0-heterocycloalkyl, -C(O)- Cr-Cralkyl, -C(0)- Cr-Cralkenyl, -C(O)- Cr-Cralkynyl, -C(O)-Cr-Cr cycloalkyl, -C(O)-aryl, -C(O)-heteroaryl, -C(O)-heterocycloalkyl, -CONH 2 , -CONH- C
C
1 2 -alkyl, -CONH- C 2
-C
12 -alkenyl, -CONH- C 2
-C
12 -alkynyl, -CONH-C 3
-C
12 -cycloalkyl, -CONH-aryl, -CONH-heteroaryl, -CONH-heterocycloalkyl, -CO 2 - C-C 1 2 -alkyl, -CO2
C
2-
C
12 -alkenyl, -CO 2-
C
2 -C1 2 -alkynyl, -CO 2 -
C
3
-C
12 -cycloalkyl, -CO 2aryl, -CO 2 heteroaryl, -CO 2 -heterocycloalky, -OC0 2 - C-C 1 2alkyl, -OC 2 - C
-
C
1 alkenyl, -OC02- C 2
-C
12alkynyl, -OCO 2-
C
3
-C
12 cycloalky, -OCOraryl, -OC0 2 rheteroaryl, -OC0 2 -heterocycloalkyl, -OCONH 2 , -OCONH- C-C 1 2 -alkyl, -OCONH- C 2
-C
12alkenyl, -OCONH- C 2
-C
12alkynyl, -OCONH- 3
-C,
2 -rcycloalkyl, -OCONH- aryl, -OCONH heteroaryl, -OCONH- heterocycloalkyl, -NHC(O)- C-C 1 -alkyl, -NHC(O)-C 2 -Ciz alkenyl, -NHC(O)C 2
-C
12alkynyl, -NHC(O)-CrC 12 -cycloalkyl, -NHC(O)-aryl, -NHC(O) heteroaryl, -NHC(O)-heterocycloalkyl, -NHCO 2 C-C1 2alkyl, -NHCO 2-
C
2-
C
1 r
-
alkenyl,
-NHCO
2-
C
2 C1 2alkynyl, -NHCO 2-
C
3
-C
1 2 -cycloalkyl, -NHCO - aryl, -NHCO 2 heteroaryl, -NHCOr heterocycloalkyl, -NHC(O)NH 2 , NHC(O)NH- C-C 1 alkyl, ) -NHC(O)NH-C-C 2alkenyl, -NHC(O)NH-C 2
-C,
2alkynyl, -NHC(O)NH-C-C 2 95 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 cycloalkyl, -NHC(O)NH-aryl, -NHC(O)NH-heteroaryl, -NHC(O)NH-heterocycloalkyl,
NHC(S)NH
2 , NHC(S)NH- C-C 1 2 -alkyl, -NHC(S)NH-C 2
-C
1 2 -alkeny, -NHC(S)NH-C 2
-C
12 alkynyl, -NHC(S)NH-C 3
-C,
2 -cycloalkyl, -NHC(S)NH-aryl, -NHC(S)NH-heteroaryl, -NHC(S)NH-heterocycloalkyl, -NHC(NH)NH 2 , NHC(NH)NH- C-C1 2 -alkyl,
-NHC(NH)NH-C
2
-C
12 -alkenyl, -NHC(NH)NH-C 2
-C
1 2 -alkynyl, -NHC(NH)NH-C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, -NHC(NH)NH-aryl, -NHC(NH)NH-heteroaryl, -NHC(NH)NH heterocycloalkyl, NHC(NH)-C-C 1 2 -alkyl, -NHC(NH)-C 2 -C1 2 -alkenyl, -NHC(NH)-CCir alkynyl, -NHC(NH)-C 3
-C
12 cycloalkyl, -NHC(NH)-aryl, -NHC(NH)-heteroaryl, -NHC(NH)-heterocycloalkyl, -C(NH)NH-C-C 1 ralky, -C(NH)NH-C 2
-C
12 -alkenyl,
-C(NH)NH-C
2
-C
12 -alkynyl, -C(NH)NH-C 3
-C
12 -cycloalkyl, -C(NH)NH-aryl, -C(NH)NH heteroaryl, -C(NH)NH-heterocycloalkyl, -S(O)-C, 12 -alkyl, - S(O)C 2 -C-alkeny, S(O)C 2
-C
12 -alkynyl, - S(O)-C 3
-C
12 -cycloalkyl, - S(O)-aryl, - S(O)-heteroaryl, - S(O) heterocycloalkyl -SO 2
NH
2 , -SO 2 NH- CrC1 2 -alkyl, -SO 2 NH- C 2
-C
12 -alkenyl, -SO 2
NH
C
2
-C
12 -alkynyl, -SO 2 NH- C 3 -C1 2 -cycloalkyl, -SO 2 NH- aryl, -SO 2 NH- heteroaryl,
-SO
2 NH- heterocycloalkyl, -NHSO 2
-C-C
12 -alkyl, -NHSO 2
-C
2
-C
12 -alkenyl, - NHSO 2
-C
2 C 1 2 -alkynyl, -NHSO 2
-C
3
-C
12 -cycloalkyl, -NHSOraryl, -NHSO 2 -heteroaryl, -NHSOz heterocycloalkyl, -CH 2
NH
2 , -CH 2
SO
2
CH
3 , -aryl, -arylalkyl, -heteroaryl, -heteroarylalkyl, -heterocycloalkyl, -C 3
-C
12 -cycloalkyl, polyalkoxyalkyl, polyalkoxy, -methoxymethoxy, -methoxyethoxy, -SH, -S-C,-C 1 2 -alkyl, -S-C 2
-C
12 -alkenyl, -S-C 2
C
1 2 -alkynyl, -S-C 3
-C
2cycloalkyl, -S-aryl, -S-heteroaryl, -S-heterocycloalkyl, or methylthiomethyl. It is understood that the aryls, heteroaryls, alkyls and the like can be further substituted. The term "alkylamino," as used herein, refers to a group having the structure. NH(C-C 1 2 alkyl) where CrC1 2 alkyl is as previously defined. The term "dialkylamino" refers to a group having the structure -N(C-C 12 alkyl) 2 where CrC1 2 alkyl is as previously defined. Examples of dialkylamino are, but not limited to, N,N .dimethylamino, N,N-diethylamino, N,N-methylethylamino, piperidino, and the like. The term "diarylamino" refers to a group having the structure -N(aryl) 2 or N(substituted aryl)2 where substituted aryl is as previously defined. Examples of 96 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 diarylamino are, but not limited to, N,N- diphenylamino, N,N-dinapthylamino, N,N di(toluenyl)amino, and the like. The term "diheteroarylamino" refers to a group having the structure N(heteroaryl) 2 or -N(substituted heteroaryl) 2 , where heteroaryl and substituted heteroaryl is as previously defined. Examples of diheteroarylamino are, but not limited to, N,N- difuranylamino, N,N-dithiazolidinylamino, N,N-di(imidazole)amino, and the like. The term "hydroxy protecting group," as used herein, refers to -a labile chemical moiety which is known in the art to protect a hydroxyl group against undesired reactions during synthetic procedures. After said synthetic procedure(s) the hydroxy protecting group as described herein may be selectively removed. Hydroxy protecting groups as known in the are described generally in T.H. Greene and P.G. M. Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 3rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York (1999). Examples of hydroxyl protecting groups include benzyloxycarbonyl, 4 nitrobenzyloxycarbonyl, 4-bromobenzyloxycarbonyl, 4-methoxybenzyloxycarbonyl, methoxycarbonyl, tert-butoxycarbonyl, isopropoxycarbonyl, diphenylmethoxycarbonyl, 2,2,2-trichloroethoxycarbonyl, 2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxycarbony, 2-furfuryloxycarbonyl, allyloxycarbonyl, acetyl, formyl, chloroacetyl, trifluoroacetyl, methoxyacetyl, phenoxyacetyl, benzoyl, methyl, t-butyl, 2,2,2-trichloroethyl, 2-trimethylsilyl ethyl, 1,1 dimethyl-2-propeny, 3-methyl- 3 -butenyl, allyl, benzyl, para methoxybenzyldiphenylmethyl, triphenylmethyl (trityl), tetrahydrofuryl, methoxymethyl, methylthiomethyl, benzyloxymethyl, 2,2,2-triehloroethoxymethyl, 2 (trimethylsilyl)ethoxymethyl, methanesulfonyl, para-toluenesulfonyl, trimethylsilyl, triethylsilyl, triisopropylsilyl, and the like. Preferred hydroxyl protecting groups for the present invention are acetyl (Ac or -C(O)CH 3 ), benzoyl (Bn or -C(O)C 6
H
5 ), and trimethylsilyl (TMS or-Si(CH 3
)
3 ). The term "protected hydroxy," as used herein, refers to a hydroxy group protected with a hydroxy protecting group, as defined above, including benzoyl, acetyl, trimethylsilyl, triethylsilyl, methoxymethyl groups, for example. The term "nitrogen (or amino) protecting group," as used herein, refers to a labile chemical moiety which is known in the art to protect a nitrogen group against undesired reactions during synthetic procedures. After said synthetic procedure(s) the nitrogen 97 WO2004/072243- PCT/US2004/003479 protecting group as described herein may be selectively removed. Nitrogen protecting groups as known in the are described generally in T.H. Greene and P.G. M. Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 3rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York (1999). Examples of nitrogen protecting groUps include, but are not limited to, t butoxycarbonyl, 9-fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl, benzyloxycarbonyl, and the like. The term "protected amino," as used herein, refers to an amino group protected with an amino protecting group as defined above. The term "nucleophilic heterocyclic compound" refers to a heterocyclic group in a nucleophilic form (e.g., metal salt form, protonated form) such that it is capable of ) reacting with another molecule resulting in a covalent bond between the two molecules (e.g., a nucleophile in a nucleophilic displacement reaction). Examples of such nucleophilic heterocyclic compounds are known in the art and delineated herein. The term "leaving group: refers to a moiety that can-be detached from a molecule during a reaction, especially nucleophilic displacement reactions. Examples of leaving groups include, for example, halides, mesyl groups, tosyl groups, alkoxides, hydroxides, and protonated forms thereof. Examples of such leaving groups are known in the art and delineated herein. The term "acyl" includes residues derived from acids, including but not limited to carboxylic acids, carbamic acids, carbonic acids, sulfonic acids, and phosphorous acids. ) Examples include aliphatic carbonyls, aromatic carbonyls, aliphatic sulfonyls, aromatic sulfinyls, aliphatic sulfinyls, aromatic phosphates and aliphatic phosphates. The term "aprotic solvent," as used herein, refers to a solvent that is relatively inert to proton activity, i.e., not acting as a proton-donor. Examples include, but are not limited to, hydrocarbons, such as hexane and toluene, for example, halogenated hydrocarbons, such as, for example, methylene chloride, ethylene chloride, chloroform, and the like, heterocyclic compounds, such as, for example, tetrahydrofuran and N methylpyrrolidinone, and ethers such as diethyl ether, bis-methoxymethyl ether. Such compounds are well known to those skilled in the art, and it will be obvious to those skilled in the art that individual solvents or mixtures thereof may be preferred for specific ) compounds and reaction conditions, depending upon such factors as the solubility of reagents, reactivity of reagents and preferred temperature ranges, for example. Further 98 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 discussions of aprotic solvents may be found in organic chemistry textbooks or in specialized monographs, for example: Organic Solvents Physical Properties and Methods of Purification, 4th ed., edited by John A. Riddick et al., Vol. II, in the Techniques of Chemistry Series, John Wiley & Sons, NY, 1986. The term "protogenic organic solvent," as used herein, refers to a solvent that tends to provide protons, such as an alcohol, for example, methanol, ethanol, propanol, isopropanol, butanol, t-butanol, and the like. Such solvents are well known to those skilled in the art, and it will be obvious to those skilled in the art that individual solvents or mixtures thereof may be preferred for specific compounds and reaction conditions, depending upon such factors as the solubility-of reagents, reactivity of reagents and preferred temperature ranges, for example. Further discussions of protogenic solvents may be found in organic chemistry textbooks or in specialized monographs, for example: Organic-Solvents Physical Properties and Methods of Purification, 4th ed., edited by John A. Riddick et al., Vol. II, in the Techniques of Chemistry Series, John Wiley & Sons, NY, 1986. Combinations of substituents and variables envisioned by this invention are only those that result in the formation of stable compounds. The term "stable", as used herein, refers to compounds which possess stability sufficient to allow manufacture and which maintains the integrity of the compound for a sufficient period of time to be useful ) for the purposes detailed herein (e.g., therapeutic or prophylactic administration to a subject). The synthesized compounds can be separated from a reaction mixture and further purified by a method such as column chromatography, high pressure liquid chromatography, or recrystallization. As can be appreciated by the skilled artisan, 5 further methods of synthesizing the compounds of the formulae herein will be evident to those of ordinary skill in the art. Additionally, the various synthetic steps may be performed in an altemate sequence or order to give the desired compounds. Synthetic chemistry transformations and protecting group methodologies (protection and deprotection) useful in synthesizing the compounds described herein are known in the ) art. and include, for example, those such as described in R. Larock, Comprehensive Organic Transformations, VCH Publishers (1989); T.W. Greene and P.G.M. Wuts, 99 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 2d. Ed., John Wiley and Sons (1991); L. Fieser and M. Fieser, Fieser and Fieser's Reagents for Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons (1994); and L. Paquette, ed., Encyclopedia of Reagents for Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons (1995), and subsequent editions thereof. The term "subject" as used herein refers to an animal. Preferably the animal is a mammal. More preferably the mammal is a human. A subject also refers to, for example, dogs, cats, horses, cows, pigs, guinea pigs, fish, birds and the like. The compounds of this invention may be modified by appending appropriate functionalities to enhance selective biological properties. Such modifications are known in the art and may include those which increase-biological penetration into a given biological system (e.g., blood, lymphatic system, central nervous system), increase oral availability, increase solubility to allow administration by injection, alter metabolism and alter rate of excretion. The term "subject" as used herein refers to a mammal. Preferably the mammal is a human. A subject also refers to, for example, dogs, cats, horses, cows, pigs, guinea pigs and the like. As used herein, the term "pharmaceutically acceptable salt" refers to those salts which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of humans and lower animals without undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response and the like, and are commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts are well known in the art. For example, S. M. Berge, et al. describe pharmaceutically acceptable salts in detail in J. Pharmaceutical Sciences, 1977, 66, 1-19, incorporated herein by reference. The salts can be prepared in situ during the final isolation and purification of the compounds of the invention, or separately by reacting the free base function with a suitable organic acid. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable, nontoxic acid addition salts include, but are not limited to, salts of an amino group formed with inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, phosphoric acid, sulfuric acid and perchloric acid or with organic acids such as acetic acid, oxalic acid, maleic acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, succinic acid ) or malonic acid or by using other methods used in the art such as ion exchange. Other pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, but are not limited to, adipate, alginate, 100 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 ascorbate, aspartate, benzenesulfonate, benzoate, bisulfate, borate, butyrate, camphorate, camphorsulfonate, citrate, cyclopentanepropionate, digluconate, dodecylsulfate, ethanesulfonate, formate, fumarate, glucoheptonate, glycerophosphate, gluconate, hemisulfate, heptanoate, hexanoate, hydroiodide, 2-hydroxy ethanesulfonate, lactobionate, lactate, laurate, lauryl sulfate, malate, maleate, malonate, methanesulfonate, 2-naphthalenesulfonate, nicotinate, nitrate, oleate, oxalate, palmitate, pamoate, pectinate, persulfate, 3-phenylpropionate, phosphate, picrate, pivalate, propionate, stearate, succinate, sulfate, tartrate, thiocyanate, p toluenesulfonate, undecanoate, valerate salts, and the like. Representative alkali or alkaline earth metal salts include sodium, lithium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, and the like. Further pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, when appropriate, nontoxic ammonium, quaternary ammonium, and amine cations formed using counterions such as halide, hydroxide, carboxylate, sulfate, phosphate, nitrate, Cr-C 6 sulfonate and aryl sulfonate. As used herein, the term pharmaceuticallyy acceptable ester" refers to esters which hydrolyze in vivo and include those that break down readily in the human body to leave the parent compound or a salt thereof. Suitable ester groups include, but are not limited to, those derived from pharmaceutically acceptable aliphatic ciboxylic acids, particularly alkanoic, alkenoic, cycloalkanoic and alkanedioic acids, in which each alkyl or alkenyl moiety advantageously has not more than 6 carbon atoms. Examples of particular esters include, but are not limited to, formates, acetates, propionates, butyates, acrylates and ethylsuccinates. The term "pharmaceutically acceptable prodrugs," as used herein, refers to those prodrugs of the compounds of the present invention which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of humans and lower animals without undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response and the like, commensurate with a reasonable risk/reward ratio, and effective for their intended use, as well as the zwitterionic forms, where possible, of the compounds of the invention. The term "prodrug" refers to compounds that are rapidly transformed in vivo to yield the ) parent compound of the above formulae, for example, by hydrolysis in blood. A thorough discussion is provided in T. Higuchi and V. Stella, Prodrugs as Novel delivery 101 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Systems, Vol. 14 of the A.C.S. Symposium Series and in Edward B. Roche, ed., Bioreversible Carriers in Drug Design (American Pharmaceutical Association and Pergamon Press, 1987), both of which are incorporated by reference herein. The term "effective amount" or "therapeutically effective amount," as used herein, means an amount which is capable of inhibiting the HCV NS3 seine protease, therefore interfering with the production of the viral polyprotein essential for viral replication. The HCV seine protease inhibition contemplated by the present method includes both therapeutic and prophylactic treatment, as appropriate for the subject in need of such treatment. Methods of treatment, dosage levels and requirements may be selected by those of ordinary skill in the art from available methods and techniques. For example, a compound of the present invention may be combined with a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient for administration to a virally-infected patient in a pharmaceutically acceptable manner and in an amount effective to lessen the severity of the viral infection. Alternatively, the compounds of the present invention may be used in vaccines and methods for protecting individuals against HCV viral infection over an extended period of time. The compounds may be employed in a manner consistent with the conventional utilization of protease inhibitors in vaccines. For example, a compound of the present invention may be combined with pharmaceutically acceptable excipients conventionally employed in vaccines and administered in prophylactically effective amounts to protect individuals over an extended period of time against HCV viral infection. As such, the protease inhibitors of the present invention can be administered as agents for treating or preventing HCV viral infection in a subject. The compounds of this invention may be modified by appending appropriate functionalities to enhance selective biological properties. Such modifications are known in the art and include those which increase biological penetration into a given biological system (e.g., blood, lymphatic system, central nervous system), increase oral availability, increase solubility to allow administration by injection, alter metabolism and alter rate of excretion. The compounds described herein contain two or more asymmetric centers and thus give rise to enantiomers, diastereomers, and other stereoisomeric forms that may be defined, in terms of absolute stereochemistry, as (R)- or (S)- , or as (D)- or (L)- for 102 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 amino acids. The present invention is meant to include all such possible isomers, as well as their racemic and optically pure forms. Optical isomers may be prepared from their respective optically active precursors by the procedures described above, or by resolving the racemic mixtures. The resolution can be carried out in the presence of a resolving agent, by chromatography or by repeated crystallization or by some combination of these techniques which are known to those skilled in the art. Further details regarding resolutions can be found in Jacques,.et al., Enantiomers Racernates, and Resolutions (John Wiley & Sons, 1981). When the compounds described herein contain olefinic double bonds or other centers of geometric asymmetry, and unless specified otherwise, it is intended that the compounds include both E and Z geometric isomers. Likewise, all tautomeric forms are also intended to be included. The configuration of any carbon-carbon double bond appearing herein is selected for convenience only and is not intended to designate a particular configuration unless the text so states; thus a carbon-carbon double bond depicted arbitrarily herein as trans may be cis, trans, or a mixture of the two in any proportion. Pharmaceutical Compositions The pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention comprise a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the present invention formulated together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. As used herein, the term "pharmaceutically acceptable carrier" means a non-toxic, inert solid, semi-solid or liquid filler, diluent, encapsulating material or formulation auxiliary of any type. Some Examples of materials which can serve as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers are sugars such as lactose, glucose and sucrose; starches such as corn starch and potato starch; cellulose and its derivatives such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate; powdered tragacanth; malt; gelatin; talc; excipients such as cocoa butter and suppository waxes; oils such as peanut oil, cottonseed oil; safflower oil; sesame oil; olive oil; com oil and soybean oil; glycols; such a. propylene glycol; esters such as ethyl oleate and ethyl laurate; agar; buffering agents such as magnesium hydroxide and aluminum hydroxide; alginic acid; pyrogen-free water; isotonic saline; Ringers solution; ethyl alcohol, and phosphate buffer solutions, as well as other non toxic compatible lubricants such as sodium lauryl sulfate and magnesium stearate, as 103 WO2004/0722431 PCT/US2004/003479 well as coloring agents, releasing agents, coating agents, sweetening, flavoring and perfuming agents, preservatives and antioxidants can also be present in the composition, according to the judgment of the formulator. The pharmaceutical compositions of this invention can be administered to humans and other animals orally, rectally, parenterally, intracistemally, intravaginally, intraperitoneally, topically (as by powders, ointments, or drops), buccally, or as an oral or nasal spray. Liquid dosage forms for oral administration include pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, microemulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups and elixirs. In addition to the active compounds, the liquid dosage forms may contain inert diluents, commonly used in the art such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agents and 30 emulsifiers such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, propylene glycol, 1,3-butylene glycol, dimethyiformamide, oils (in particular, cottonseed, groundnut, com, germ, olive, castor, and sesame oils), glycerol, tetrahydrofurfuryl alcohol, polyethylene glycols and fatty acid esters of sorbitan, and mixtures thereof. Besides inert diluents, the oral compositions can also include adjuvants such as wetting agents, emulsifying and suspending agents, sweetening, flavoring, and perfuming agents. Injectable preparations, for example, sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspensions may be formulated according to the known art using suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents. The sterile injectable preparation may also be a sterile injectable solution, suspension or emulsion in a nontoxic parenterally acceptable diluent or solvent, for example, as a solution in 1,3-butanediol. Among the acceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water, .Ringer's solution, U.S.P. and isotonic sodium chloride solution. In addition, sterile, fixed oils are conventionally employed as a solvent or suspending medium. For this purpose any bland fixed oil can be employed including synthetic mono- or diglycerides. In addition, fatty acids such as oleic acid are used in the preparation of injectables. The injectable formulations can be sterilized, for example, by filtration through a bacterial-retaining filter, or by incorporating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid ) compositions which can be dissolved or dispersed in sterile water or other sterile injectable medium prior to use. 104 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 In order to prolong the effect of a drug, it is often desirable to slow the absorption of the drug from subcutaneous or intramuscular injection. This may be accomplished by the use of a liquid suspension of crystalline or amorphous material with poor water solubility. The rate of absorption of the drug then depends upon its rate of dissolution which, in turn, may depend upon crystal size and crystalline form. Alternatively, delayed absorption of a parenterally administered drug form is accomplished by dissolving or suspending the drug in an oil vehicle. injectable depot forms are made by forming microencapsule matrices of the drug in biodegradable polymers such as polylactide polyglycolide. Depending upon the ratio of drug to polymer and the nature of the particular polymer employed, the rate of drug release can be controlled. Examples of other biodegradable polymers include poly(orthoesters) and poly(anhydrides). Depot injectable formulations are also prepared by entrapping the drug in liposomes or microemulsions which are compatible with body tissues. Compositions for rectal or vaginal administration are preferably suppositories which can be prepared by mixing the compounds of this invention with suitable non irritating excipients or carriers such as cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol or a suppository wax which are solid at ambient temperature but liquid at body temperature and therefore melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active compound. Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugar as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols and the like. The active compounds can also be in micro-encapsulated form with one or more excipients as noted above. The solid dosage forms of tablets, dragees, capsules, pills, and granules can be prepared with coatings and shells such as enteric coatings, release controlling coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical formulating art. In such solid dosage forms the active compound may be admixed with at least one inert diluent such as sucrose, lactose or starch. Such dosage forms may also comprise, as is normal practice, additional substances other than inert diluents, e.g., tableting lubricants and other tableting aids such a magnesium stearate and microcrystalline cellulose. In the case of capsules, tablets and pills, the dosage forms may also comprise buffering agents. They may optionally contain opacifying agents and 105 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 can also be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain part of the intestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner. Examples of embedding compositions which can be used include polymeric substances and waxes. Dosage forms for topical or transdermal administration of a compound of this invention include ointments, pastes, creams, lotions, gels, powders, solutions, sprays, inhalants or patches. The active component is admixed under sterile conditions with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and any needed preservatives or buffers as may be required. Ophthalmic formulation, ear drops, eye ointments, powders and solutions are also contemplated as being within the scope of this invention. The ointments, pastes, creams and gels may contain, in addition to an active compound of this invention, excipients such as animal and vegetable fats, oils, waxes, paraffins, starch, tragacanth, cellulose derivatives, polyethylene glycols, silicones, bentQnites, silicic acid, talc and zinc oxide, or mixtures thereof. Powders and sprays can contain, in addition to the compounds of this invention, excipients such as lactose, talc, silicic acid, aluminum hydroxide, calcium silicates and polyamide powder, or mixtures of these substances. Sprays can additionally contain customary propellants such as chlorofluorohydrocarbons. Transdermal patches have the added advantage of providing controlled delivery of a compound to the body. Such dosage forms can be made by dissolving or dispensing the compound in the proper medium'. Absorption enhancers can also be used to increase the flux of the compound across the skin. The rate can be controlled by either providing a rate controlling membrane or by dispersing the compound in a polymer matrix or gel. Antiviral Activity According to the methods of treatment of the present invention, viral infections are treated or prevented in a subject, such as a human or lower mammal, by administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound of the invention, in such amounts and for such time as is necessary to achieve the desired result. The term "anti-hepatitis C virally effective amount" of a compound of the invention, as used herein, means a sufficient amount of the compound so as to decrease the viral load in a 106 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 subject, thus decreasing said subject's chronic HCV symptoms. As well understood in the medical arts an anti-hepatitis C virally effective amount of a compound of this invention will be at a reasonable benefit/risk ratio applicable to any medical treatment. Upon improvement of a subject's condition, a maintenance dose of a compound, S composition or combination of this invention may be administered, if necessary. Subsequently, the dosage or frequency of administration, or both, may be reduced, as a function of the symptoms, to a level at which the improved condition is retained when the symptoms have been alleviated to the desired level, treatment should cease. The subject may, however, require intermittent treatment on a long-term basis upon any ) recurrence of disease symptoms. It will be understood, however, that the total daily usage of the compounds and compositions of the present invention will be decided by the attending physician within the scope of sound medical judgment. The specific anti-HCV virally effective dose level for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors including the disorder 5 being treated and the severity of the disorder; the activity of the specific compound employed; the specific composition employed; the age, body weight, general health, sex and diet of the patient; the time of administration, route of administration, and rate of excretion of the specific compound employed; the duration of the treatment; drugs used in combination or coincidental with the specific compound employed; and like factors ) well known in the medical arts. The total daily dose of the compounds of this invention administered to a subject in single or in divided doses can be in amounts, for example, from 0.01 to 50 mg/kg body weight or more usually from 0.1 to 25 mg/kg body weight. Single dose compositions may contain such amounts or submultiples thereof to make up the daily 5 dose. In general, treatment regimens according to the present invention comprise administration to a patient in need of such treatment from about 10 mg to about 1000 mg of the compound(s) of this invention per day in single or multiple doses. Abbreviations Abbreviations which have been used in the descriptions of the schemes and the ) examples that follow are: ACN for acetonitrile; 107 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 BME for 2-mercaptoethanol; BOP for benzotriazol-1-yloxy-tris(dimethylamino)phosphonium hexafluorophosphate; COD for cyclooctadiene; .DABCYL for 6-(N-4'-carboxy-4-(dimethylamino)azobenzene)- aminohexyl-1-0-(2 cyanoethyl)-(N,N-diisopropyl)-phosphoramidite; DAST for diethylaminosulfur trifluoride; DCM for dichloromethane; DIAD for diisopropyl azodicarboxylate; DIBAL-H for diisobutylaluminum hydride; DIEA for diisopropyl ethylamine; DMAP for N,N-dimethylaminopyridine; DME for ethyJene glycol dimethyl ether; DMEM for Dulbecco's Modified Eagles Media; DMF for N,N-dimethyl formamide; DMSO for dimethylsulfoxide; DUPHOS for EDANS for 5-(2-Amino-ethylamino)-naphthalene-1-sulfonic acid; EDCI or EDC for 1-(3-diethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride; EtOAc for ethyl acetate; HATU for 0 (7-Azabenzotriazole-1-yl)-N,N,N',N' - tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate; HMBA is 4-Hydroxymethylbenzoic acid AM resin; Hoveyda's Cat. for Dichloro(o-isopropoxyphenylmethylene) (tricyclohexylphosphine)ruthenium(Ii); KHMDS is potassium bis(trimethylsilyl) amide; Ms for mesyl; 108 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 NMM for N-4-methylmorpholine Ph for phenyl; PuPHOS PyBrOP for Bromo-tri-pyrolidino-phosphonium hexafluorophosphate; RCM for ring-closing metathesis; RT for room temperature; RT-PCR for reverse transcription-polymerase chain reaction; tBOC or Boc for tert-butyloxy carbonyl. TEA for triethyl amine; TFA for trifluoroacetic acid; THF for tetrahydrofuran; TLC for thin layer chromatography; TPP or PPh3 for triphenylphosphine; and Xantphos for 4,5-Bis-diphenylphosphanyl-9,9-dimethyl-9H-xanthene. Certain- chemical structures herein having -NH or -OH groups appear without those hydrogen atoms attached to oxygen or nitrogen atoms depicted. Thus, where a nitrogen or oxygen atom in such structure appears to lack proper valency, the presence of those hydrogen atoms are implied. SYNTHETIC METHODS The compounds and processes of the present invention will be better understood in connection with the following synthetic schemes which .illustrate the methods by which the compounds of the invention may be prepared. I. Replacement Method Compounds of the present invention can be made via a replacement.procedure described generally in the following scheme: 109 WO2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 O(H or Ms) H W Hydrolysis H Et Cs 2
CO
3 LiOHH Bo DMF Dioxane B> H HH / The hydroxyl proline or mesylated proline precursor may be used. This replacement method protocol is suitable for converting any hydroxy (or corresponding mesylate) proline compound or derivative starting compound to a heterocyclic 5 substituted proline derivative. The subsequent synthetic methods set forth the various procedures and intermediate steps that may be used to prepare the compounds disclosed herein. A. Synthesis Of Hydroxyl Proline Cyclic Peptide Precursors A cyclic peptide precursor may be used to synthesize the compounds of the 3 invention. In some embodiments, a mesylated version of the cyclic precursor may be used. In some embodiments, commercially available Boc-hydroxyproline A OH 0o A is treated with HCI in dioxane to yield starting material Ib. 110 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Synthesis of Cyclic peptide precursor Scheme I H OH HA Me HC Boc' ~l-HHCI Me .HATU, 1.2 eq Bc DIEA, 4 eq H Ia lb . DMF IN LiOH B p-dioxane OH r.t.,3 h OH H rA,H H Et Hoveyda's Cat. Et HATU, 1.2 eq H Boc.., DCM Boc. > DIEA, 4 eq H / reflux,4-12h H DMF BocH
H
2 Et H Ig If HCI > Id Ile The cyclic peptide precursor Ig was synthesized from Boc-L-2-amino-8-nonenoic acid la and cis-L-hydroxyproline methyl ester lb via steps A-D set forth generally in Scheme 1. For further details of the synthetic methods employed to produce the cyclic peptide precursor Ig, see U.S. Patent No. 6,608,027, which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety. Synthesis of mesylate of macrocyclic peptide precursor Scheme 2 H Ms H HS H A H Bo > DEA,Ms-CI B H / .M H / 0*C,3h Ig Ila The cyclic precursor mesylate was synthesized by forming the mesylate upon the hydroxyl of the hydroxyl proline residue of the cyclic peptide precursor via the synthetic route generally described above in Scheme 2. 111 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Scheme 3 y OMs H tetrazole H - 30 H , - Et Na 2
CO
3 Et Bocs .- DMF Bocs.. H / 95% H Ha The compounds of the present invention are made via the replacement of the mesylate of the macrocyclic peptide mesylate Ila with a 5-substituted-2H-tetrazole, Exemplary syntheses of such tetrazoloes as described in Scheme 5, below, via the synthetic route described generally in Scheme 3. Scheme 4 x OMs N H triazole ECs 2
CO
3 -. Et Bocs Et DMF Boc,H H / 95% H Ha IVa The compounds of the present invention are made via the replacement of the mesylate of the macrocyclic peptide mesylate Ila with a 4,5-substituted-1H-triazole via the synthetic route described generally in Scheme 4. Exemplary syntheses of such triazoles are described in scheme 6, below. B. Synthesis of substitutes for W W may be any of the substitutents described previously herein. Synthesis of these various substituents is within the skill of those of ordinary skill in the art. Some exemplary syntheses are presented herein by way of example and not of limitation. 112 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Other substituents are either commercially available or readily synthesized by those of ordinary skill in the art. Synthesis of tetrazoles Structurally diverse tetrazoles Va-Vq -were synthesized from commercially available nitrile compounds as described in Scheme 5 below: Scheme 5 C1 c1 1. NaN 3 ,5 eq N-N OH--6 - 2. Et 3 N.HCI, 3 eq N N OH Xylene H 140*C,12h -Va NBr Br N H H H H H H Va Vb VC Vd Ve Vf 0- 0 N-N4 H H H H / Vg Vh Vi V. Vk H H H H VI Vm Vn Vo VP Vq One skilled in the art will recognize that several 5-substituted tetrazole compounds may be produced in this manner with any nitrile-containing compound suitable for the reaction conditions set forth above. Synthesis of triazoles Scheme 6
TMS-N
3 Xylene 140*C, H Via 24-72h VIb Triazoles of the present invention are prepared by reacting alkyne compound Via, which is commercially available or made from procedures elucidated infra, and trimethylsilyl azide via the synthetic route described generally in Scheme 6. 113 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Irp It I, '1 V h-1- '-1a Commercially available alkynes suitable for triazole formation include, but are not limited to:
-
Br cl Synthesis of alkynes Alkynes useful in the synthesis of triazoles may be made by any appropriate method. Below are some exemplary syntheses. Sono-gashira reaction Scheme 7 Pd (11), 5% eq CuI TEA, MeCN- _ X -- H + Y-halide reflux, 12 h Vila halide = 1, Br V~lb Alkynes used in the present invention can be made by the Sonogashira reaction with primary alkyne compound Vila, an aryl halide (Y-halide), and triethylamine in acetonitrile with PdCI 2 (PPh 3
)
2 and Cul via the synthetic route described generally in Scheme 7. Commercially-available aryl halides suitable for the Sonogashira reaction include, but are not limited to: _r Br - Br r 114 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Commercially-available primary alkynes suitable for the Sonogashira reaction include, but are not limited to: Synthesis of alkynyl amides Scheme 8 + R_ BOP/DIEA , R ~ R H~ ~~ ' gR H DMF- R VIlla VIIlb R 3 VIIc Additional alkynes used in the present invention can be made by reacting alkynyl acid Va, BOP, and, DIEA in DMF with amine VIllb via the synthetic route described generally in Scheme 8. Post-Replacement Modification The resultant macrocycltic compound may be modified after W is attached. Some exemplary modifications follow. 1.. Synthesis of Phenolic esters Scheme 9 H Alkylatng agent RT-60*C for 3-12h ~t E BocsE Boc,, H /H IIla IXa R methyl, ethyl, allyl, 2-hydroxyethyl, isopropyl, methiomethyl 115 The post-replacement modification of macrocyclic compound Ila to obtain various phenolic esters was performed by the synthetic route described generally in Scheme 9. 2. Hydrolysis of macrocyclic peptide ethyl ester 5 Scheme 10 Ww H O LiOH/Dioxane 0 N N OEt RT3h N OH BoN 0~ Boc. Nr 0 H H / IVa IVb The hydrolysis of macrocyclic peptide ethyl esters of the present invention is performed by dissolving macrocyclic peptide ethyl ester IV in dioxane and adding IM LiOH via the synthetic route described generally in Scheme 10. 10 3. Using Suzuki coupling to generate more bi-aryl compounds Scheme 11 Br Ar I \ N , N N, N H Ar-B(OH) 2 H C N YN ON N OEt Cs 2
CO
3 OEt Boc,N N O0 KF, DME Boc,N 0 O H /95% H XIa XIb Compounds of the present invention may be further diversified by performing a Suzuki coupling adding to bromo-substituted triazole macrocyclic ethyl ester (see infra 15 Example 26 for preparation) DME an aromatic boric acid, cesium carbonate and KF via the synthetic route described generally in Scheme 11. II. Stepwise Synthesis Compounds of the invention may also be prepared though a stepwise synthesis rather than a replacement mechanism. Below is an exemplary synthesis where W is a 20 tetrazole. 116 A. Synthesis of proline derivatives. Scheme 12 Ar H OH OMs NN N 5-substituted-211-tetrazole Ms-CI,DIEA Na 2 CO, BocN OMe DCM Boc/ OMe DMF, 3-12h at 60"C BocN OMe 3 h at 0'C O 92-95% XIla XIIb XIlc 5 Br Br r Ar=-- r- 1 -rN S~ 1 2 3 4 5 6 B. Synthesis of linear tripeptides. Scheme 13 r r Ar A B NB H H (1) IN LiOH (2) HATU, 1.2 eq B N Et (1) TFA (2) IATU, 1.2 eq 'N Et p-dioxane DIEA,4 eq r.t., 30 min DEA,4 eq B Me r.t.,3 h DMIFH XIIC . Et XIIlb Bo H X11,HCI XIlla HlXIIIc 10 BrBr r Ar= 1 2 3 4 5 6 The linear tri-peptide containing tetrazole-substituted proline derivatives XIIId were prepared via the synthetic route described generally in Scheme 13. 15 C. Synthesis of cyclic peptide via Ring-closing-Metathesis (RCM). 117 Scheme 14 Ar Ar N, NN N I I I H A HB H Et Et HNUO Boc Hoveyda's Cat., 5%eq Boc: E d 4h Boc H DCM N dioxane N H reflux, 4-12 h H /RT, 412 h H/ 85-95% 95-99% XIII XIVa X1Vb ArBr r r 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 Formation of macrocyclic compound XIVb was performed using linear tripeptide XIIId via the Ring-Closing Metathesis reaction described generally in Scheme 14. D. Other derivatives 1. Tetrazole-substituted proline derivatives of the present invention 10 were synthesized by the synthetic route described generally in Scheme 12. 118 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Scheme 15 N=N I I OH CN N N'H S 1. MsCI, i-Pr 2 NEt, CH 2
CI
2 NaN 3 , tolueneEt 3 N HCi Boc-- Me 2. KCN, DMF, 80 UC Boc-- OMe 115 "C, overnight oc.- Me 0.0 XVC O XVa XVb Br 1. K 2 C0 3 , CH 3 CN 70 *C, overnight NNIN 2. LiOH, THF-MeOH-H 2 0 N-NIA N + NN Bo. OH Boc.-- OH OH 0 XVe XVd Additional tetrazole-substituted proline derivatives of the present invention were synthesized by the synthetic route described generally in Scheme 15. 5 2. Suzuki coupling Scheme 16 r r Ar 0-, M-, P Ph-B(OH), 10-20 mg NNN N KF, 10 mg H 2
CO
3 , 30 mg HIN LiOH l EtN DME, 5 ml ~ .. Et. dioxane ~ 2 NiH rdlui,4-12 I Boc., B rEt 9x, 412 b Boc, E RT, 4-12 h H 8-96% H 79 X111b- (2-4) XVIa XVIb Further derivatives were prepared using the Suzuki Coupling reaction described generally in Scheme 16. 0 Ill. SOLID PHASE SYNTHESIS Some compounds of the invention are amenable to synthesis by solid phase synthesis. For example, the triazole-substituted proline derivatives (P2) can be 119 synthesized and used in an on-resin assembly of a linear tripeptide chain. The resin bound tripeptides, containing the triazole-substituted proline derivatives, undergo Ring Closing-Metathesis (RCM) to furnish a cyclic tripeptide that is cleaved from the resin by hydrolysis affording the final product. 5 The following synthetic schemes set forth manners in which the triazole substituted proline derivatives are made and the solid-phase synthesis of the compounds of the present invention. A. Synthesis of proline derivatives Two methods were employed to synthesize the triazole-substituted proline 10 derivatives which are described generally by the following schemes: 1. Cyclo-addition method Scheme 17 - __X- Xylene N qN Y + x=-y -------- Bo OMe 110 C, 12 h VIlb OH OH XVIla XVIIb XVIIc The cyclo-addition method to create triazolyl proline derivatives involves the 15 3+2 cyclo-addition of azide proline derivative XVIIa and alkyne VIb via the synthetic route described generally in Scheme 17. Exemplary syntheses of alkynes are described in Scheme 7 above. 2. Mesylate method Scheme 18 OMs s 2
CO
3 N Y + DMF N N Me N ,NNH 70"C, 12 h Boc" N N H xvII a Vi B6 H o H Boc' 20 XvII1b XVIIIC XV111d Additional proline derivatives were synthesized via the replacement of mesylate XVIIIa 120 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 with a 4,5-substituted-1 H-triazole via the synthetic route described generally in Scheme 18. B. On-resin assembly and on-resin RCM Scheme 19 H A Boc H H 2 ec > H H / 1)cDI/, DMAP, DM H 2) 50%TFA/DCM H ATUDIEA XIXa B DMF C H H / \ ,)50% TFA/DCM B H >. - H 2) HATU, DIEA Boc o, 0.- - DMF HlM XI1 H ' Boc' H XIXc Hoveyda's Cat. D DCM ]a 50C, 24h W W = triazole derivatives as previously defined H Bocs H / XIXe On resin assembly The on-resin assembly of linear peptide XIXd followed by the on-resin RCM to obtain resin-bound cyclic peptide precursor XIXe was performed via steps A-D described generally in Scheme 19. IV. Other reactions In some embodiments, the substituent W is well-suited to other types of reactions. For example, and not by limitation, when W is a pyridazinone, the following reaction schemes are used. These methods may be used for other substituents, but are discussed here in the context of pyridazinones. 121 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 A. Condensation Reactions Scheme 20 OH 0 H H 1.DIAD/PPh 3 11 ~2. iOH 2 00 H ifH XXa- XXb HIc XX- x H HI H XXa-2 XXa-3 XXa-4 The simplest method, shown in Scheme 20, is to condense commercially available pyridazinones (XXa-1 - XXa-4) with key intermediate If by using Mitsunobu conditions followed by hydrolysis with LiOH. For further details on the Mitsunobu reaction see 0. Mitsunobu, Synthesis 1981, 1-28; D. L. Hughes, Org. React. 29, 1-162 (1983); D. L. Hughes, Organic Preparations and Procedures Int 28, 127-164 (1996); and J. A. Dodge, S. A. Jones, Recent Res. Dev. Org. Chem. 1, 273-283 (1997). ) Scheme 21 122 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 OHB) Br 1. DAD/PPh9TflF LiOH.H 2 0 B0 AH HH Br ~ NLO B H XXla XXId Pd(PPh3)4 DME1~O) HB(OH)2 OHLiON-HO A OH H H / XXIC XXlb The second method of preparing pyridazinone analogs of the present invention is to further chemically manipulate di-bromo intermediate XXIa (Scheme 21). The standard Mitsunobu coupling of the commercially available 4,5-dibromopyridazinone with hydroxyl If afforded the desired macrocycle XXIa. Coupling of XXIa with excess 3 thiophene boronic acid, cesium carbonate and potassium fluoride furnished di thiophene XXIb. Hydrolysis of compound compounds XXIa and XXIb with LiOH gave the desired analogs XXId and XXIc respectively. Many different boronic acids may be used in a similar manner to yield a plethora of di-substituted pyridazinonyl macrocycles. B. Bromide differentiation reaction Scheme 22 123 Br BrBr 0 N
K
2
CO
3 /ACN 0 N 0 H 07 0 N 0 Q ' H OSH 0 N N 0-, O O O 0S H XXIa XXIIa Pd(PPh 3
)
4 S Cs 2
CO
3 /CsF DME q
B(OH)
2 s S N O N LiOH.H 2 0 N 200 00 N H 0 H 0 N N o N N O N OH 0 N 0 H H XXIIc XXIIb Differentiation between the bromides on macrocyclic XXIa is achieved via Michael addition. As shown in Scheme 22, commercially available pyrrolidine is coupled with di-bromide to give compound XXIIa in 87% yield. The bromide moiety 5 adjacent to the carbonyl then undergoes a Suzuki coupling reaction with 3-thiophene boronic acid to produce intermediate XXIIb, which is further treated with LiOH to afford analog XXIIc. For further details concerning the Suzuki coupling reaction see A. Suzuki, Pure Appl. Chem. 63, 419-422 (1991) and A. R. Martin, Y. Yang, Acta Chem. Scand. 47, 221-230 (1993). 10 C. Sulfur containing nucleophiles Scheme 23 124 Br N BrB N N N
K
2 C0 3 /ACN N N N O+ Pd(PPh3)4jqLOI1 2 Cs 2 CO3/s IOHH2
B(OH)
2 S s N LoH.
2 0 N N H H 4, 0 OH O O O XXIte XXHId XXIIc While the secondary amine nucleophile pyrrolidine gave exclusive addition to the 5-bromide position on macrocycle XXIa, sulfur-containing nucleophiles did not 5 exhibit the same selectivity as shown in Scheme 23. With sulfur-containing nucleophiles, addition on both bromines of XXIa is observed together with the mono coupled product XXIIIa with only one equivalent of mercaptopyrimidine. The separability of compounds XXIIIa, XXIIIB and starting material XXIa by flash column chromatography allowed for a further Suzuki coupling of the mono-alkylated XXIIIa 10 with 3-thiophene boronic acid followed by hydrolysis of XXIIId with LiOH to furnish analog XXIIIe. The di-alkylated product XXIIIb is also hydrolyzed with LiOH to produce analog XXIIIc. D. Suzuki coupling with boronic acid Scheme 24 125 / -\ N Br N N, 1. Pd(PPh 3
)
4 N N 2 2SrI(Bu) 3 H H dioixane H 2. ULOIH 2 H/ Xia XXI Va Pd(OAc)2 NN Ho H 0 OH.H20 N 0 H 0~ft 2 0H Hxx 0v / H H/ XXI~h XIVc With only a limited number of boronic acids available for Suzuki coupling, other coupling methods such as Stille coupling and N-arylation using Buchwald's chemistry 5 were also explored (Scheme 24). Coupling of intermediate XXIa with 2-stannylthiazole with Stille standard conditions followed by hydrolysis afforded analog XXIVa. As for N-arylation, coupling of imidazole to di-bromide XXIa proceeded smoothly. Unfortunately, hydrolysis with LiOH resulted in replacement of the imidazole moiety on position 5 with a methoxy (XXIVb). For further details concerning Stille coupling 10 reactions see J. K. Stille, Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. 25, 508-524 (1986); M. Pereyre et al., Tin in Organic Synthesis (Butterworths, Boston, 1987) pp 185-207 passim., and T. N. Mitchell, Synthesis 1992, 803-815. For further details of the Buchwald reaction see J. F. Hartwig, Angew. Chem. Int. Ed 37, 2046-2067 (1998). E. Other diversified pyridazinone analogs 15 Scheme 25 126 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Br
K
2 CO3/ACN N, H 0 NaN 3 O CszCO 3 ICsFIIJ DME BO) . NaCN 0 H OH H H 2 LiOH.o 2 0 H N.02 N /H XX~b XXVc XXVd Another method for diversifying pyridazinone analogs is outlined in Scheme 25. Michael addition with sodium azide as the nucleophile to di-bromo XXIa yielded, as in the secondary amine case, only the mono-coupled compoundXXVa. Further Suzuki coupling with 3-thiophene boronic acid produced azide XX(Vb. Compound XXVb is hydrolyzed to give analog XXVc. In addition, the azide moiety of compound XXVb is further converted to tetrazole under standard conditions with sodium cyanide, followed by hydrolysis to provide analog XXVd. F. Synthesis of 5,6 pyridazinoyl macrocycle ) Scheme 26 OH -B(OHh O 1.D arHF O LPd(PI'h,) 4 H H 2. iO H Of& 0HH If XXVla XXVIb The synthesis of 5,6 pyridazinonyl macrocycle XXVIb is outlined in Scheme 26. Commercially available 5-bromo-6-phenyl-2H-pyridazin-3-one is condensed with key intermediate if via Mitsunobu conditions to give compound XXVla. Product XXVla is 127 further subjected to Suzuki coupling conditions with 3-thiophene boronic acid, followed by hydrolysis to give the desired analog XXVIb. EXAMPLES The compounds and processes of the present invention will be better understood 5 in connection with the following examples, which are intended as an illustration only and not to limit the scope of the invention. Various changes and modifications to the disclosed embodiments will be apparent to those skilled in the art. Such changes and modifications including, without limitation, those relating to the chemical structures, substituents, derivatives, formulations and/or methods of the invention may be made 10 without departing from the spirit of the invention and the scope of the appended claims. Example 1. Synthesis of the cyclic peptide precursor H H HBe Boe . H + H meBc + H MHATU, 1.2 eq Boc: HCI DIEA, 4 eq H la lb DMF ic IN LiOH B p-dioxane HH t, 3 h H kHD kHHC H H Et Hoveyda's Cat. Et HATU, 1.2 eq OH BocH :Y-'' DCM Bocs 0 -- DIEA,4eq H/ reflux, 4-12 h H DMF Boc
H
2 ,.Et H 1 if HCI .d le 1A. To a solution of Boc-L-2-amino-8-nonenoic acid la (1.36g, 5 mol) and the 15 commercially available cis-L-hydroxyproline methyl ester lb (1.09g, 6 mmol) in 15 ml DMF, was added DIEA (4 ml, 4eq.) and HATU (4g, 2 eq). The coupling was carried out at 0 *C over a period of 1 hour. The reaction mixture was diluted with 100 mL EtOAc, and followed by washing with 5% citric acid 2x20 ml, water 2x20 ml, IM NaHCO 3 4x20 ml and brine 2x10 ml, respectively. The organic phase was dried over anhydrous 20 Na 2
SO
4 and then was evaporated, affording the dipeptide ic (1.91g, 95.8%) that was identified by HPLC (Retention time = 8.9 min, 30-70%, 90%B), and MS (found 421.37, M+Na*). 128 1B. The dipeptide Ic (1.91g) was dissolved in 15 mL of dioxane and 15 mL of 1 N LiOH aqueous solution and the hydrolysis reaction was carried out at RT for 4 hours. The reaction mixture was acidified by 5% citric acid and extracted with 100 mL EtOAc, and followed by washing with water 2x20 ml, IM NaHCO 3 2x20 ml and brine 5 2x20 ml, respectively. The organic phase was dried over anhydrous Na 2
SO
4 and then removed in vacuum, yielding the free carboxylic acid compound 1d (1.79g, 97%), which was used for next step synthesis without need for further purification. 1C. To a solution of the free acid obtained above (1.77g, 4.64 mmol) in 5 ml DMF, D-p-vinyl cyclopropane amino acid ethyl ester le (0.95g, 5 mmol), DIEA (4 ml, 10 4eq.) and HATU (4g, 2eq) were added. The coupling was carried out at 0 'C over a period of 5 hours. The reaction mixture was diluted with 80 mL EtOAc, and followed by washing with 5% citric acid 2x20 ml, water 2x20 ml, 1 M NaHCO 3 4x20 ml and brine 2x10 ml, respectively. The organic phase was dried over anhydrous Na 2
SO
4 and then evaporated. The residue was purified by silica gel flash chromatography using different 15 ratios of hexanes:EtOAc as elution phase (5:1-+3:1--+1:1-l:2->1:5). The linear tripeptide 1f was isolated as an oil after removal of the elution solvents (1.59g, 65.4%), identified by HPLC (Retention time = 11.43 min) and MS (found 544.84, M+Na*). 1D. Ring Closing Metathesis (RCM). A solution of the linear tripeptide 1f (1.5 1g, 2.89 mmol) in 200 ml dry DCM was deoxygenated by bubbling N 2 . Hoveyda's 20 1 s' generation catalyst (5 mol% eq.) was then added as solid. The reaction was refluxed under N 2 atmosphere 12 hours. The solvent was evaporated and the residue was purified by silica gel flash chromatography using different ratios of hexanes:EtOAc as elution phase (9:1-*5:1-+3:1-*1:1-->1:2-*1:5). The cyclic peptide precursor 1 was isolated as a white powder after removal of the elution solvents (1.24g, 87%), identified by HPLC 25 (Retention time = 7.84 min, 30-70%, 90%B), and MS (found 516.28, M+Na'). For further details of the synthetic methods employed to produce the cyclic peptide precursor 1, see U.S. Patent No. 6,608,027, which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety. Example 2. Synthesis of the cyclic peptide precursor mesylate 30 129 WO2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 H Ms H A H Et > Et Bo -, / Bocs H / H / 1 2 2A. To a solution of the macrocyclic peptide precursor I (500mg;1.01 mmol) and DIEA (0.4 ml, 2 mmol) in 2.0 ml DCM, mesylate chloride (0.1 ml) was added slowly at 0 *C where the reaction was kept for 3 hours. 30 mL EtOAc was then added and followed by washing with 5% citric acid 2x1 0 ml, water 2x1 0 ml, I M NaHCO 3 2x1 0 ml and brine 2x10 ml, respectively. The organic phase was dried over anhydrous Na 2
SO
4 and evaporated, yielding the title compound mesylate that was used for next step synthesis without need for further purification. Example 3. Tetrazole Synthesis Structurally diverse tetrizoles lila-lllq, for use in preparing tetrazolyl macrocycles of the invention were synthesized from commercially available nitrile compounds as described below: ci I. NaN 3 , 5eq N C OH 2. Et 3 N.HCJ, 3 eq N H Xylene H 140 "C, 12 h 3a HH NQ Br N j Br 'N H H H H H 3a 3b 3c 3d 3e 3f I 0- 0 N-N N, NN 3g 3h 31 3j 3k N-N N'N N H~ I1 H H 31 3m 3n H 3o To a sealed tube containing 5 ml xylene, was added 3-CI-4-hydroxy benzoacetonitile (0.31g, 5 mol), NaN 3 (0.65g, 10 mmol) and the triethylamine hydrochloride (0.52g, 3 mmol). The mixture was stirred vigorously at 140 *C over a period of 20-30 hours. The reaction mixture was then cooled and poured to a mixture of EtOAc (30 ml) and aqueous citric acid solution (20 mL). After washing with water 2x10 130 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 ml and brine 2x10 ml, the organic phase was dried over anhydrous Na 2
SO
4 and was evaporated to a yellowish solid. After re-crystallization with EtOAc-hexanes, the tetrazole compound 3a was obtained in good yield (0.4g, 86%%), high purity (>90%, by HPLC), and identified by NMR and MS (found 197.35 and 199.38, M+H*). Example 4. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N W is \ , Q = absent, Y = phenyl, i =3, m= s = 1. and R = R 4 = H. PROLINE DERIVATIVE SYNTHESIS /I\ OH OMs A B BoC< Me O BoC Me Me 0 o O -- S--Cl 0o il 92-95% 4a 0 4b NWNH 4c To a solution of N-Boc-cis-hydroxyproline methyl ester 4a (10 g, 40.8 mmol) and ) N,N-Diisopropylethyl amine (DIEA, 12 mL, 60 mmol) in 110 mL of DCM, was added 3.85 mL of mesylate chloride (50 mmol) in a dropwise manner and the resulting reaction mixture was stirred at 0 *C for 3 hours. TLC (hexanes:ethyl acetate = 1:1, v/v) showed that Boc-cis-Hyp-OMe 4a was totally converted to its mesylate 4b. After the reaction was deemed complete by TLC, the reaction mixture was diluted with 100ml EtOAc, 5 washed with 5% citric acid 2x50 ml and brine 2x30 ml, and dried over anhydrous Na 2
SO
4 . Removal of solvents gave 13 g (98% yield) N-Boc-cis-4-mesylate-proline methyl ester 4b, which was used in Step B without need for further purification. To a solution of the mesylate 4b (0.65 g, 2 mmol) in 5 mL DMF, was added 4 D mmol of 5-phenyl-1 H-tetrazole and anhydrous sodium carbonate (0.53 g, 5 mmol). The resulting reaction mixture was stirred vigorously at 60*C for 6-12 hours. TLC (hexanes:ethyl acetate = 1:1, v/v) showed the mesylate 4b was completely converted to trans 4-tetrazole-substituted proline derivative 4c. After the reaction was deemed 131 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 complete by TLC, the reaction mixture was diluted with 30 ml EtOAc and washed with 1 M Na 2
CO
3 (3x10 mI), water (3x10 ml), 5% citric acid (3x10 ml) and brine (3x10 ml), respectively. The organic phase was dried over anhydrous Na 2
SO
4 and concentrated in vacuo, giving the 5-phenyl tetrazole substituted proline derivative 4c in excellent yield 5 (94%) and high purity (>90%). 4c: 94% yield, [M+Naj = 396.39. SYNTHESIS OF LINEAR TRIPEPTIDES B _ _ _H _ _ d N (2)H , ,1. eq Et (1)TFA (2)HATU,12eq Et Me p-dloxane DIEA, 4 eq - rt.,30 ml WEA 4e Me r.,3h DMF DMF H HH 4c p Et 4e H H 4d 4f A. (1) The dipeptide 4e was prepared by dissolving 0.22 g (0.6 mmol) of N-Boc trans-4-(3-phenyl tetrazolyl)-proline methyl ester 4c in 6 mL of dioxane and 2 mL of I N ) LiOH aqueous solution. The resulting reaction mixture was stirred at RT for 3-8 hours to allow the for the hydrolysis of the methyl ester. The reaction mixture was acidified by 5% citric acid, extracted with 40 mL EtOAc, and washed with water 2x20 ml, 1 M NaHCO 3 2x20 ml and brine 2x10 ml, respectively. The organic phase was dried over anhydrous Na 2
SO
4 and concentrated in vacuo, yielding the free carboxylic acid 5 compound (0.20g, 92%), which was used for next step synthesis without need for further purification. (2) To a cooled. (0 *C) solution of the free acid obtained above (0.20g, 0.55 mmol) in 2 ml DMF, was added D-p-vinyl cyclopropane amino acid ethyl ester 4d (0.1g, 0.52 mmol), DIEA (0.4 ml, 4eq.) and HATU (0.4g, 2eq). The resulting reaction mixture was stirred at 0 *C for 0.5-3 hours. The reaction mixture was diluted 3 with 40 mL EtOAc, and washed with 5% citric acid 2x 20 ml, water 2x20 ml, 1 M NaHCO 3 4x20 ml, and brine 2x10 ml, respectively. The organic phase was dried over anhydrous Na 2
SO
4 and concentrated in vacuo, affording the dipeptide 4e (0.24g, 94%), identified by HPLC (Retention time = 10.03 min) and MS (found 519.22, M+Na'). B. (1) Tripeptide 4g was prepared by deprotecting the amine of dipeptide 4e 5 (0.24 g, 0.49 mmol) in 2 mL TFA at 0 *C for 10 min. After removal of TFA in vacuo, the 132 free amine product was subjected to next coupling reaction directly. (2) To a cooled (0 *C) solution of the free amine compound obtained above in 2 ml DMF, was added Boc 2-amino-8-nonenoic acid 4f (0.136g, 0.50 mmol), DIEA (0.4 ml, 4eq.) and HATU (0.4g, 2eq). The coupling was carried out at 0 'C over a period of 0.5-3 hours. The reaction 5 mixture was diluted with 40 mL EtOAc and washed with 5% citric acid 2x20 ml, water 2x20 ml, IM NaHCO 3 4x20 ml and brine 2x10 ml, respectively. The organic phase was dried over anhydrous Na 2
SO
4 and concentrated in vacuo, affording tripeptide 4g (0.28g, 88% for two steps) that was identified by HPLC (Retention time = 14.03 min), and MS (found 672.30, M+Na*). 10 SYNTHESIS OF CYCLIC PEPTIDE VIA RING-CLOSING-METATHESIS (RCM). NN HA HB H Et Et H Boc H Et Hoveyda's Cat, 5% H EtBoHo H reflux,4-12 h H RT, 4-12 h H 4 85-95% 95-99% 4h 4i 4 A. A solution of linear tripeptide 4g (71mg, 0.109 mmol) in 50 ml dry DCM was deoxygenated by bubbling N 2 . To the resulting degassed solution was added Hoveyda's 15 Cat. (5-10 mol% eq.) was as solid and the resulting reaction mixture was refluxed under
N
2 over for 5-20 hours. The reaction mixture was then concentrated in vacuo and the residue was purified by silica gel flash chromatography using different ratios of hexanes:EtOAc as elution phase (9:1-+5:l->3:1-+1:1->1:2). The macrocyclic peptide 4i was isolated as a white powder by evaporation of the elution solvents (58mg, 85.5%), 20 identified by HPLC (Retention time = 11.80 min, 30-80%, 90%B), and MS (found 644.66, M+Na*). B. HYDROLYSIS OF THE ETHYL ESTER The title compound was prepared by dissolving compound 4i (20mg) in 2 mL of dioxane and 1 mL of 1 N LiOH aqueous solution. The resulting reaction mixture was 25 stirred at RT for 4-8 hours. The reaction mixture was then acidified with 5% citric acid, extracted with 10 mL EtOAc, and washed with water 2x20 ml. The solvent was 133 WO2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 evaporated and the residue was purified by HPLC on a YMC AQ12S11-0520WT column with a 30-80% (100% acetonitrile) gradient over a 20 min period. After lyophilization, title compound was obtained as a white amorphous solid. [M+Na] + = 616.72. Example 5. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent N-N W is NQ, Q = absent, Y = 2-bromophenyl, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = = H. 5A. PROLINE DERIVATIVE SYNTHESIS The proline derivative of the present example was prepared by the procedure set forth in Example 4 (1) with 5-(2-brorhophenyl)-1 H-tetrazole and N-Boc-cis ) hydroxyproline methyl ester 4a. [M+Na]* = 396.39. 5B. SYNTHESIS OF LINEAR TRIREPTIDES The linear peptide of the present example was prepared via the procedure set forth in Example 4 (11) with the proline derivative prepared in step 5A, D-p-vinyl cyclopropane amino acid ethyl ester, and Boc-2-amino-8-nonenoic acid. [M+H]* = 728.41 5C. RING CLOSING METATHESIS The macrocyclic peptide ethyl ester of the present example was prepared with the linear peptide of Step 5B via the procedure set forth in Example 4 (111). [M+Na]* = 722.37. 5D. HYDROLYSIS OF THE ETHYL ESTER The title compound was ultimately obtained via hydrolyisis described in Example 4 (IV) from the ethyl ester of Step 5C. [M+H]* = 672.49. Example 6. Compound of Formula I1, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N=N . W is V Q, Q = absent, Y = 3-bromophenyl, j =3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R 4 = H. 6A. PROLINE DERIVATIVE SYNTHESIS 134 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 The proline derivative of the present example was prepared by the procedure set forth in Example 4 (1) with 5-(3-bromophenyl)-1 H-tetrazole and N-Boc-cis hydroxyproline methyl ester 4a. [M+Na]* = 396.39. 6B. SYNTHESIS OF LINEAR TRIPEPTIDES The linear peptide of the present example was prepared via the procedure set forth in Example 4 (11) with the proline derivative prepared in step 6A, D-p-vinyl cyclopropane amino acid ethyl ester, and Boc-2-amino-8-nonenoic acid. [M+H]* = 728.41. 6C. RING CLOSING METATHESIS The macrocyclic peptide ethyl ester of the present example was prepared with the linear peptide of Step 6B via the procedure set forth in Example 4 (111). [M+Na]* = 722.37. 6D. HYDROLYSIS OF THE ETHYL ESTER The title compound was ultimately obtained via hydrolyisis described in Example 4 (IV) from the ethyl ester of Step 6C. [M+H]* = 672.49. Example 7. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N W is N Q , Q = absent, Y = 4-bromophenyl, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R 4 = H. 7A. PROLINE DERIVATIVE SYNTHESIS The proline derivative of the present example was prepared by the procedure set forth in Example 4 (I) with 5-(4-bromophenyl)-1H-tetrazole and N-Boc-cis hydroxyproline methyl ester 4a. [M+Na]* = 396.39. 7B. SYNTHESIS OF LINEAR TRIPEPTIDES The linear peptide of the present example was prepared via the procedure set forth in Example 4 (11) with the proline derivative prepared in step 7A, D-p-vinyl cyclopropane amino acid ethyl ester, and Boc-2-amino-8-nonenoic acid. [[M+Na] +H]* = 728.41. 7C. RING CLOSING METATHESIS 135 WO2004/0722431 PCT/US2004/003479 The macrocyclic peptide ethyl ester of the present example was prepared with the linear peptide of Step 7B via the procedure set forth in Example 4 (111). [M+Na]* = 722.37. 7D. HYDROLYSIS OF THE ETHYL ESTER The title compound was ultimately obtained via hydrolyisis described in Example 4 (IV) from the ethyl ester of Step 7C. [M+H]* = 672.49. Example 8. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N W is V N , Q = absent, Y = 5-Bromo-2-thienyi, j =3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R 4 = H. 8A. PROLINE DERIVATIVE SYNTHESIS The proline derivative of the present example was prepared by the procedure set forth in Example 4 (I) with 5-(5-Bromo-2-thienyl)-1 H-tetrazole and N-Boc-cis hydroxyproline methyl ester 4a. [M+Na]* = 480.23. 8B. SYNTHESIS OF LINEAR TRIPEPTIDES The linear peptide of the present example was prepared via the procedure set forth in Example 4 (11) with the proline derivative prepared in step 8A, D-p-vinyl cyclopropane amino acid ethyl ester, and Boc-2-amino-8-nonenoic acid. [M-Boc+H]* = 634.29. 8C. RING CLOSING METATHESIS The macrocyclic peptide ethyl ester of the present example was prepared with the linear peptide of Step 8B via the procedure set forth in Example 4 (111). [M+Na]* = 736.21. 8D. HYDROLYSIS OF THE ETHYL ESTER The title compound was ultimately obtained via hydrolysis described in Example 4 (IV) from the ethyl ester of Step 8C. [M+H]* = 678.22. Example 9. Compound of Formula I1, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N=N W is \ , Q = absent, Y =2-bromo-4-pyridyl, j = 3. m = s = 1. and R 3 = = H. 136 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 9A. PROLINE DERIVATIVE SYNTHESIS The proline derivative of the present example was prepared by the procedure set forth in Example 4 (I) with 5-(2-bromo-4-pyridyl)-1 H-tetrazole and N-Boc-cis hydroxyproline methyl ester 4a. [M+Na]* = 453.23. 9B. SYNTHESIS OF LINEAR TRIPEPTIDES The linear peptide of the present example was prepared via the procedure set forth in Example 4 (II) with the proline derivative prepared in step 9A, D-p-vinyl cyclopropane amino acid ethyl ester, and Boc-2-amino-8-nonenoic acid. [M-Boc+H]* = 629.31. 9C. RING CLOSING METATHESIS The macrocyclic peptide ethyl ester of the present example was prepared with the linear peptide of Step 9B via the.procedure set forth in-Example 4 (111). [M+Na]* = 723.36. 9D. HYDROLYSIS OF THE ETHYL ESTER The title compound was ultimately obtained via hydrolysis described in Example 4 (IV) from the ethyl ester of Step 9C. [M+HJ = 673.26. Example 10. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N . ' y W is NQ , Q =absent, Y =2-bipheny, i = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3
=R
4 =H. To a deoxygenated solution of ethyl ester compound from Step 5C obtained above (40 mg), phenylboronic acid (10mg), KF (100mg), and Cs 2
CO
3 (80mg) in 5 ml DME was added Pd(PPh 3
)
4 (5mg) in its solid form. The resulting reaction mixture was heated in an oil bath to 90 *C and vigorously stirred for 6-12 hours. The solvent was evaporated and the residue was purified by silica gel flash chromatography using different ratios of hexanes:EtOAc as the elution phase (9:1->5:1-+3:1-1:1-+2:1). The macrocyclic bi-aryl peptide ethyl ester was then isolated as a white powder by evaporation of the elution solvents (31mg, 78%) that was directly subjected to hydrolysis, as previously described in Example 4 (IV), and purified by HPLC. [M+Na]*= 692.38. 137 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Example 11. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N W is \ Q , Q = absent, Y =3-biphenyl, i = 3. m = s = 1, and R 3 = = H. The title compound was prepared with the ethyl ester compound from Step 6C and phenylboronic acid via the procedure set forth in Example 10, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester according to the procedure of Example 4 (IV). [M+Na]*= 692.38. Example 12. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N=N W is \r N QY, Q = absent, Y =4-biphenyl, i = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R 4 = H. The title compound was prepared with the ethyl ester compound from Step 7C phenylboronic acid via the procedure set forth in Example 10, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester according to the procedure of Example 4 (IV). [M+Na]*= 692.38. Example 13. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N NY W is ~, Q = absent, Y = 3-(3-thienyl)phenyl , j =3, m =s =1, and R 3 = R H. The title compound was prepared with the ethyl ester compound from Step 6C and 3-thienylboronic acid via the procedure set forth in Example -10, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester according to the procedure of Example 4 (IV). [M+Na]*= 698.32. Example 14. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N W is \N N , Q = absent, Y = 3-(p-trifluoromethoxyphenvl)phenyl , j =3, m = s = 1. and R 3 = R 4 = H. The title compound was prepared with the ethyl ester compound from Step 6C and p-trifluoromethoxyphenylboronic acid via the procedure set forth in Example 10, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester according to the procedure of Example 4 (IV). [M+Na]*= 776.35. 138 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Example 15. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N W is \V N Q, Q = absent, Y = 3-(p-cyanophenyl)phenyl , i = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 =
R
4 = H. The title compound was prepared with the ethyl ester compound from Step 6C and p-cyanophenylboronic acid via the procedure set forth in Example 10, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester according to the procedure of Example 4 (IV). [M+Na]*= 692.38. Example 16. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N W is N Q , Q = absent, Y = 4-(3-thienyl)phenyl , i = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = H. The title compound was prepared with the ethyl ester compound from Step 7C and 3-thienylboronic acid via the procedure set forth in Example 10, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester according to the procedure of Example 4 (IV). [M+Na]*= 698.32. Example 17. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N 'N W is N Q -, Q = absent, Y = 4-(p-trifluoromethoxyphenyl)phenvl , j =3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R 4 = H. The title compound was prepared. with the ethyl ester compound from Step 7C and p-trifluoromethoxyphenylboronic acid via the procedure set forth in Example 10, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester according to the procedure of Example 4 (IV). [M+Na]*= 776.35. Example 18. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N W is VN , Q = absent, Y = 4-(p-cyanophenyl)phenyl , j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 R 4 = H. The title compound was prepared with the ethyl ester compound from Step 7C and p-cyanophenylboronic acid via the procedure set forth in Example 10, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester according to the procedure of Example 4 (IV). 139 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 [M+Na]*= 692.38. Example 19. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N W is N , Q = absent, Y = 5-phenyl-2-thienyl, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3
=.R
4 = H. The title compound was prepared with the ethyl ester compound from Step 8C 5 and phenylboronic acid via the procedure set forth in Example 10, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester according to the procedure of Example 4 (IV). [M+Na]*= 698.32. Example 20. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N N, -'Y W is N I , Q = absent, Y = 5-phenyl-3-pyridyl, i = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R 4 = H. 3 The title compound was prepared with the ethyl ester compound from Step 9C and phenylboronic' acid via the -procedure set forth in Example 10, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester according to the procedure of Example 4 (IV). [M+Na]*= 708.30. 5 Example 21. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OEt, L = absent, N-N N?.:J, Y W is VN Q , Q = absent; Y = 3-chloro-4-hydroxyphenyl, i = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3
R
4 = H. Replacement Method The title compound was prepared via the replacement of the mesylate 2 and D tetrazole 3a. The replacement method is performed by dissolving 0.041mmol of the macrocyclic peptide precursor mesylate 2 and 0.123mmol of tetrazole 3a in 3ml.of DMF and adding 0.246mmol of sodium carbonate (60mg). The resulting reaction mixture is stirred at 60 0 C for 4-10 hours and subsequently cooled and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic extract was washed with water (2x30ml), and the organic solution is 5 concentrated in vacuo to be used in crude form for hydrolysis of the ethyl ester. 140 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Example 22. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N W is , Q = absent, Y = 3-chloro-4-hydroxyphenyl, i = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3
R
4 = H. The title compound was prepared by dissolving the title compound of Example 4 (20mg) in 2 mL of dioxane and 1 mL of 1 N LiOH aqueous solution. The resulting reaction mixture was stirred at RT for 4-8 hours. The reaction mixture was acidified with 5% citric acid, extracted with 10 mL EtOAc, and washed with water 2x20 mi. The solvent was evaporated and the residue was purified by HPLC on a YMC AQ12S11 0520WT column with a 30-80% (100% acetonitrile) gradient over a 20 min period. After lyophilization, title compound was obtained as a white amorphous solid. [M+Na]*= 666.24. Example 23.,Corpound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC. G = OH, L = absent, N-N ,N_ Y W is V N , Q = absent, Y = 3-bromo-4-hydroxyphenyl, i = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3
R
4 = H. The title compound was prepared via the replacement method described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and tetrazole 3b from Example 3, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. [M+Na]*= 712.18. Example 24. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH. L = absent, N-N W is , -,eke, = absent, Y = 2-methyl-4-bromophenyl, i = 3. r = s = 1, and R 3
R
4 = H. The title compound was prepared via the replacement method described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and tetrazole 3c from Example 3, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. [M+Na]* = 708.30. 141 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Example 25. Compound of Formula II, wherein A tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N W is ( , Q = absent, Y = 3-methyl-4-bromophenyi, i = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3
R
4 = H. The title compound was prepared via the replacement method described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and tetrazole 3d from Example 3, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. [M+Na]* = 708.30. Example 26. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N Wis N , Q = absent, Y =n-propyl, =3, m = s = 1, and R 3
=R
4 =H. The title compound was prepared via the replacement method described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and tetrazole 3e from Example 3, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. [M+Na]* = 582.33. Example 27. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N W is v , Q = absent, Y =n-butyl, j = 3, m = s = 1. and R 3 = R 4 = H. The title compound was prepared via the replacement method described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and tetrazole 3f from Example 3, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. [M+Na]* = 596.36. Example 28. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N W is N , Q = absent, Y = 4-ethoxyphenyl j = 3; m = s = 1. and R 3 = R 4 = H. The title compound was prepared via the replacement method described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and tetrazole 3g from Example 3, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. [M+H]* = 660.92. 142 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Example 29. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L absent, N=N W is ek., Q = absent, Y = 4-propoxyphenyl, i = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R 4 = H. The title compound was prepared via the replacement method described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and tetrazole 3h from Example 3, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. [M+Na]* = 674.29. Example 30. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N=N W is \ N , Q = absent, Y = 4-butoxyphenyl, j =3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = = H. The title compound was prepared via the replacement method described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and tetrazole 3i from Example 3, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. [M+Na]* = 688.32. Example 31. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N N - Y W is N , Q = absent, Y = 3-methoxyphenyl, j=3, m = s = 1, and R 3
=R
4 =H. The title compound was prepared via the replacement method described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and tetrazole 3j from Example 3, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. [M+Na]* = 646.92. Example 32. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N W is ,N Q = absent, Y = 3.4-dimethoxyphenyl, = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = = H. The title compound was prepared via the replacement method described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and tetrazole 3k from Example 3, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. [M+Na]*= 676.38. 143 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Example 33. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH. L = absent, N-N W is VN Q , Q = absent, Y = 4-methoxy-1-naphthyl, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = -H. The title compound was prepared via the replacement method described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and tetrazole 31 from Example 3, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. [M+Na]* = 697.00. Example 34. Compound of Formula I, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N W is N , Q = absent, Y = 4-phenoxyphenyl, i = 3, m = s = 1. and R 3 = Re = H. The title compound was prepared via the replacement method described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and tetrazole 3m from Example 3, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. [M+Na]* = 708.51. Example 35. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N W is N Q . Q = absent, Y = benzyl, i =3, m =s= 1, and R 3 = = H. The title compound was prepared via the replacement method. described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and tetrazole 3n from Example 3, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. [M+Na] = 630.35. Example 36. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC. G = OH, L = absent, N-N N Q W is , Q = absent, Y = p-phenylbenzyl, j =3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R 4 = H. The title compound was prepared via the replacement method described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and tetrazole 3o from Example 3, followed by hydrolysis of -the ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. [M+Na] =706.38. 144 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Example 37. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N W is V , Q = absent, Y = 3-chlorophenyl, =3. m = s = 1, and R 3 = R 4 = R4. The title compound was prepared via the replacement method described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and 5-(3-chlorophenyl)-1 H-tetrazole, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. [M+Na]* =650.33. Example 38. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N W is N , Q = absent, Y = 3-fluorophenyl, j =3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R 4 = H. The title compound was prepared via the replacement method described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and 5-(3-fluorophenyl)-1 H-tetrazole, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. [M+Na]* =634.37. Example 39. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N W is N Q , Q = absent, Y = 3-methoxyphenyl, i = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = = H. The title compound was prepared via the replacement method described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and 5-(3-methoxyphenyl)-1 H-tetrazole, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. [M+Na]* =646.92. Example 40. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L absent, N-N ) W is N , Q = absentY=3-phenoxyphenl j=3. m=s= 1. and R 3 = R 4 = H. The title compound was prepared via the replacement method described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and 5-(3-phenoxyphenyl)-1H-tetrazole, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. [M+Na]* =708.51. Example 41. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N W is N Q = absent.Y=3-benzyloxypheni=3m=s=1. and R =R 4 = H. 145 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 The title compound was prepared via the replacement method described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and 5-(3-benzyloxyphenyl)-1H-tetrazole, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. [M+Na]* =722.32. Example 42. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N W is \ Q , Q = absent, Y = 3-trifluormethylphenyl, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = = H. The title compound was prepared via the replacement method described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and 5-(3-trifluormethylphenyl)-1H-tetrazole, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. [M+Na]* =684.32. Example 43.,Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N N Y W is \NS , Q = absent, Y = 4-bromophenyl, i = 3. m = s = 1, and R = R4= H. The title compound was prepared via the replacement method described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and 5-(4-bromophenyl)-1 H-tetrazole, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. [M+Na]* =696.28. Example 44. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N W isV , Q = absent, Y = 4-fluorophenyl, j = 3. m = s = 1, and R 3 = R 4 = H. . The title compound was prepared via the replacement method described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and 5-(4-fluorophenyl)-1H-tetrazole, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. [M+Na]+ =634.36. Example 45. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N W is N Q .Q = absent, Y = 4-methoxyphenyl, i 3. m = s = 1, and R 4 = = H. 146 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 The title compound was prepared via the -replacement method described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and 5-(4-methoxyphenyl)-1H-tetrazole, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. [M+Na]* =646.36. Example 46. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N W is Q , Q = absent, Y = 4-ethoxyphenyl, i = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = = H. The title compound was prepared via the replacement method described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and 5-(4-ethoxyphenyl)-1 H-tetrazole, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester by the procedure of-Example 22. [M+H]* =660.92. Example 47. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N W is Q , Q = absent, Y = 4-trifluoromethylphenyl, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = -H. The title compound was prepared via the replacement method described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and 5-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-1H-tetrazole, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. [M+Na]* =684.32. Example 48. .Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, -NN W is N , Q = absent, Y = 3,5-di(trifluoromethyl)phenyl, j =3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R 4 =H. The title compound. was prepared via the replacement method described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and 5-(3,5-di(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)-1 H-tetrazole, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. [M+NaJ =766.32. Example 49. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N W is \ Q, Q = absent, Y = 4-(NN-dimethylamino)-3,5-di(trifluoromethyl)pheny, j=3, m = s = 1, and Ra = = H. 147 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 The title compound was prepared via the replacement method described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and 5-(4-(N,N-dimethylamino)-3,5 di(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)-1H-tetrazole, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. [M+Na]* =695.39. Example 50. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH. L = absent, N-N W is N ' , Q = absent, Y = 2,4-dichlorophenyl, =3, m = s =1, and R 3 = R 4 H. The title compound was prepared via the replacement method described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and 5-(2,4-dichlorophenyl)-1H-tetrazole, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. [M+Na]* =684.27. Example 51-. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N'N W is \ , Q = absent, Y = 3,5-dichlorophenyl, i = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R4= H. The title compound was prepared via the replacement method described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and 5-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)-1 H-tetrazole, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. [M+Na]* =684.27. Example 52. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N W is VN Q , Q = absent, Y = 3.4-dichlorophenyl.. = 3, m = s = 1. and R = = H. The title compound was prepared via the replacement method described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and 5-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-1 H-tetrazole, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. [M+Na]* =684.27. Example 53. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N W is\, Q =absent, Y =2-pyridyl, =3, m= s =1, and R 3 = R 4 = H. 148 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 The title compound was prepared via the replacement method described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and 5-(2-pyridyl)-1 H-tetrazole, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. [M+Na]* =617.60. Example 54. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, NJ-y N Q W is ,Q =absent, Y = 2-pyridyl, =3,m=s= 1, and R 3
=R
4 =H. The title compound was prepared via the replacement method described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and 5-(2-pyridyl)-1 H-tetrazole, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. ) [M+Na]* =617.60. Example 55. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N W is \ N' , Q = absent, Y = 3-pyridyl, j =3, m =s=1. and R 3 = = H. The title compound was prepared via the replacement method described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and 5-(3-pyridyl)-1 H-tetrazole, followed by hydrolysis of the 5 ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. [M+Na]* =645.24. Example 56. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N W is \N Q =absent, Y = 4-pyridyl, j=3, m = s = 1, and R =R=H. The title compound was prepared via the replacement method described in ) Example 21 with mesylate 2 and 5-(4-pyridyl)-1 H-tetrazole, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. [M+H]* =595.50. Example 57. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N W is I r, Q = absent, Y = 4-methoxy-3-bromophenvl, i = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 5 R 4 =H. 57A. Tetrazole Formation 149 The tetrazole of the present example was prepared by dissolving 3-bromo-4 hydroxy-benzonitrile in DMF and adding methyl iodide and stirring at RT for 3-12 hours. The resulting reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAc and washed with water and brine. The resulting organic phase was then dried over Na 2
SO
4 and concentrated in 5 vacuo to yield the 3-bromo-4-methoxy-benzonitrile. This compound then was used to form the corresponding tetrazole via the method described in Example 3. The title compound was prepared via the replacement method described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and 5-(3-bromo-4-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-tetrazole from 57A, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. 10 [M+Na]* =724.91. Example 58. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = N-N absent, W is N Q , Q = absent, Y = 4-(methylcyclopropane)phenyl, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R4 H. 58A. Tetrazole Formation 15 The tetrazole of the present example was prepared by dissolving 4-cyano-phenol in DMF and adding (bromomethyl)cyclopropane and stirring at RT for 3-12 hours. The resulting reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAc and washed with water and brine. The resulting organic phase was then dried over Na 2
SO
4 and concentrated in vacuo to yield the 4-(methylcyclopropane)benzonitrile. This compound then was used to form 20 the corresponding tetrazole via the method described in Example 3. The title compound was prepared via the replacement method described in Example 21 with mesylate 2 and 5-(4-(methylcyclopropane)-phenyl)-1H-tetrazole from 58A, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester by the procedure of Example 22. [M+Na]* =686.29. 25 Example 59. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = N-N absent, W is N , Q= absent, Y = 3-chloro-4 (methylcyclopropanelphenyl, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R4= H. The title compound was prepared by using ethyl ester title compound from Example 21 without workup, adding (bromomethyl)cyclopropane, and stirring at 60*C 150 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 for 3-12 hours. The resulting reaction mixture was cooled to RT, poured into a mixture of 50:50 EtOAc:water, washed with water, and concentrated in vacuo. The resulting crude ethyl ester compound is then hydrolyzed to the free acid by the procedure set forth in Example 22. [M+Na]* =720.24. Example 60. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N W is \ , Q = absent, Y = 3-chloro-4-methoxyphenyl, j =3, m = s = 1, and R=
R
4 = H. The title compound was prepared with the title compound of Example 21 and methyl iodide according to the procedure set forth in Example 59. [M+Na]* =680.23. Example 61-. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N W is \N , Q = absent, Y = 3-chloro-4-ethoxypheny, j = 3, m = s 1, and R =
R
4 =H. The title compound was prepared with the title compound of Example 21 and ethyl iodide according to the procedure set forth in Example 59. [M+Na]* =694.28. Example 62. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N=N N' N Q3 W is , Q = absent, Y = 3-bromo-4-ethoxyphenyl, i = 3, m = s = 1, and R =
R
4 = H. The title compound was prepared with the ethyl ester precursor to the title compound of Example 23 and ethyl iodide according to the procedure set forth in Example 59. [M+Na]* =740.17. Example 63. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N N Y W is \ Q, Q = absent, Y = 3-chloro-4-(2-hydroxyethoxy)phenyl, i =3, m s = 1. and R= R 4 = H. 151 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 The title compound is prepared with the title .compound from Example 21 and 2 iodoethanol according to the procedure set forth in Example 59. Example 64. Compound of Formula 1i, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N-N W is N , Q = absent, Y = 3-bromo-4-(2-hydroxyethoxy)phenyl, j =3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R4= H. The title compound was prepared with the ethyl ester precursor to the title compound of Example 23 and 2-iodoethanol according to the procedure set forth in Example 59. [M+Na]* =754.27. ) Example 65. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N=N N Q W is % ,-Q = absent, Y =3-chloro-4-(-allyl)phenyl, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3
R
4 = H. The title compound was prepared with the title compound from Example 21 and 3-iodopropene according to the procedure set forth in Example 59. 5 [M+Na]* =706.24. Example 66. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G OH, L = absent, N=N W is N , Q = absent, Y = 3-bromo-4-(O-allyl)phenyl, i = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R=H.' The title compound was -prepared with the ethyl ester precursor to the title ) compound of Example 23 and 3-iodopropene according to the procedure set forth in Example 59. [M+Na]*=752.15. Example 67. Compound of Formula I1, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N=N W is NN Q = absent, Y = 3-chloro-4-(O-CHSCH 3 )phenyl, i =3, m = s = 1, and 5 S= R= H. The title compound is prepared with the title compound from Example 21 and
CI-CH
2
SCH
3 according to the procedure set forth in Example 59. 152 Example 68. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = N-N N Q absent, W is , Q = absent, Y = 3-bromo-4-(O-CH SCH 3 )phenyl, j = 3, m= s = 1, and R 3
R
4 H. The title compound was prepared with the ethyl ester precursor to the title 5 compound of Example 23 and Cl-CH 2
SCH
3 according to the procedure set forth in Example 59. [M+Na]*=752.15. Example 69. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH L = N-N absent, W is \ N wherein Q' = -CH 2 -, Y =3, m = s = 1, 10 andR 3
=R
4 = H. N=N I % OH A CN B 1. MsCI, DIEA, CH 2 Cl 2 NaN 3 , tOlUeneEt 3 N HCI ._N Me 2.KCN, DMF, 810 0 C Bc 4 .AM 115 'C, overnight Bo.- e2 CN M,8 C Boc.-N OMe o- e 0 69c 0I 69a 69b N-Nc Br g N N NN 1. K 2 C0 3 , CH 3 CN 70 IC, overnight 0o 2 H 2. LiOtI, 'IHF-McOH-11 2 0 O0 N N CO2Et 0 N 0" D H 1. PI, HATU, DMF, DIEA 2. 4 N HCI, C H 2
C
2 -dioxane N=N 3. P 3 , HATU, DMF, DIEA NNN N N Boc'NyOH BcN O 0 H L -NB COIEt 0 69g69 69A. Preparation of Cyano Proline Derivative (69b) To a solution of cis-4-hydroxy-pyrrolidine- 1 ,2-dicarboxylic acid 1 -tert-butyl ester 2-methyl ester (69a) (3.94 g, 16.06 mmol) in CH 2 Cl 2 (40 ml) at 0 'C was DIBA I5 (4.3 ml) and methanesulfonyl chloride (1.40 ml) dropwise. After addition, the mixture was stirred for 1.5 hours. The reaction was complete as determined by TLC analysis (50% EtOAc-hexane was used to develop the TLC). The mixture was diluted with EtOAc, washed with sat. NaHC1 3 , brine and dried (Na 2
S.
4 ). After evaporation of the 153 solvents, the oil residue was used for next step without further purification. [M+H] = 324. The crude product from the previous step was dissolved in DMF(35 ml) and grounded KCN (2.5 g) was added. The mixture was heated at 90 C overnight. After 5 cooled to room temperature, the mixture was diluted with EtOAc, washed with H 2 0 and brine, and dried over Na 2
SO
4 . The crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (20% EtOAc/hexane). [M+H]*= 255. 10 69B. Preparation of Tetrazolyl Proline Derivative (69c) To a solution of nitrile 69b (669 mg, 2.63 mmol) in toluene (8 ml) was added NaN 3 (684 mg, 10.53 mmol) and Et 3 NeHCl (1.45 g, 10.53 mmol). The mixture was heated at 115 "C for 18 hrs. The mixture was diluted with CH 2 C1 2 , washed with 5% citric acid aqueous solution and dried over Na 2
SO
4 . Evaporation of solvent afforded the 15 crude product 69ceEt 3 N additive (660 mg).
[M+H]
t = 298. 69C. Preparation of the 5-Biphenylmethyl-tetrazolyl Proline (69d and 69e) To a solution of 69c (92.8 mg, 0.31 mmol) in THF (2 ml) was added 4 phenylbenzyl bromide (90.4 mg, 0.37 mmol) and K 2 C0 3 (140 mg, 1.01 mmol). The 20 mixture was heated at 65 *C overnight and then diluted with EtOAc, washed with brine, dried over Na 2
SO
4 . After evaporation of the solvent, the crude products was dissolved in THF-MeOH-H 2 0 (2 ml:lml:lml) and LiOH (130 mg) was added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. THF and MeOH were evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in EtOAc, washed with 5% citric acid and dried 25 with Na 2
SO
4 . Evaporation of solvent afforded the crude product 69d and 69e. [M+Boc+H]*.= 350. 69D. Preparation of the Tripeptide (69g) To a solution of 69d and 69e (about 0.31 mmol) in DMF (2.0 ml) was added D p-vinyl cyclopropane amino acid ethyl estereHCl (66 mg), DIEA (0.25 ml) and HATU 30 (164 mg), sequentially. The mixture was stirred for 1 hr and then was diluted with EtOAc, washed with brine, 5% citric acid and dried with Na 2
SO
4 . After evaporation of solvent, the residue was dissolved in 2 ml of CH 2
C
2 , 2 ml of 4 N HCl in dioxane was added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1.5 hr. solvent was evaporated. 154 The residue was dissolved in EtOAc, neutralized with sat. NaHCO 3 , washed with brine and dried with Na 2
SO
4 . After evaporation of solvent, the residue was dissolved in DMF (2 ml), to which P3 (120 mg), DIEA and HATU were added sequentially. The resulting mixture was stirred and monitored by TLC analysis. After the reaction was complete, the 5 mixture was diluted with EtOAc, washed with brine, 5% citric acid, sat. NaHCO 3 , and brine again. The organic solution was dried with Na 2
SO
4 , and evaporated under vacuum to give the crude product mixture which was purified by silica gel chromatography (30% to 50% EtOAc-Hexane). [M+H]*= 740. 10 69E. Rina-Closing Metathesis (69h and 69i). E N-N / 69f Hoveyda's catalyst / N 69g CH2CI2, 43 *C, over night ' NEN S " N CO2Eto N CO 2 Et 69h 69i F F LiOH, THF-MeOH-H 2 0 jLiOH THF-MeOH-H 2 0 N-N \ H N N N02 It. - o I N 0 1 C 2 / O N N 69j 69k The mixture of 69f and 69g (60 mg) was dissolved in dry CH 2 Cl 2 to make the concentration about 0.01 molar. The solution was carefully degassed with N 2 stream for 15 min. 5% mol of Hoveyda's catalyst was added under N 2 . The mixture was refluxed 15 overnight. Solvent was evaporated. The residue was loaded on silica gel column and eluted with 10% EtOAc to remove the catalyst. The two regioisomers were separated by elution with 30-40% EtOAc-hexane to give a less polar product 69j (37.9 mg) and more 155 polar product 69k (14.8 mg). The regiochemistry of 69j and 69k were determined by NMR analysis. [M+H]*= 712. 69F. Ethyl Ester Hydrolysis (69j) 5 The ester 69h (37.9 mg) was dissolved in THF-MeOH-H 2 0 (2 ml:1ml:1ml) and LiOH (21 mg) was added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. THF and MeOH were evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in EtOAc, washed with 5% citric acid and dried with Na 2
SO
4 . Evaporation of solvent afforded the crude product. The crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography 10 (5%MeOH in CH 2 Cl 2 ) to give the title compound 69j. [M+H]*= 684. Example 70. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L N-=N N N Y absent, W is - , wherein O = -CH , Y = =3, m = s = 1, and R = R 4 = H. 15 The ester 69i (14.8 mg) was dissolved in THF-MeOH-H 2 0 (2 ml:1ml:1ml) and LiOH (21 mg) was added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. THF and MeOH were evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in EtOAc, washed with 5% citric acid and dried with Na 2
SO
4 . Evaporation of solvent afforded the crude product. The crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography 20 (5%MeOH in CH 2 Cl 2 ) to give title compound 69k. [M+H]*= 684. Example 71. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = -(C=O)-O-R', wherein N-N R = cyclopentyl, G = OH, L = absent, W is \N Q , Q = absent, Y = phenyl, j 3, m= s= 1, and R 3 = = H. 25 71a - Amine deprotection. 0.041mmol of the title compound of Example 4i is dissolved in 4ml of a 4M solution of HCl in dioxane and stirred for 1 hour. The reaction residue 71a is concentrated in vacuo. 156 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 71b - Chloroformate Reagent The chloroformate reagent 71b is prepared by dissolving 0.045mmol of cyclopentanol in THF (3ml) and adding 0.09mmol of phosgene in toluene (20%). The resulting reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for 2 hours and the solvent is 5 removed in vacuo. To the residue is added DCM and subsequently concentrated to dryness twice in vacuo yielding chloroformate reagent 71 b. 71c - Carbamate formation The title carbamate is prepared by dissolving residue 71a in Iml of THF, adding 0.045mmol of TEA, and cooling the resulting reaction mixture to 0*C. To this 0*C 0 reaction mixture is added chloroformate reagent 71b in 3ml of THF. The resulting reaction mixture is reacted for 2 hours at 0*C, extracted with EtOAc, washed by I M sodium bicarbonate, water and brine, dried over MgSO 4 , and concentrated in vacuo to dryness. The crude compound ig purified by silica cGlumn and the ethyl ester is subsequently hydrolyzed by procedure set forth in Example 22. 5 Example 72. Compound of Formula I1, wherein A = -(C=O)-O-R', wherein R' N-N cyclobutyl, G = OH, L = absent, W is V N , Q = absent, Y = phenyl, j = 3, m = s -1. and R 3 = R 4 = H. The title compound is prepared by the method described in Example 71 with the title- compound of Example 21 and cyclobutanol, followed by ethyl ester hydrolysis by 0 the procedure set forth in Example 22. Example 73. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = -(C=O)-O-Rl, wherein R' = N-N N Y cyclohexyl, G = OH, L = absent W is \ 'N Q , Q = absent, Y = phenyl, i = 3, m = s =1. and R 3 = R 4 = H. The title compound is prepared by the method described in Example 71 with the 5 title compound of Example 21 and cyclohexanol, followed by ethyl ester hydrolysis by the procedure set forth in Example 22. 157 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Example 74. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A -(C=O)-O-Rl, wherein R' = 0NN N=N G = OH, L = absent, W is ,Q = absent, Y = phenyl, i = 3, m =*s = 1, and R 3 = R = H. The title compound is prepared by the method described in Example 71 with the 5 title compound of Example 21 and (R)-3-hydroxytetrahydrofuran, followed by ethyl ester hydrolysis by the procedure set forth in Example 22. Example 75. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = -(C=O)-O-R', wherein R' N-N N O ,G = OH, L =-absent, W is , Q = absent, Y = phenyl, =3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R4 = H. The title cornpound is prepared by the method described in Example 71 with the title compound of Example 21 and (S)-3-hydroxytetrahydrofuran, followed by ethyl ester hydrolysis by the procedure set forth in Example 22. Example 76. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = -(C=O)-O-R', wherein R' = NN SN Y ,G =OH, L = absent, W is , Q = absent, Y = phenyl, j = 3, m s = 5 1, and R 3
=R
4 =H. The title compound is prepared by the method described in Example 71 with the title compound of Example 21 and OH, followed by ethyl ester hydrolysis by the procedure set forth in Example 22. Example 77. Compound of Formula 1l.. wherein A = -(C=O)-R'. wherein R' N-N N Y D cyclopentyi, G = OH, L = absent, W is , Q = absent, Y = phenyl, i = 3. m = s =1, and R 3 = R 4 = H. The title compound is prepared by dissolving 0.041mmol of the title compound from Example 21 in 4ml of a 4M solution of HCI in dioxane and stirring the reaction mixture for 1 hour. The reaction residue is concentrated in vacuo. To this residue, 4ml 5 of THF and 0.045mmol of TEA is added, the mixture is cooled to 0*C, to which is added 158 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 0.045mmol of the cyclopental acid chloride. The resulting reaction mixture is stirred for 2 hours at 0*C. The reaction mixture is then extracted with EtOAc, washed with 1M sodium bicarbonate, water and brine, dried over MgSO 4 and concentrated to dryness in vacuo. The crude compound is purified by silica column and the ethyl ester is subsequently hydrolyzed by the procedure set forth in Example 22. Example 78. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = -(C=O)-NH-R1, wherein R' N-N NY = cyclopentyl, G = OH, L = absent, W is \ , Q = absent. Y = phenyl, i = 3. m = s = 1, and R 3 = R 4 = H. The title compound is prepared by dissolving 0.041mmol of the title compound ) from Example 21 in 4ml of a 4M solution of HCI in dioxane and stirring for 1 hour. The resulting reaction residue is concentrated in vacuo, dissolved in 4ml THF, and cooled to 0*C. To the 0*G solution is added 0.045mmol of cyelopentyl isocyanate and the resulting reaction mixture is stirred at RT for 4 hours. The solution is then extracted with EtOAc, washed with 1% HCI, water and brine, dried over MgSO 4 , and concentrated in vacuo to dryness. The crude compound is purified by silica column and the ethyl ester is subsequently hydrolyzed by the procedure set forth in Example 22. Example 79. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = -(C=S)-NH-R', wherein R' N-N -N,. , , Y = cyclopentyl, G = OH, L = absent, W is.\ N Q , Q = absent, Y = phenyl, i = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R 4 = H. The title compound is prepared by dissolving 0.041mmol of the title compound from Example 21 in 4ml of a 4M solution of HCI in dioxane and stirring for 1 hour. The resulting reaction residue is concentrated in vacuo, dissolved in 4ml. THF, and cooled to 0*C. To the 0*C solution is added 0.045mmol of cyclopentyl isothiocyanate and the resulting reaction mixture is stirred at RT for 4 hours. The solution is then extracted with i EtOAc, washed with 1% HCI, water and brine, dried over MgSO 4 , and concentrated in vacuo to dryness. The crude compound is purified by silica column and the ethyl ester is subsequently hydrolyzed by the procedure set forth in Example 22. 159 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Example 80. Compound of Formula 1I, wherein A = -S(O);-R', wherein R' = N-N N 'Y cyclopentyl, G = OH, L = absent, W is Q , Q = absent, Y = phenyl, = 3, m = s -1, and R 3 = R 4 = H. The title compound is prepared by dissolving 0.041mmol of the title compound from Example 21 in 4ml of a 4M solution of HCI in dioxane and stirring for 1 hour. To the resulting concentrated reaction residue, which has been dissolved in 4ml THF, is added 0.045mmol of TEA, and cooled to 0*C. To the OoC solution is added 0.045mmol of cyclopentyl solfonyl chloride and the resulting reaction mixture is stirred at 0*C for 2 hours. The solution is then extracted with EtOAc, washed with 1 M sodium bicarbonate, water and brine, dried over MgSO 4 , and concentrated in vacuo to dryness. The crude compound is purified by silica column and the ethyl ester is subsequently hydrolyzed by the procedure set forth in Example 22. Example 81. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = -(C=O)-O-R', R N-N N Y cyclopentyl, G = -0-phenethyl, L = absent, W is , Q = absent, Y phenyl, =3, m=s=1, and R3=R4=H. Ni N PYBYOP N DMAP N N DIEA H DCM OH + H Y 0 71 81b The title compound is prepared by adding to a solution of the title compound of Example 71 and phenethyl alcohol 81a in 0.5 ml DCM, is added 1.2 eq. PyBrOP, 4eq. DIEA, and catalytic amount of DMAP at 00 C. The resulting reaction mixture is stirred for 1 hour at 0*C and then warmed to RT over a period of 4-12 hours. The reaction mixture is purified by silica gel flash chromatography using different ratios of hexanes:EtOAc as elution phase (9:1-45:1--3:1-1:1) to afford the title compound isolated phenethyl ester 81 b. 160 W02004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Other esters can be made using the same procedure. Example 82. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A -(C=O)-O-R'. R = N-N N Q cyclopentyl, G = -NH-phenethyl, L = absent, W is ,N Q = absent, Y = phenyi, j=3, m=s=1, and R3=R4=H. 2N EDC 0 H0DIEA0 0 * DMFH H OH + H2N H /82aH/ 71 82b The title compound is prepared by adding to a solution of the title compound of Example 71 and phenethylamine 82a (0.05 ml) in 0.5 ml 15MF, EDC (1.2 eq.) and DIEA (4eq.) at .00 C. The resulting reaction mixture is stirred at 1 hour. Subsequently, the reaction is warmed to RT over a period of 4-12 hours. The reaction mixture is purified by silica gel flash chromatography using different ratios of hexanes:EtOAc as elution phase (9:1-+5:1->3:1-1:1) to afford title compound phenethyl aide 82b. Other amides can be made using the same procedure. Example 83. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = -(C=O)-O-R'. R' - N-N N'Y cyclopentyl, G = -NHS(O) 2 -phenethyl, L = absent, W is \N , Q = absent. Y phenyl, i=3, m=s= 1, and R3=R4=H. OH+ H2N~ HH / 83a H / 71 83b The title compound is prepared by adding to a solution of the title compound of Example 71 and a-toluenesulfonamide 83a (10mg) in 0.5 ml DCM, is added 1.2 eq. 161 PyBrOP, 4eq. DIEA, and catalytic amount of DMAP at 00 C. The resulting reaction mixture is stirred for 1 hour and then allowed to warm to RT over a period of 4-12 hours. The reaction mixture is purified by silica gel flash chromatography using different ratios of hexanes:EtOAc as elution phase (9:1-+5:1-+3:1->1:1) to afford the 5 title compound sulfonamide 83b. Other sulfonamides can be made using the same procedure. Example 84. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = -(C=O)-O-R', R' = N-N N Y cyclopentyl, G = -(C=O)-OH, L = absent, W is , 0= absent, Y = phenyl, =3, m=s=1,andR 3
=R
4 =H. ) N (>H Q H 0 OH H H OH [0] 00 0 0 ), 02)H FIup' H HV 0/ dioxane H/ 10 71 84b The title compound is prepared by adding to a solution of the title compound of Example 71 in 0.5 ml THF, is added c-hydroxy-a-methyl-propionitrile (0.1 ml) and catalytic amount TFA at 0 0 C. The resulting reaction mixture is warmed from 00 C to RT over a period of 4-12 h followed by hydrolysis with concentrated hydrochloric acid 15 in dioxane. The reaction is then extracted with EtOAc, and washed with water and brine to yield c-hydroxy compound 84a in its crude form. The crude compound 84a undergoes a Dess-Martin oxidation in THF (0.5 ml), providing the a-carbonyl compound 84b in crude form. The crude 84b is purified by silica gel flash chromatography using different ratios of hexanes:EtOAc as elution phase 20 (9:1-+5:1->3:1->1:1) to afford the title compound isolated keto acid 84b. Example 85. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = -(C=O)-O-R', R' = N=N -N' Q cyclopentyl, G = -(C=0)-O-phenethyl, L = absent, W is , Q = absent, Y = phenl, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3
R
4 H. 162 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 The title compound is prepared with the title compound keto acid of Example 84 and phenethanol according to the procedure set forth in Example 81. Example 86. Compound of Formula 1I, wherein A = -(C=O)-O-R', R' = N-:N 1N 'Y cyclopentyl, G = -(C=O)-NH-phenethyl, L = absent, W is \ Q Q= absent, Y = phenyl, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3
R
4 = H. The title compound is prepared with the title compound keto acid of Example 84 and phenethyl amine according to the procedure set forth in Example 82. Example 87. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = -(C=O)-O-R', R 1 = N-N N Y cyclopentyl, G = -(C=O)-NH-S(O) 2 -benzvl, L = absent, W is \ Q , Q = absent, Y= phenyl, j =3, m =s= 1, and R 3 = R 4 = H. The title cornpound is prepared with the title compound keto acid of Example 84 and a-toluenesulfonamide according to the procedure set forth in Example 83. Example 88. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = N-N -(C=O)CHz-, W is \ , Q = absent, Y= phenyl, j 1, m s= 1, and R 3 H. 0 0 tBocNH OCH3 A tBocNH OCH3 >'~OcH 3
OCH-
3 ~OoHMg 88a 88b 88 88ac 0 tBocNH 88dI Synthesis of (2S)-N-Boc-amino-5-oxo-non-8-enoic acid 88A. The aforementioned amino acid is prepared by adding to a solution of monoallyl ester of malonic acid in dry THF under N 2 at -78*C, n-Bu 2 Mg dropwise over a 163 WO2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 period of 5min. The resulting suspension is then stirred at RT for 1 hour and evaporated to dryness. Solid Mg salt 88b, is dried under vacuum. Glutamic acid derivative 88a is first mixed with 1,1'-carbonyldiimidazole in anhydrous THF and the mixture is stirred at RT for 1 h to activate the free acid moiety. 5 Subsequently, the activated glutamic acid derivative is cannulated into a solution of Mg salt 88b and the reaction mixture obtained is stirred at RT for 16h. The mixture then is diluted with ethyl acetate and the organic solution is washed with 0.5 N HCI (at 0*C) and brine, dried and evaporated. The residue obtained is resolved via silica chromatography with a 35-40% ethyl acetate in hexanes eluent system to yield diester ) 88c. 88B. To a stirred solution of tetrakis (triphenylphosphine) PD (0) in dry DMF is added the diester in DMF. Thejrnixture is stirred at R-T for 3.5 hours. The DMF is evaporated under reduced pressure and the residue diluted with EtOAc. The EtOAc solution is washed with 0.5N 0*C HCI, brine, dried and evaporated. The residue is 5 chromatographed on silica gel using 15% to 20% EtOAc in hexane as eluent to afford the methyl ester intermediate. The methyl ester intermediate is then diluted with THF and water, LiOH.H 2 0 is added and the resulting mixture is stirred at RT for 25 hours, wherein the completion of the hydrolysis is monitored by TLC. The reaction mixture is concentrated under ) vacuum to remove a majority of the THF and further diluted with methylene chloride. The resulting solution is washed with 1 N. HCI, dried with anhydrous Na 2
SO
4 and concentrated under vacuum. To remove minor impurities and excess Boc 2 O, the crude product is purified via flash chromatography using a solvent gradient from 100% hexane + 100% EtOAc as the eluent. (2S)-N-Boc-amino-5-oxo-non-8-enoic acid 88d is 5 obtained. For further details of the preceding amino acid synthesis may be found in T. Tsuda et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc., 1980, 102, 6381-6384 and WO 00/59929, which are. herein incorporated by reference in their entirety. 88C. Synthesis of modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate 164 The modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate is prepared using the synthetic route detailed in Example 1 using (2S)-N-Boc-amino-5-oxo-non-8-enoic acid 88d in place of Boc-L-2-amino-8-nonenoic acid la followed by conversion to the corresponding mesylate via the method described in Example 2. 5 The title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 88C and 5-phenyl-1H-tetrazole by the replacement method elucidated in Example 21 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 22. Example 89. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = N-N 10 -CH(CH )CH-, W is , Q = absent, Y =phenyl, = m = s =1, R 3 = methyl, and R 4 = H. CHs CH,
C
3 A N H Ac
H
3 C 0 ON H 3 C CO AcHN COO 8 cO
CH
3 89CH 3 89cC 89a COOH 89b
CH
3 C CH 3 H HAc F HA COOEt 3 C COO OH COO3 D 89e C 3 89d
CH
3 NHAc E CH 3 F CH 3 N' 4H Ac - . HtBoc 0 CO~t,-COOEt COOH 89f 89g 89h Synthesis of (2S, 5R)-N-Boc-2-amino-5-methyl-non-8-enoic acid (89h). 89A. To solid ethyl 2-acetamidomalonate 89b is added (R)-(+)-citronellal 15 89a in a solution of pyridine over 1 min. The resulting solution is cooled in a 10 C bath and acetic anhydride is added over 4 min. The resulting solution is stirred for 3 h at RT and another portion of ethyl 2-acetamidomalonate 89b is added. The resulting mixture is stirred at RT for an additional 11 hours. Ice is then added and the solution is stirred for 1.5 hours, then the mixture is diluted with 250 ml water and extracted with two 20 portions of ether. The organic phase is washed with IN HCl, sat. NaHCO 3 , dried 165 Na 2
SO
4 , concentrated and purified by flash chromatography (40% EtOAc/hexane) to afford compound 89c. 89B. To a degassed solution of 89c in dry ethanol is added (S,S)-Et PUPHOS Rh(COD)OTf. The mixture is subjected to 30 psi of hydrogen and stirred on a 5 Parr shaker for 2 hours. The resulting mixture is evaporated to dryness to obtain the crude compound 89d, which is used in the subsequent step without purification. 89C. Compound 89d is dissolved in a mixture of tBuOH/acetone/H 2 0 (1:1:1) and placed in an ice bath (0 0 C). NMMO and OS04 is consecutively added and the reaction mixture is stirred at RT for 4 hours. A majority of the acetone is removed 10 by evaporation under vacuum and then the mixture is extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic layer is further washed with water and brine, dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 and evaporated to dryness. The diol 89e is obtained in high purity after flash column chromatography using 1% ethanol in ethyl acetate as the eluent. 89D. To a solution of diol 89e in THF/H 2 0 (1:1) at 0"C, NaIO 4 is added and 15 the reaction mixture is stirred at RT for 3.5 hours. A majority of the THF solvent is subsequently removed by evaporation under vacuum and the remaining mixture is extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic layers is further washed with 5% aqueous citric acid solution, 5% aq. NaHC0 3 and brine, then the organic phase is dried over MgSO 4 and evaporated to dryness under vacuum. Aldehyde intermediate 89f is used in 20 the following step in its crude form. 89E. To a solution of Ph 3
PCH
3 Br in anhydrous toluene, KHMDS is added forming a suspension which is stirred at RT for 30 min. under N 2 . After stirring, the suspension is cooled to 0*C, a solution of aldehyde intermediate 89f in THF is added, the mixture is warmed to RT, and stirred for 1 hour. A majority of the THF is evaporated 25 under vacuum, EtOAc is added to the mixture and the organic phase is washed with water, 5% aq. NaHCO 3 and brine. The organic phase is then dried over MgSO 4 and evaporated to dryness under vacuum. Pure compound 89g is isolated after purification via flash chromatography on silica gel, using hexane:EtOAc (3:2) as the eluent. 89F. To a solution of crude 89g in THF, Boc 2 0, and DMAP is added and 30 the reaction mixture is heated to reflux for 2.5 hours. Subsequently, a majority of the THF is evaporated, the crude mixture is diluted with methylene chloride and washed with I N 166 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 HCI to remove DMAP. The organic layer is further extracted with saturated aq. NaHCO 3 , dried with anyhrous Na 2
SO
4 and concentrated under vacuum. The crude product is then diluted with THF and water, LiOH.H 2 Ois added and the resulting mixture is stirred at RT for 25 hours, wherein the completion of the hydrolysis is monitored by TLC. The reaction mixture is concentrated under vacuum to remove a majority of the THF and further diluted with methylene chloride. The resulting solution is washed with I N HCI, dried with anhydrous Na 2
SO
4 and concentrated under vacuum. To remove minor impurities and excess Boc 2 O, the crude product is purified via flash chromatography using a solvent gradient from 100% hexane -> 100% EtOAc as the eluent. (2S, 5R)-N-Boc-2-amino-5-methyl-non-8-enoic acid 89h is obtained. For further details of. the preceding amino acid synthesis see WO 00/59929, which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety. 89G. Synthesis of modified cVclic peptide precursor mesylate The modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate is prepared using the synthetic route detailed in Example I using ((2S, 5R)-N-Boc-2-amino-5-methyl-non-8 enoic acid 89h in place of Boc-L-2-amino-8-nonenoic acid I a followed by conversion to the corresponding mesylate via the method described in Example 2. The title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 89G and 5-phenyl-1 H-tetrazole by the replacement method ) elucidated in Example 21 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 22. Example 90. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = -O-. W is N-N Q = absent, Y = phenyl, j = 0, m = s-= 1. R 3 = methyl, and R 4 = hydro-gen. OHO A OH 0 O O O A_ OH O 3OH NHtBoc NHtBoc NHtBoc NHtBoc 90a 90b 90C 90d Synthesis of N - Boc-O-allyl-(L)-threonine (90d) 167 ,WO 2004/0722.4311 11 PCT/US2004/003479 90A. Boc-(L)-threonine 90a is partially dissolved in methylene chloride/methanol at 0*C. A solution of diazomethane in diethyl ether is added until yellow, indicating the presence of diazomethane. Upon evaporation of the solvents, crude methyl ester 90b is obtained. 5 90B. Intermediate 90b is dissolved in anhydrous diethyl ether, Ag 2 O is added and freshly activated 4A molecular sieves. Finally, allyl iodide is added to'the reaction mixture and is stirred at reflux. Two additional portions of allyl iodide are added to the reaction mixture after a period of 20 hours and 30 hours and stirring is continued for a total of 36 hours. The mixture is then filtered through celite and purified by flash 3 chromatography on silica gel, using EtOAc/hexane (1:4) as the eluent, to afford compound 90c. 90C. Compound 90c is dissolved in a mixture of THF/MeOH/H 2 0 (2:1:1) and LiOH.H 2 0 is added. The solutions stirred at RT for 2h, and the is acidified with I N HCI to pH -3 before the solvents are removed under vacuum. The resulting crude 5 compound 90d is obtained. For further details of the preceding amino acid synthesis see WO 00/59929, which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety. 90D. Synthesis of modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate The modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate is prepared using the synthetic route detailed in Example I using N- Boc-O-allyl-(L)-threonine 90d in place of Boc-L-2 3 amino-8-nonenoic acid Ia followed by conversion to the corresponding mesylate via the method described in Example 2. The title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 90D and 5-phenyl-1 H-tetrazole by the replacement method elucidated in Example 21 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set 5 forth in Example 22. Example 91. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = -S-, W is --N N'Y , Q = absent, Y = phenyl, i =0, m = s = 1, Ra = methyl, and R 4 = hydrogen. 168 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 0 0 0 tBocHN OH A tBocHN O B iBocHN HO CH 3 0 CH 3
H
3 C S 91a O 91b O 91c C 0 o tBocHN JtOH D tBocHN O 91e 91d Synthesis of (2S, 3S)-N-Boc-2 amino-3(mercaptoallyl)butanoic acid (91e). 91A. Compound 91a is dissolved in pyridine and the solution is cooled to 00C in an ice bath, tosyl chloride is added in small portions and the reaction mixture is 5 partitioned between diethyl ether and H 2 0. The ether layer is further washed with 0.2 N HCI and brine, dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 , filtered and concentrated to dryness under vacuum. Purification of the crude material by flash chromatography on silica gel, using hexane/EtOAc (gradient from 8:2 to 7:3 ratio) as the eluent, led to isolation of tosyl derivative 91 b. D 91B. To a solution of tosyl derivative 91b in anhydrous DMF, potassium thioacetate is added and the reaction mixture is stirred at RT for 24 hours. A majority of the DMF is then evaporated under vacuum and the remaining mixture is partitioned between EtOAc and H 2 0. The aqueous layer is re-extracted with EtOAc, the combined organic layers are washed with brine, dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 and evaporated to 5 dryness. Purification of the crude material by flash chromatography on silica gel using hexane/EtOAc (4:1 ratio) as the eluent, affords thioester 91c. 91C. To a solution of thioester 91c is H 2 0/EtOH (3:5 ratio) and aqueous solution of 0.2M NaOH is added and the mixture is stirred at RT for 1.5 hours. Allyl iodide is then added and stirring is continued at RT for an additional 30 min. The reaction 0 mixture is concentrated to half of its original volume and then extracted with EtOAc. The aqueous layer is acidified to pH -3 with cold, aqueous 0.5N HCl and re-extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic layers are washed with brine, dried over anhydrous 169 MgSO 4 and evaporated to dryness under vacuum. The crude reaction mixture contains at least four products; all of the products are isolated after flash chromatography on silica gel, using hexane/EtOAc (gradient from 9:1 to 3:1). The desired product 91d is the least polar compound. 5 91D. A solution of compound 91d in MeOH/H 2 0 (3:1) is mixed with aqueous NaOH (0.3 N) for 24 hours at RT and for 1 hour at 40"C. The reaction mixture is acidified with cold aqueous 0.5 N HCl, the MeOH is removed under vacuum and the remaining aqueous mixture is extracted with EtOAc. The organic phase is dried over MgSO 4 and evaporated to dryness in order to obtain compound 91e. For further details 10 of the preceding amino acid synthesis see WO 00/59929, which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety. 91E. Synthesis of modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate The modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate is prepared using the synthetic route detailed in Example 1 using (2S, 3S)-N-Boc-2 amino-3(mercaptoallyl)butanoic 15 acid 91e in place of Boc-L-2-amino-8-nonenoic acid la followed by conversion to the corresponding mesylate via the method described in Example 2. The title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 91E and 5-phenyl-1H-tetrazole by the replacement method elucidated in Example 21 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set 20 forth in Example 22. Example 92. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = N-N -S(0)-, W is \ N 0 = absent, Y = phenyl, J = 2, m = s =1, R 3 =methyl, and =hydrogen. 0 tBocHN OH 25 Formation of modified amino acid H3C 92A. The modified amino acid is prepared by dissolving sodium metaperiodate (1.1 eq.) in water and cooled to 0 0 C in an ice bath followed by adding dropwise a 170 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 solution of compound 91d in dioxane. The resulting reaction mixture is stirred for one hour at 0*C and 4 hours at 40 0 C. The reaction mixture is concentrated, water is added, and the mixture is extracted with methylene chloride twice. The combined organic layers are washed with water, brine, dried with anhydrous MgSO 4 and concentrated in i vacuo. The methyl ester is then reduced via the method set forth in Example 91D to arrive upon the modified amino acid 92a. For further details of the preceding amino acid synthesis may be found in T. Tsuda et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc., 1980, 102, 6381 6384 and WO 00/59929, which are herein incorporated by reference in their entirety. 92B. Synthesis of modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate ) The modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate is prepared using the synthetic route detailed in Example 1 using the modified amino acid 92a in place of Boc-L-2 amino-8-nonenoic acid I a followed by conversion to the corresponding mesylate via the method described in Example 2. The title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor 5 mesylate formed in 92B and 5-phenyl-1 H-tetrazole by the replacement method elucidated in Example 21 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 22. Example 93. Compound of Formula i1, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = -S(0)2-, N-N W is N , Q = absent. Y =phenyl, j =2, m = s 1, R 3 = methyl, and R 4 H. 0 tBocHN (OH ) Formation of modified amino acid Hc(93a). 93A. The modified amino acid is prepared by dissolving sodium metaperiodate (1.1 eq.) in water and cooled to 0*C in an ice bath followed by adding dropwise a solution of compound 92d in dioxane. The resulting reaction mixture is stirred for one hour at 0*C and 4 hours at 40 0 C. The reaction mixture is concentrated, water is added, 5 and the mixture is extracted with methylene chloride twice. The combined organic layers are washed with water, brine, dried with anhydrous MgSO 4 and concentrated in vacuo. The methyl ester is then reduced via the method set forth in Example 91D to 171 arrive upon the modified amino acid 93a. For further details of the preceding amino acid synthesis may be found in T. Tsuda et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc., 1980, 102, 6381-6384 and WO 00/59929, which are herein incorporated by reference in their entirety. 93B. Synthesis of modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate 5 The modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate is prepared using the synthetic route detailed in Example 1 using the modified amino acid 93a in place of Boc-L-2 amino-8-nonenoic acid la followed by conversion to the corresponding mesylate via the method described in Example 2. The title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor 10 mesylate formed in 93B and 5-phenyl-1H-tetrazole by the replacement method elucidated in Example 21 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 22. Example 94. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = N-N ~ N Q' -SCH2CH 2 -, W is , O absent, Y = phenyl, j= 0, m= s =1, and R 3 = R 4 15 =CH 3 . SH A S
H
3 C , COOH 0 H 3 C , COOH
H
3 I H0
NH
2 H 3 C NHtBoc 94a 94b 94A. Synthesis of (S)-N-Boc-2-amino-3-methyl-3(1 -mercapto-4 butenyl)butanoic acid (94b) L-Penicillamine 94a is dissolved in DMF/DMSO (5:1), subsequently, 4-bromopentene 20 and CsOH*H 2 0 are added to the mixture and stirring is continued for an additional 12 hours. The DMF is subsequently removed in vacuo, the remaining mixture is diluted with 0.5 N HCl (at 0*C) to adjust the pH to -4-5 and then extracted with 2 portions of EtOAc. The organic phase is washed with brine (2x), dried over MgSO 4 and evaporated to dryness to afford the crude carboxylic acid 94a. For further details of the preceding 25 amino acid synthesis see WO 00/59929, which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety. 172 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 94B. Synthesis of modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate The modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate is prepared using the synthetic route detailed in Example 1 using the modified amino acid 94a in place of Boc-L-2 amino-8-nonenoic acid Ia followed by conversion to the corresponding mesylate via the 5 method described in Example 2. The title compound is prepared, with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 94B and 5-phenyl-1 H-tetrazole by the replacement method elucidated in Example 21 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 22. Example 95. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = N=N -CFCHr-, W is N I Q =aibsent, Y = phenyl, i =1, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R4 = H. Boc N>OMe Boc NY OMe BocN N)IOH AB 0" DAST F".- F" oDCM F 88d RT, 2-3 d F F 95a 95b 5 Synthesis of (2S)-N-Boc-amino-5-difluoro-non-8-enoic acid (95b). 95A. To a solution of the ketone compound 88d (0.30g, 1 mmol) in 5 ml DCM, DAST (Diethylaminosulfurtrifluoride, 0.2g, 1.2 eq) is added. The reaction is kept at RT over a period of 2-3 days. The solvent is evaporated and the residue is purified by silica gel flash chromatography using different ratios of hexanes:EtOAc as eluent ) (9:1-*5:1-+3:1-*1:1), providing the isolated methyl ester 95a. For further details concerning the preceding synthesis, see Tius, Marcus A et al., Tetrahedron, 1993, 49, 16; 3291-3304, which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety. 95B. Methyl ester 95a is dissolved in THF/MeOH/H 2 0 (2:1:1) and LiOH.H 2 0 is added. The solution is stirred at RT for 2hours, and is then acidifies with IN HCI to pH 173 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 3 before the solvents are removed in vacuo to afford the crude- (2S)-N-Boc-amino-5 difluoro-non-8-enoic acid 95b. 95C. Synthesis of modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate The modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate is prepared using the synthetic route detailed in Example 1 using crude (2S)-N-Boc-amino-5-difluoro-nonz8.-enoic acid 95b in place of Boc-L-2-amino-8-nonenoic acid 1a followed by conversion to the corresponding mesylate via the method described in Example 2. The title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 95C and 5-phenyl-11H-tetrazole by the replacement method elucidated in Example 21 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 22. Example 96. Compound of Formula 1I, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = -CFHCH-, W is \N , Q = absent, Y = phenyl, j =1, m = s=1, and R 3 = R4 = H. H 0 H 0 H 0 Boc N OMe A Bo Y Ome B Boc NAOMe AAT o HO H" 8 RT,2-3d F 96a 96b 0 HoNYK C Boc N-eOH H F 96c Synthesis of (2S)-N-Boc-amino-5-fluoro-non-8-enoic acid (96c). 96A. To a solution of the ketone compound 88d in 5 ml methanol, NaBH 4 (2.2 eq) is added. The reaction mixture is stirred at RT over a period of 2-6 hours, and then quenched by 1M ammonium chloride and extracted with EtOAc (30 ml). The solvent is ) evaporated and the crude hydroxy compound 96a is obtained. 174 96B. The hydroxy compound 96a is dissolved in 5 ml DCM to which DAST (0.2g, 1.2 eq) is added and stirred at -45 0 C for 1 hour. The reaction mixture is then warmed to RT and stirred over a period of 2-3 days. The solvent is evaporated and the residue is purified by silica gel flash chromatography using different ratios of 5 hexanes:EtOAc as eluent (9:1-+5:1--3:1-->1:1), providing the isolated monofluoro compound methyl ester 96b. For further details concerning this synthesis see Buist, Peter H et al., Tetrahedron Lett., 1987, 28, 3891-3894, which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety. 96C. Methyl ester 96b is dissolved in THF/MeOH/H 2 0 (2:1:1) and LiOH.H 2 0 10 is added. The solution is stirred at RT for 2 hours, and is then acidified with IN HCI to pH - 3 before the solvents are removed in vacuo to afford the crude (2S)-N-Boc-amino 5-difluoro-non-8-enoic acid 96c. 96D. Synthesis of modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate The modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate is prepared using the synthetic 15 route detailed in Example I using crude ( 2 S)-N-Boc-amino-5-monofluoro-non-8-enoic acid 96b in place of Boc-L-2-amino-8-nonenoic acid la followed by conversion to the corresponding mesylate via the method described in Example 2. The title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 96C and 5-phenyl-1H-tetrazole by the replacement method 20 elucidated in Example 21 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 22. Example 97. Compound of Formula III, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = N-N N' N Q " absent, W is ,QO = absent, Y = phenyl, =3, m = s = 1, and R 3 =
R
4 = H. 25 97A. The saturated cyclic peptide precursor mesylate is prepared by catalytic reduction of the mesylate cyclic peptide precursor 2 with Pd/C in MeOH in the presence of H 2 . The title compound is prepared with the saturated cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 97A and 5-phenyl-1H-tetrazole by the replacement method 175 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 elucidated in Example 21 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 22. The compounds of the present invention exhibit potent inhibitory properties against the HCV NS3 protease. The following examples elucidate assays in which the 5 compounds of the present invention were tested for anti-HCV effects. Example 98. Triazole Synthesis Exemplary triazole derivatives for use in preparing compounds of the invention may be prepared as set forth in the examples below. TMs-N3 X Xylene ) 140"C, H 98a 24-72h 98b Triazoles of the present invention may be prepared by reacting 4mmol of alkyne compound 98a, which is commercially available or made from procedures elucidated infra, and 8mmol of trimethylsilyl azide in 2ml of xylenes in a pressure tube for 24-72 hours at 140 0 C. The resulting reaction mixture was directly separated by silica column, 5 yielding triazole 98b in 30-90% yield. Example 99. Alykyne Synthesis 99A. Sonogashira Reaction Pd (II), 5% eq Cul TEA X-===- + -haldeMeCNX X- I + Y-halide il 12 h 99a halide = I, Br 98a ) Alkynes used in the present invention can be made by the Sonogashira reaction by reaction of a degassed solution of 4mmol of primary alkyne compound 99a, 4mmol of an aryl halide (Y-halide), and Imi of triethylamine and 10ml of acetonitrile with 140mg(O.2mmol) of PdCI 2 (PPh 3
)
2 and 19mg(0.1mmol) of Cul. The resulting reaction mixture is degassed and stirred for 5 minutes at RT. The reaction is then heated to i 90*C and stirred for 12 hours. Subsequently, the reaction mixture is concentrated in 176 vacuo and purified by silica column to afford the substituted alkyne 98a in a 60-90% yield. 99B. Synthesis of Alkynyl Amides R2' BOP/DIEA , R2- Y HO R/ DMF R9 5 99b 99c3 99d Additional alkynes used in the present invention can be made by reacting 1Ommol of alkynyl acid 99b, I1mmol of BOP, and 22mmol of DIEA in 15ml of DMF with 1 Immol of amine 99c and stirring at room temperature for 3 hours. The reaction mixture is then extracted by ethyl acetate (2x50m); washed with IM NaHCO 3 10 (2x30ml), water (2x30ml), 5% citric acid (2x50ml) and brine (2x3Oml); dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate; and concentrated in vacuo to afford alkyne 99d in a 90% yield. Example 100. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, W x N Y 15 is X H, Y =4-t-butylphenyl, j = 3, m =s =1, and R 3 = R 4 =H. Yx XN y Xylene N N + x = y -~ + I Boc Me 110 "C, 12 h Boc Me Bock Me 00a 100b 100c 100d The title compound was prepared by the following method: 2mmol (0.54g) of Boc 20 methyl ester azidoproline 100a and 2.5mmol of 4-tert-Butylphenylacetylene 100b were dissolved in 2ml of xylenes and stirred at 1 10*C for 12 hours. The resulting reaction mixture was directly separated by silica column to resolve isomers 100c and 100d, with a yield of 90%. 177 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 The title compound was then formed via the RCM procedure described in Example 1 using 100b in the place of hydroxyl proline, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the procedure described in Example 106. [M+Na] + = 671.72. 5 Example 101. Compound of Formula I1, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH" L absent; x
N
W is A ,X = 4-t-butylphenyl, Y =H, = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3
=R
4 =H. The title compound was prepared via RCM procedure described in Example I using 100c in the place of hydroxyl proline, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via ) the procedure described in Example 106. [M+H]* = 649.44. Example 102. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, x y W is . ,X and Y are taken together = phenyl, =3, m =s =1. and R=R 4 =H. OMs +CS 2
CO
3 S DMF ++ Boc Me N NH 70 *C, 12 h 102a 102b Boc BO 5 102e 102d The triazole-substituted proline corresponding to the title compound was prepared by dissolving 1.5mmol(O.5g) of hydroxyproline mesylate 102a and 4.5 mmol of benzotriazole 102b in 5ml of DMF, adding 9mmol(2.9g) of cesium carbonate and stirring the resulting reaction mixture at 70 0 C for 12 hours. The reaction mixture was extracted ) with EtOAc, washed with I M sodium bicarbonate and brine. The organic layer was dried over MgSO 4 and concentrated in vacuo. Expected isomers 102c and 102d were resolved via silica column chromatography. 178 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 The title compound was then formed via Athe RCM procedure described in Example 1 using 102d in the place of hydroxyl proline, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the procedure described in Example 106. [M+Na]* = 588.46. Example 103. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC,. G = OH. L absent, X Y N, W is A , X and Y taken together = phenyl, j =3. m = s = 1, and R 3
R
4 = H. The title compound was formed via the RCM procedure described in Example I using 102c in the place of hydroxyl proline, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the procedure described in Example 106. [M+Na]* = 588.50. Example 104. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH. L = absent, X Y N ,NN Wis L ,X=Y=phenyl, i=3, m=s=1, and R 3 =R4=H. The triazole-substituted proline corresponding to the title compound was prepared by dissolving 1.5mmol(0.5g) of hydroxyproline mesylate 102a and 4.5 mmol of benzotriazole 102b in 5ml of DMF, adding 9mmol(2.9g) of cesium carbonate and stirring the resulting reaction mixture at 70 0 C for 12 hours. The reaction mixture was extracted with EtOAc, washed with 1 M sodium bicarbonate and brine. The organic layer was dried over MgSO 4 and concentrated in vacuo. The title compound was then formed via the RCM procedure described in Example 1 using the triazole-substituted proline of the present example in the place of hydroxyl proline, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the procedure described in Example 106. [M+Na]* = 690.42. 179 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Example 105. Compound of Formula 1i, wherein A = tBOC, G = OEt, L = absent, x Y N'N,N NNN W is A ,X=Y=phenyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R 3 = R 4 = H. x y OMs H triazole H > Et CszCO 3 Et Boc '' DMF Boc., H 95% H_ 2 105 The title compound was prepared by dissolving 0.041 mmol of the title compound i of Example 2 and,0.123mmol of 4,5 -diphenyltriazole in 3ml of DMF, adding 0.246mmol of cesium carbonate (80mg), and reacting at 700C for 12 hours. The reaction mixture was then extracted with EtOAc and washed with 1M sodium bicarbonate (2x30ml) and water (2x30m). The resulting organic solution was concentrated in vacuo to dryness. ) Example 106. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH. L = absent, x Y N, Wis -L X=-Y=phenylj=3,m=s=1,andR 3
=R
4 =H. The title compound was prepared by dissolving 0.041mmol of the title compound of Example 105 in 3ml of dioxane, adding 2ml of 1M LiOH, and reacting at RT for 8 hours. Subsequently, the pH of reaction mixture was adjusted to 3 with citric acid, 5 extracted with EtOAc, followed by washing with brine and water. The organic solution was concentrated in vacuo for purification by HPLC. [M+Na]* = 690.42. 180 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Example 107. Compound of Formula 1I, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, x N, Y W is , X=Y= Phenyl, j= 3 m= s =1, and R 3
=R
4 =H.
O
2 - . Xylene a
.
BocMe -110 *C,12 hBoMe BocMe BH 100a 107a 107b - The triazole-substituted proline precursor of the title compound was prepared by dissolving 0.93mmol (0.25g) of azidoproline 100a and 1mmol of diphenyl acetylene in 2ml of xylenes, heated to 1 10*C, 5hd stirred for 12 hours. The reaction mixture was directly separated by silica column to afford 0.27g of 107a (90%). [M+H]+: 449.05. 0.26g of 107b was obtained by the hydrolysis procedure elucidated in Example 105 (99%). The title compound was then formed via the RCM procedure described in Example I using 107b in the place of hydroxyl proline. [M+Na]* = 691.99. Example 108. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, x Y N W is i, ,X=n-propyl,Y=phenyl, o=3, m =s= 1. and RR 4 = H. 108a Triazole Formation The 4-(n-propyl)-5-phenyltrazole was prepared Via the procedure of Example 98 using n-propyl phenylacetylene and sodium azide. 181 The title compound was prepared with the title compound of Example 2 and 4 (n-propyl)-5-phenyltriazole 108a according to the procedure set forth in Example 105 and subsequent hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the procedure of Example 106. [M+Na]* = 657.99. 5 Example 109. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, W is X Y N, X = m-methoxyphenyl Y = p-methoxyphenyl, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R4= H. 109a Alkyne Formation The 2-(m-methoxyphenyl)-4-methoxyphenylacetylene was prepared via the 10 procedure of Example 99A from 4-methoxyphenylacetylene and 3-bromoanisole. 109b Triazole Formation The 4-(m-methoxyphenyl)-5-(p-methoxyphenyl)triazole was prepared via the procedure of Example 3 using alkyne 109a and sodium azide. 15 The title compound was prepared with the title compound of Example 2 and the 4-(m-methoxyphenyl)-5-(p-methoxyphenyl)triazole 109b according to the procedure set forth in Example 105 and subsequent hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the procedure of Example 106. 20 [M+Na]* = 752.08. Example 110. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, W is X Y N NN , X = m-bromophenyl Y = p-methoxyphenyl, J = 3, m = s = 1, and R = R 4 = H. 110a Alkyne Formation 25 The 2-(m-bromophenyl)-4-methoxyphenylacetylene was prepared via the procedure of Example 99A from 4-methoxyphenylacetylene and 3-iodo-5 bromobenzene. 110b Triazole Formation 182 The 4-(m-bromophenyl)-5-(p-methoxyphenyl)triazole was prepared via the procedure of Example 3 using alkyne 110a and sodium azide. The title compound was prepared with the title compound of Example 2 and the 5 4-(m-bromophenyl)-5-(p-methoxyphenyl)triazole 110b according to the procedure set forth in Example 105 and subsequent hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the procedure of Example 106. [M+Na]* = 800.05. lo Example 111. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, W is X Y N NN X = 1-naphthyl, Y = p-methoxyphenyl,j 3, m= s = 1, and R 3 = R 4 H. 111a Alkyne Formation The 2-(1-naphthyl)-4-methoxyphenylacetylene was prepared via the procedure of Example 99A from I -iodonapthelene and 4-methoxyphenylacetylene. 15 111b Triazole Formation The 4-(1 -naphthyl)-5-(p-methoxyphenyl)triazole was prepared via the procedure of Example 3 using 2 -(1-naphthyl)-4-methoxyphenylacetylene 111a and sodium azide. 20 The title compound was prepared with the title compound of Example 2 and the 4-(1-naphthyl)-5-(p-methoxyphenyl)triazole 111b according to the procedure set forth in Example 105 and subsequent hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the procedure of Example 106. [M+Na]* = 772.11. 25 Example 112. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH. L absent, W is X Y N NN X = 2-thienyl, Y = p-methoxyphenyl, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = = H. 112a Alkyne Formation 183 The 2-(2-thienyl)-4-methoxyphenylacetylene was prepared via the procedure of Example 99A from 2-iodo-thiophene and 4-methoxyphenylacetylene. 112b Triazole Formation 5 The 4-(2-thienyl)-5-(p-methoxyphenyl)triazole was prepared via the procedure of Example 3 using 2-(2-thienyl)-4-methoxyphenylacetylene 112a and sodium azide. The title compound was prepared with the title compound of Example 2 and the 10 4-(2-thienyl)-5-(p-methoxyphenyl)triazole 112b according to the procedure set forth in Example 105 and subsequent hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the procedure of Example 106. [M+H]* = 705.31. 15 Example 113. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH. L = absent, W is X Y N,NN X = 3-thienyl, Y = p-methoxyphenylj= 3, m = s = 1, and R 3
R
4 = H. 113a Alkyne Formation The 2-(3-thienyl)-4-methoxyphenylacetylene was prepared via the procedure of Example 99a from 2-iodo-thiophene and 4-methoxyphenylacetylene. 20 113b Triazole Formation The 4-(3-thienyl)-5-(p-methoxyphenyl)triazole was prepared via the procedure of Example 3 using 2-(3-thienyl)-4-methoxyphenylacetylene 113a and sodium azide. 25 The title compound was prepared with the title compound of Example 2 and the 4 -(3-thienyl)-5-(p-methoxyphenyl)triazole 113b according to the procedure set forth in Example 105 and subsequent hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the procedure of Example 106. 30 [M+Na]* = 727.21. 184 Example 114. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, W is X Y N,NN , X = 4-pyrazolyl, Y = p-methoxyphenyl, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = = H. 114a Alkyne Formation The 2-(4-pyrazolyl)-4-methoxyphenylacetylene was prepared via the 5 procedure of Example 99A from 4-iodopyrazole and 4-methoxyphenylacetylene. 114b Triazole Formation The 4-(4-pyrazolyl)-5-(p-methoxyphenyl)triazole was prepared via the procedure of Example 3 using 2-(4-pyrazolyl)-4-methoxyphenylacetylene 114a and 10 sodium azide. The title compound was prepared with the title compound of Example 2 and the 4-(4-pyrazolyl)-5-(p-methoxyphenyl)triazole 114b according to the procedure set forth in Example 105 and subsequent hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the procedure of 15 Example 106. [M+H]* = 700.82. Example 115. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = tBOC G = OH, L = absent, W is X Y N,NN X = 3-pyridyl, Y = p-methoxyphenyl, j= 3, m= s = 1, and R 3 = R 4 H. 20 115a Alkyne Formation The 2 -(3-pyridyl)-4-methoxyphenylacetylene was prepared via the procedure of Example 99A from 3-iodopyridine and 4-methoxyphenylacetylene. 115b Triazole Formation 25 The 4 -(3-pyridyl)-5-(p-methoxyphenyl)triazole was prepared via the procedure of Example 3 using 2-(3-pyridyl)-4-methoxyphenylacetylene 115a and sodium azide. 185 The title compound was prepared with the title compound of Example 2 and the 4-(3-pyridyl)-5-(p-methoxyphenyl)triazole 115b according to the procedure set forth in Example 105 and subsequent hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the procedure of Example 106. 5 [M+H]* = 700.36. Example 116. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, W is X Y N,NN SX= 2-pridyl, Y = p-methoxyphenyl, j= 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R 4 = H. 116a Alkyne Formation 10 The 2-(2-pyridyl)-4-methoxyphenylacetylene was prepared via the procedure of Example 99A from 2-iodopyridine and 4-methoxyphenylacetylene. 116b Triazole Formation The 4-(2-pyridyl)-5-(p-methoxyphenyl)triazole was prepared via the 15 procedure of Example 3 using 2-(2-pyridyl)-4-methoxyphenylacetylene 116a and sodium azide. The title compound was prepared with the title compound of Example 2 and the 4-(2-pyridyl)-5-(p-methoxyphenyl)triazole 116b according to the procedure set forth in 20 Example 105 and subsequent hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the procedure of Example 106. [M+H]* = 700.82. Example 117. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, W is X Y N,NN 25 L , X = 2-thiazolyl, Y = p-methoxyphenyl, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = = H. 186 A Pd (11), 5%eq CuI reflux, 12 h 117a 117b 117c 117A. Alkyne Formation The alkyne of the current example, 2-(2-thiazolyl)-4-methoxyphenylacetylene was prepared by adding to a degassed solution of 4mmol of 4-ethynylanisole, 4mmol of 5 2-bromothiazole, and Iml of triethylamine in 10ml of acetonitrile,140mg(0.2mmol) of PdCl 2 (PPh 3
)
2 and 19mg(O.1mmol) of Cul. The mixture was degassed and stirred for 5 minutes at RT and heated to 90'C for 12 hours. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo and purified by silica column to afford 0.61g of brown liquid in a 70% yield. [M+H]+: 216.17, 1INMR (CDC1 3 , 500MHz) 67.765(d, J=3Hz, 1H), 10 7.472-7.455(m, 2H), 7.277 (d, J=3.5Hz, 1H), 6.837-6.820 (in, 2H), 3.768 (s, 3H). e/N + TMS-N3 Xylene am. 140 0 C,48h N N .N 117c H 117d 117B. Triazole Formation 15 The 4-(2-thiazolyl)-5-(p-methoxyphenyl) triazole 117d was prepared by adding to a pressure tube 0.3g of 117c, 0.74ml of trimethylsilyl azide, and 4ml of xylenes and heating the mixture to 140*C for 48 hours. The reaction mixture was directly separated by silica column to afford a brown liquid (117d) after purification (0.18g, 50%). [M+H]+: 259.27, 1HNMR (DMSO-d 6 , 500MHz) 8 8.016(d, J=8.5Hz, 2H), 20 7.929(d, J=3Hz, 1H), 7.817(d, J=3Hz, 1H), 7.066(d, J=8.5Hz, 2H), 3.824(s, 31-). 187 N OMs N H / OEt + Cs'COb H BocNN'. O NN DMF OEt H Boc-, 0. H H 2 117d 117e 117e. Ethyl Ester 117e was prepared by dissolving 0.041mmol of mesylate of macrocyclic precursor 117d and 0.123mmol of 117d in 3ml of DMF, adding 0.246mmol cesium carbonate, and reacting at 70*C for 12 hours. The reaction mixture was extracted 5 with EtOAc, washed with 1M sodium bicarbonate (2x30ml) and water (2x30ml), and concentrated in vacuo to obtain ethyl ester 117e. [M+H]+: 734.34 Preparation of title compound 10 N N N NN LiOH/Dioxane H H OEt OH Boc,, O0 - Boc, O4,4 H /H 117e 117 Hydrolysis of ethyl ester 117e was achieved by dissolving 117e in 3ml of dioxane, adding 2ml of IM LiOH, and stirring the resulting reaction mixture at RT for 8 hours. 15 The pH of the reaction mixture was adjusted to 3 with citric acid; then the reaction mixture was extracted with EtOAc, and washed with brine and water. The organic 188 solution was concentrated in vacuo for purification by HPLC which afforded a yellow powder after lyophilization (10mg, yield 34%). [M+H]+: 706.33, 1HNMR (DMSO-d 6 , 500MHz) 8 12.283 (s, broad, 1H), 8.750 5 (s, broad, 1H), 8.014 (d, J=9Hz, 2H), 7.938 (d, J=3.5Hz, 1H), 7.852 (d, J=3.5Hz, 1H), 6.997 (d, J=8Hz, 2H), 6.927 (d, J=7, 1H), 5.555 (s, broad, 1H), 5.499 (m, 1H), 5.298 (t, J=18Hz and 9Hz, 1H), 4.643 (t, J=16 Hz and 8Hz, 1H), 4.558 (d, J=1 1.5Hz, 1H), 4.125~4.093 (m, 2H), 3.802 (s, 3H), 2.890-2.847 (m, IH), 2.542-2.497(m, 2H), 2.123-2.106 (m, 1H), 1.806(s, broad, 1H), 1.701-1.663(m, lH), 1.519(s, broad, 1H), 10 1.460~1.435(m, 1H), 1.314~1.074(m, 16H). Example 118. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, W is X Y N, ,X=benzyl, Y=phenyl, j=3, m= s= 1, and R 3 = R 4 =H. 15 118a Alkyne Formation The 2-(benzyl)-2-benzylphenylacetylene was prepared via the procedure of Example 11 7A from 4-iodobenzene and 3-phenyl-propyne. 118b Triazole Formation 20 The 4-benzyl-5-phenyltriazole was prepared via the procedure of Example 3 using 2-benzyl-1-phenylacetylene 118a and sodium azide. The title compound was prepared with the title compound of Example 2 and the 4-benzyl-5-phenyltriazole 118b according to the procedure set forth in Example 105 25 and subsequent hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the procedure of Example 106. [M+H]* = 700.82. Example 119. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, W is X Y N, NN , X=n-butyl, Y=phenyl, j=3,m=s= 1, and R 3
=R
4 =H. 189 119a Triazole Formation The 4-(n-butyl)-5-phenyl triazole was prepared via the procedure of Example 3 using n-butyl- 1 -phenylacetylene and sodium azide. 5 The title compound was prepared with the title compound of Example 2 and the 4-(n-butyl)-5-phenyl triazole 119a according to the procedure set forth in Example 105 and subsequent hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the procedure of Example 106. [M+H]* = 649.44. 10 Example 120. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, W is X Y N,NN A , X = n-propyl, Y =n-propyl,= 3, m = s = 1, and R 3
R
4 =H. 120a Triazole Formation 190 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 The 4,5-(n-propyl)triazole was prepared via the procedure of- Example 3 using 4-octyne and sodium azide. The title compound was prepared with the title compound of Example 2 and the 4,5-(n-propyl)triazole 120a according to the procedure set forth in Example 105 and subsequent hydrolysis of the etiyl ester via the procedure of Example 106 [M+H]* = 601.46. Example 121. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, x Y N W is A , X = 4-(N,N-dimethylamino)phenyl, Y = phenyl, j =3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = -H. A B Br 2 , TEA Br Br H H 121n 121b Et H C 121c KFCs 2
CO
3 DME OH)2 Bc.% - \/ D H H / HBoc,,H E 121e 121d 191 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 pd I11~(~A IlIP tipsubstituted phenyl triazole 121b was prepared by dissolving 1mmol of 121a (Triazole 121a was prepared by the method set forth in Example 2 using commercial phenyl acetylene and sodium azide) in 16ml 1:15 MeOH/CHC 3 , adding.0.28mi of TEA, and in a dropwise manner adding 0.128ml of bromine. The resulting reaction mixture was stirred for 2 hours. To the reaction mixture was added cold 10% Na 2
S
2 0 5 until the the mixture turned colorless. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc, washed with brine and water, dried over Na 2
SO
4 , and concentrated in vacuo to afford 0.216g of 121b after purification by silica column (97%). [M+H]+: 224.19. 121B. Mesylate replacement. 0.2g of 121c was prepared via the procedure elucidated in Example 3 from purified 121b and the title compound from Example 2. [M+Na]+: 721.00. 121C. Suzuki Coupling. Ethyl ester 121d was prepared by dissolving 0.07mmol (50mg) of 121c in 3ml of DME and adding to this solution 0.21mmol (35mg) of 4 dimethylaminophenyl boric acid, 137mg of cesium carbonate, and 100mg of KF. To the subsequently degassed reaction mixture was added 5mg of Pd(PPh 3
)
4 . The resulting reaction mixture was heated to 90*C and stirred for 12 hours. The reaction mixture then was extracted with EtOAc, washed with brine and water, dried over Na 2
SO
4 , concentrated in vacuo, and purified by silica column to afford 40mg (78% yield) of 121d. 121D. Ethyl Ester Hydrolysis. 12mg of 121e was made via the procedure set forth in 106 from 121d after purification by HPLC (30%). [M+H]+: 712.33. Example 122. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, x Y - , N ON N W is A , X = (N,N-diethylamino)methyl, Y = phenyl, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = H. 122a Triazole Formation 192 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 p g: ifthI . tN.bMidbWethyl)-5-phenyltriazole was prepared via the procedure of Example 3 using 3-diethylamino-1-phenylpropyne and sodium azide. The title compound was prepared with .the title compound of Example 2 and the 4-(N,N-diethylaminomethyl)-5-phenyltriazole 122a according to the procedure set forth in Example 105 and subsequent hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the procedure of Example 106. [M+H]* = 678.44. Example 123. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, X Y N% N W is -~ , X = NN-diethylaminocarbonyl, Y = phenyl, i = 3, m = s = 1. and R 3 = = H. 123A. Alkyne Formation BOP/DIEA H+ NH DMF 123a Alkyne 123a was prepared by dissolving 10mmol of phenylpropynoic acid, 11mmol of BOP, and 22mmol of DIEA in 15ml of DMF and to which was added 11mmol of diethylamine. The resulting reaction mixture was then stirred at RT for 3 hours. The reaction mixture was extracted with EtOAc (2x50ml), washed with 1M NaHCO3 (2x30ml), water .(2x30ml), 5% citric acid (2x50ml), and brine (2x30ml). The organic extract was dried over anhydrous Na 2
SO
4 and concentrated in vacuo to afford 1.8g (90%) of 123a [M+H]+: 202.09. 123B. Triazole Formation The 4-(N,N-diethylaminocarbonyl)-5-phenyltriazole 123b was prepared via the procedure of Example 3 using 123a and sodium azide. The title compound was prepared with the title compound of Example 2 and the 4-(N,N-diethylaminocarbonyl)-5-phenyltriazole 123b according to the procedure set 193 forth in Example 105 and subsequent hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the procedure of Example 106. [M+H]+: 692.47. 5 Example 124. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, W is X Y N,NN A , X = m-chlorophenyl, Y = 4-ethoxyphenyl, J= 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = = H. 124a Alkyne Formation The 2-(m-chlorophenyl)-4-ethoxyphenylacetylene was prepared via the procedure of Example 99 from 3-chloro-bromobenzene and 4-ethoxyphenylacetylene. 10 124b Triazole Formation The 4-(m-chlorophenyl)-5-(p-ethoxyphenyl)triazole was prepared via the procedure of Example 3 using 2-(m-chlorophenyl)-4-ethoxyphenylacetylene 124a and sodium azide. 15 The title compound was prepared with the title compound of Example 2 and the 4-(m-chlorophenyl)-5-(p-ethoxyphenyl)triazole 124b according to the procedure set forth in Example 105 and subsequent hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the procedure of Example 106. 20 [M+H]* = 747.37. Example 125. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH. L = absent, W is X Y N,NN , X = 2-phenylethenyl, Y = phenyl, j=3, m = s = 1, and R 3
=R
4 =H. The title compound was prepared with by the Suzuki reaction described in 25 Example 121 from 121c and phenylethenylboronic acid and subsequent hydrolysis by the procedure described in Example 106. [M+H]* = 695.30. 194 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Example 126. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, W is 5,6-methylbenzotriazole, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R = H. The title compound was prepared with the title compound of Example 2 and the 5,6-methylbenzotriazole according to the procedure set forth in Example 105 and subsequent hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the procedure of Example 106. [M+H]* = 595.42. Example 127. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, x Y N N N W is -L , X = N-ethylaminocarbonyl, Y = phenyl, j =3. m = s = 1, and R 3 = R 4 = H. 127a. Alkyne Formation NH2 BOP/DIEA H + DMF H 127a Alkyne 127a was prepared by dissolving 10mmol of phenylpropynoic acid, 11mmol of BOP, and 22mmol of DIEA in 15mI of DMF and to which was added 11mmol of ethylamine. The resulting reaction mizture was then stirred at RT for 3 hours. The reaction mixture was extracted with EtOAc (2x50ml), washed with 1M NaHCO3 (2x30ml), water (2x30ml), 5% citric acid (2x50ml), and brine (2x30ml). The organic extract was dried over anhydrous Na 2
SO
4 and concentrated in vacuo to afford 1.8g (90%) of 127a. [M+H]+: 177.09. 127b Triazole Formation The 4-(N-ethylaminocarbonyl)-5-phenytriazole was prepared via the procedure of Example 3 using 127a and sodium azide. The title compound was prepared with the title compound of Example 2 and the 4-(N-ethylaminocarbony)-5-phenyltriazole 127b according to the procedure set forth in Example 105 and subsequent hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the procedure of Example 106. 195 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Example 128. Compound of Formula 1I, wherein A = -(C=0)-O-Rl, wherein R' = x Y NN, cyclopentyl, G = OH. L = absent, W is A , X = phenyl, Y = phenyl, i = 3, m = s = 1. and R 3 = R 4 = H. 128a - Amine deprotection. 0.041 mmol of the title compound of Example 105 is dissolved in 4ml of a 4M solution of HCI in dioxane and stirred for 1 hour. The reaction residue 128a is concentrated in vacuo. 128b - Chloroformate Reagent The chloroformate reagent 128b is prepared by dissolving 0.045mmol of cyclopentanol in THF (3m) and adding 0.09mmol of phosgene in toluene (20%). The resulting reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for 2 hours and the solvent is removed in vacuo. To the residue is added DCM and subsequently concentrated to dryness twice in vacuo yielding chloroformate reagent 128b. 128c - Carbamate formation The title carbamate is prepared by dissolving residue 128a in 1 ml of THF, adding 0.045mmol of TEA, and cooling the resulting reaction mixture to 0*C. To this 0*C reaction mixture is added chloroformate reagent 128b in 3ml of THF. The resulting reaction mixture is reacted for 2 hours at 0*C, extracted with EtOAc, washed by 1M sodium bicarbonate, water and brine, dried over MgSO 4 , and concentrated in vacuo to dryness. The crude compound is purified by silica column and the ethyl ester is subsequently hydrolyzed by the procedure set forth in Example 106. 196 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 ExarfibIe126.0 ii68S Ebrri"db rrmula 11, wherein A = -(C=O)-O-R', wherein R' = x Y NN,N cyclobutyl, G = OH. L = absent, W is A , X = phenyl, Y = phenyl, i = 3, m = s = 1. and R 3 = R4 = H. The title compound is prepared by the method described in Example 33 with the title compound of Example 105 and cyclobutanol, followed by ethyl ester hydrolysis by the procedure set forth in Example 106. Example 130. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = -(C=O)-O-R, wherein R' = x Y N,NN cyclohexyl, G = OH, L = absent, W is - , X = phenyl, Y = phenyl, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R 4 = H. The title compound is prepared by the method in Example 33 with the title compound of Example 105 and cyclohexanol, followed by ethyl ester hydrolysis by the procedure set forth in Example 106. Example 131. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = -(C=0)-O-R', wherein R = x Y 0 N, N , G = OH, L = absent, W is A ,X = phenyl, Y = phenyl, i = 3, m = s = 1, andR 3
R
4 = H. The title compound is prepared by the method described in Example 33 with the title compound of Example 105 and (R)-3-hydroxytetrahydrofuran, followed by ethyl ester hydrolysis by the procedure set forth in Example 106. 197 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 ExampIC13~2/ UI o16fn~ddrid bfl6nula 11, wherein A = -(C=O)-O-R', wherein R' = X Y
N,NIN
,G =01H, L_=absentWis , X=phenyl,Y= phenyl, j =3, m=s= 1, and R 3 = R= H. The title compound is prepared by the method in Example 33 with the title compound of Example 105 and (S)-3-hydroxytetrahydrofuran, followed by ethyl ester hydrolysis by the procedure set forth in Example 106. Example 133. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = -(C=O)-O-Rl, wherein R' = x Y , G = OH, L = absent, W is ,X= phenyl, Y = phenyl, =3. m = s = 1, and R 3 = R4= H. The title compound is prepared by the method in Example 33 with the title 0 compound of Example 105 and oH, followed by ethyl ester hydrolysis by the procedure set forth in Example 106. Example 134. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = -(C=O)-R', wherein R' = x Y N cyclopentyl, G = OH, L = absent, W is A , X = phenyl, Y = phenyl, j = 3, m = s = 1. and R 3 = R 4 = H. The title compound is prepared by dissolving 0.041mmol of the title compound from Example 105 in 4ml of a 4M solution of HCI in dioxane and stirring the reaction mixture for 1 hour. The reaction residue is concentrated in vacuo. To this residue, 4ml of THF and 0.045mmol of TEA is added, the mixture is cooled to 0*C, to which is added 0.045mmol of the cyclopental acid chloride. The resulting reaction mixture is stirred for 2 hours at 0*C. The reaction mixture is then extracted with EtOAc, washed with 1M sodium bicarbonate, water and brine, dried over MgSO 4 and concentrated to dryness in 198 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 vacu pa: Tfh l rBo rnmfd. iqhurified by silica column and the ethyl ester is subsequently hydrolyzed by the procedure set forth in Example 106. Example. 135. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = -(C=O)-NH-R', wherein R' x Y N, =cyclopentyl, G = OH, L = absent, W is . , X = phenyl, Y = phenyl, i = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = = H. The title compound is prepared by dissolving 0.041 mmol of the title compound from Example 105 in 4ml of a 4M solution of HCI in dioxane and stirring for 1 hour. The resulting reaction residue is concentrated in vacuo, dissolved in 4ml THF, and cooled to 0*C. To the 0*C solution is added 0.045mmol of cyclopentyl isocyanate and the resulting reaction mixture is stirred at RT for 4 hours. The solution is then extracted with EtOAc, washed with 1% HCI, water and brine, dried over MgSO 4 , and concentrated in vacuo to dryness. The crude compound is purified by silica column and the ethyl ester is subsequently hydrolyzed by the procedure set forth in Example 106. Example 136. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = -(C=S)-NH-R', wherein R' x Y NN'N =cyclopentyl, G = OH, L = absent, W is - , X = phenyl, Y = phenyl, i = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R = H. The title compound is prepared by dissolving 0.041mmol of the title compound from Example 105 in 4ml of a 4M solution of HCI in dioxane and stirring for 1 hour. The resulting reaction residue is concentrated in vacuo, dissolved in 4ml THF, and cooled to 0*C. To the 0*C solution is added 0.045mmol of cyclopentyl isothiocyanate and the resulting reaction mixture is stirred at RT for 4 hours. The solution is then extracted with EtOAc, washed with 1% HCl, water and brine, dried over MgSO 4 , and concentrated in vacuo to dryness. The crude compound is purified by silica column and the ethyl ester is subsequently hydrolyzed by the procedure set forth in Example 106. 199 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Exarrnld1N IUI !~ II h-,b6drid rmula 11, wherein A = -S(O) 2 rRl, wherein R' = x Y N, cyclopentyl, G = OH, L = absent, W is AL , X = phenyl, Y = phenyl, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R 4 = H. The title compound is prepared by dissolving 0.041mmol of the title compound from Example 105 in 4ml of a 4M solution of HCI in dioxane and stirring for 1 hour. To the resulting concentrated reaction residue, which has been dissolved in 4ml THF, is added 0.045mmol of TEA, and cooled to OoC. To the OOC solution is added 0.045mmol of cyclopentyl solfonyl chloride and the resulting reaction mixture is stirred at 0*C for 2 hours. The solution is then extracted with EtOAc, washed with I M sodium bicarbonate, water and brine, dried over MgSO 4 , and concentrated in vacuo to dryness. The crude compound is purified by silica column and the ethyl ester is subsequently hydrolyzed by the procedure set forth in Example 106. Example 138. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = -(C=O}-O-R', R' = x Y N,NN cyclopentyl, G = -O-phenethyl, L = absent, W is J , X = phenyl, Y = phenyl, i = 3, m= s =1, and R3= R4 = H. PyBiOP V DMA? N DIEA O H + HO NH _0 DCM H' H H/138a H /')F 128 138b The title compound is prepared by adding to a solution of the title compound of Example 128 and phenethyl alcohol 138a in 0.5 ml DCM, is added 1.2 eq. PyBrOP, 4eq. DIEA, and catalytic amount of DMAP at 0"C. The resulting reaction mixture is stirred for 1 hour at 0*C and then warmed to RT over a period of 4-12 hours. The 200 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 react~ hietAlI if6 @iii6 gel flash chromatography using different ratios of hexanes:EtOAc as elution phase (9:1-+5:1->3:1-+1:1) to afford the title compound isolated phenethyl ester 138b. Other esters can be made using the same procedures. Example 139. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = -(C=O)-O-R', R = x Y N, cyclopentyl, G = -NH-phenethyl, L = absent, W is L , X = phenyl, Y = phenyl, i 3, m = s = 1. and R3 = R4 = H. EDC 'o DIEAH DMF OH + H H H / 3aH / 128 139b The title compound is prepared by adding to a solution of the title compound of Example 128 and phenethylamine 139a (0.05 ml) in 0.5 ml DMF, EDC (1.2 eq.) and DIEA (4eq.) at 0*C. The resulting reaction mixture is stirred at 1 hour. Subsequently, the reaction is warmed to RT over a period of 4-12 hours. The reaction mixture is purified by silica gel flash chromatography using different ratios of hexanes:EtOAc as elution phase (9:1->5:1-+3:1-1:1) to afford title compound phenethyl amide 139b. Other amides can be made using the same procedures. Example 140. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = -(C=O)-O-R', R= x Y N, cyclopentyl, G = -NHS(O) 7-phenethyl, L = absent, W is .i X = phenyl, Y = phenyl. j=3. m=s=1,andR3=R4=H. 201 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 PyBiOP DMAP H 0 ~DJEAH0 u H2W HH +H2 H Y/ 139aH/ 128 139b The title compound is prepared by adding to a solution of the title compound of Example 128 and a-toluenesulfonamide 140a (10mg) in 0.5 ml DCM, is added 1.2 eq. PyBrOP, 4eq. DIEA, and catalytic amount of DMAP at 0*C. The resulting reaction mixture is stirred for 1 hour and then allowed to warm to RT over a period of 4-12 hours. The reaction mixture is purified by silica gel flash chromatography using different ratios of hexanes:EtOAc as elution phase (9:1->5:1->3:1-+1:1) to afford the title compound sulfonamide 140b. Other sulfonamides can be made using the same procedure. Example 141. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = -(C=O)-O-R', R' x Y N, cyclopentyl, G = -(C=O)-OH, L = absent, W is . X = phenyl, Y = phenyl, = 3, m = s = 1, and and R 3 = R 4 = H. H 2H N [H] OH H / 2) HC1 H) dioxaneH 128 141a 141b The title compound is prepared by adding to a solution of the title compound of Example 128 in 0.5 ml THF, is added a-hydroxy-a-methyl-propionitrile (0.1 ml) and catalytic amount TFA at 0*C. The resulting reaction mixture is warmed from 0*C to RT over a period of 4-12 h followed by hydrolysis with concentrated hydrochloric acid in dioxane. 202 The reaction is then extracted with EtOAc, and washed with water and brine to yield a hydroxy compound 141a in its crude form. The crude compound 141a undergoes a Dess-Martin oxidation in THF (0.5 ml), providing the a-carbonyl compound 141b in crude form. The crude 141b is purified by silica gel flash chromatography using 5 different ratios of hexanes:EtOAc as elution phase (9:1->5:1-+3:1-+1:1) to afford the title compound isolated keto acid 141b. Example 142. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = -(C=O)-O-R', R' = cyclopentyl, X Y N ,NN G = -(C=0)--phenethyl, L = absent, W is A X = phenyl, Y = phenyl, j = 3, m = 10 s= 1,andR 3
=R
4 =H. The title compound is prepared with the title compound keto acid of Example 141 and phenethanol according to the procedure set forth in Example 138. Example 143. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = -(C=O)-O-Rl, R' = cyclopentyl, X Y N, NN G = -(C=O)-NH-phenethyl, L = absent, W is X , = phenyl, Y = phenyl, j = 3, m 15 =s=1,andR 3
=R
4 =H. The title compound is prepared with the title compound keto acid of Example 141 and phenethyl amine according to the procedure set forth in Example 139. Example 144. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = -(C=O)-O-R', R' = cyclopentyl, X Y N,NN 20 G = -(C=O)-NH-S(O)9-benzyl, L = absent, W is A , X = phenyl, Y = phenyl j = 3, m=s=l1andR 3
=R
4 =H. The title compound is prepared with the title compound keto acid of Example 141 and a-toluenesulfonamide according to the procedure set forth in Example 140. 203 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 ExqmeI145mp j1iI o 0i60 1 'Formula 1I, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L_= x Y
N,NIN
-(C=O)CHz-, W is -L , X = phenyl, Y = phenyl,= 1, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R 4 = H. The title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in Example 88C and 4,5 -diphenyltriazole by the replacement method elucidated in Example 105 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 106. Example 146. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = x Y N,, N
-CH(CH
3
)CH
2 -, W is i , X = phenyl, Y = phenyl, j = 1, m = s = 1, R 3 = methyl, and
R
4 = H. The title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in Example 89G and 4,5 -diphenyltriazole by the replacement method elucidated in Example 105 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 106. Example 147. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = -0-, W is x Y N'N,N 4L ,X= phenyl, Y = phenyi, j =0, m =s = 1, R 3 = methyl, and R 4 = hydrogen. The title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in Example 90D and 4,5 -diphenyltriazole by the replacement method elucidated in Example 105 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 106. 204 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 IExt imM14liii i of! B"If'ormula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = -S-, W is x Y N, NIN , X = phenyl, Y = phenyl, j = 0, m = s = 1. R 3 = methyl, and R 4 = hydrogen. The title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in Example 91E and 4,5 -diphenyltriazole by the replacement method elucidated in Example 105 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 106. Example 149. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH. L = -S(O)-, x Y N,NN W is I , X = phenyl, Y = phenyl, j=2, m = s = 1. R 3 = methyl, and R 4 = hydrogen. The title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in Example 92B and 4,5 -diphenyltriazole by the replacement method elucidated in Example 105 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 106. Example 150. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = -S(O)2-, x Y N, W is i , X = phenyl, Y = phenyl, j=2. = s = 1, R3 methyl, and R 4 H. The title compound is prepared with the modified. cyclic peptide precursor ) mesylate formed in Example 93B and 4,5 -diphenyltriazole by the replacement method elucidated in Example 105 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 106. Example 151. Compound of Formula I1, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L x Y N
-SCH
2
CH
2 -, W is -L X =phenyl, Y = phenyl, i = 0, m = s = 1. and R 3
=R
4
=CH
3 . 205 SH A S
H
3 C COOH A H 3 C COOH NH2 NHtBoc 151a 151b 151A. Synthesis of (S)-N-Boc-2-amino-3-methyl-3(1-mercapto-4 butenyl)butanoic acid (151b) L-Penicillamine 151a is dissolved in DMF/DMSO (5:1), subsequently, 4 5 bromopentene and CsOHeH 2 0 are added to the mixture and stirring is continued for an additional 12 hours. The DMF is subsequently removed in vacuo, the remaining mixture is diluted with 0.5 N HCl (at 0 0 C) to adjust the pH to -4-5 and then extracted with 2 portions of EtOAc. The organic phase is washed with brine (2x), dried over MgSO 4 and evaporated to dryness to afford the crude carboxylic acid 151b. 10 151B. Synthesis of modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate The modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate is prepared using the synthetic route detailed in Example 1 using the modified amino acid 151b in place of Boc-L-2-amino-8 nonenoic acid la followed by conversion to the corresponding mesylate via the method 15 described in Example 2. The title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 151B and 4,5 -diphenyltriazole by the replacement method elucidated in Example 105 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in 20 Example 106. Example 152. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = CF 2 CHZ2W X Y N ,NN is L X=phenyl, Y=phenyl, j= 1, m=s= 1, and R 3
=R
4 =H. 206 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 pThp'tiWudr with the modified cyclic jieptide precursor mesylate formed in Example 95C and 4,5 -diphenyltriazole by the replacement method elucidated in Example 105 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 106. Example 153. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G ='OH, L = X Y NN -CHFCHz-, Wis AL , X = phenyl, Y = phenyl, =1, m = s = 1, and R=R 4 =H. The title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in Example 96C and 4,5 -diphenyltriazole by the replacement method elucidated in Example 105 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 106. Example 154. Compound of Formula IIl, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH. L = absent, x Y N,NN Wis i ,X=phenyl,Y=phenYl,J=3, m=s=1,andR 3
=R
4 =H. 154A. The saturated cyclic peptide precursor mesylate is prepared by catalytic reduction of the mesylate cyclic peptide precursor 2 with Pd/C in MeOH in the presence of H 2 . The title compound is prepared with the saturated cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 154A and 4,5 -diphenyltriazole by the replacement method elucidated in Example 105 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set -forth in Example 106. 207 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Exaippnlei 55.Ii(M Ii p0Jdh Fbrmula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G OH, L = absent,
H
3 C Br
H
3 C-~ N'N,N Wis_ . ,j=3, m=s=1,andR 3
=R
4 =H. 1 55A. Substituted benzotriazole formation B NH 2 Br H NaNO 2 , HOAc
NH
2 H20 I 155a 155b The bromo-substituted benzotriazole 155b of the present Example is prepared by combining 2.15g (10mmol) of 5-bromo-3, 4-dimethylbenzene-1,2-diamine, 1.15ml (20mmol) of glacial acetic acid, and 10ml of water and heating the resulting mixture to obtain a clear solution. The clear solution is then cooled to 5 0 C, a cold solution of 0.83g (12mmol) of sodium nitrite in 5ml of water is added, and the reaction mixture is heated to 70-80*C for 2 hours. The reaction mixture is then extracted with EtOAc, washed by brine and water, dried over Na 2
SO
4 , and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product is purified by silica column. 155B. Replacement r BV H C2CO 3 , DMFH 60b B MsH, Boc H is 2 The ethyl ester 155c is prepared by the replacement method described in Example 105 with the title compound of Example 2 and bromo-substituted benzotriazole 155b. 208 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 p Tijhbitli p prepared with ethyl ester 155c. by the hydrolysis procedure set forth in Example 106. Example 156. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, S
H
3 C
H
3 C N IN W is ,j=3, m=s=1.andR 3
=R
4 =H. 156A. Suzuki Reaction Pd(PPh,) 4 BocEt C5 2
CO
3 , KF, Et HH Compound 156a of the present Example is prepared via a Suzuki coupling reaction with 155c and 3-thienyl boronic acid as described in Example 26C. 156B. Hydrolysis The title compound is prepared with ethyl ester 156a by the hydrolysis procedure set forth in Example 106. Example 157. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, N N W is ~L ,J=3, m=s=1,andR=R 4 ==H. 157a. Bicyclic Compound Formation 209 The bicyclic compound of the present invention is prepared with 2,3-di aminopyridine by the procedure set forth in Example 157A. The title compound is prepared with the bicyclic compound prepared in 157a and the title compound of Example 2 by the replacement method described in Example 5 105, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the procedure set forth in Example 106. Example 158. Compound of Formula IV, wherein A = tBOC, G = OEt, L = absent, X = Y = bromo, Z = hydrogen, j = 3. m= s = 1, and R( = R 4 = hydrogen. 10 To a mixture of macrocyclic compound 1 (185 mg, 0.38 mmol), 4,5-dibromo 2H-pyridazin-3-one (95 mg, 0.38 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (197 mg, 0.75 mmol) in THF (5 mL) is added DIAD (148 pL, 0.75 mmol) dropwise at 0 0 C. After stirring at 0 0 C for 15 min, the solution is warmed to room temperature and is further stirred for 16 15 hours. The mixture is then concentrated in vacuo and the residue is purified by column chromatography eluting with 40% ethyl acetate-hexane to give 235 mg (86%) of the title compound. H-NMR (500 MHz, CDCl 3 ) 8 (ppm): 7.8 (s, 1H), 7.1 (brs, 1H), 5.5 (m, 2H), 5.2 (m, 2H), 5.0 (m, 1H), 4.4 (brt, 1H), 4.0-4.2 (m, 4H), 2.9 (m, 1H), 2.6 (m, 1H), 1.8-2.3 20 (m, 5H), 1.4 (s, 9H), 1.2 (t, 3H). [M+H]*= 730.6. Example 159. Compound of Formula IV, wherein A = tBOC, G = OEt, L = absent, X = Y = thiophen-3-vl, Z = hydrogen, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R4= hydrogen. 25 A mixture of the title compound of Example 158 (40 mg, 0.055 mmol), 3 thiophene boronic acid (35mg, 0.28 mmol), cesium carbonate (71 mg, 0.22 mmol), potassium fluoride monohydrate (41 mg, 0.44 mmol) is placed in a round bottom flask and is flushed twice with nitrogen. To this mixture is added DME and the resulting solution is flushed again with nitrogen before palladium tetrakis(triphenylphopshine) (7 30 mg, 10 mol%) is added. After flushing two more times with nitrogen, the mixture is heated to reflux for 20 hours. The mixture is then cooled and then diluted with water and extracted three times with EtOAc. The combined EtOAc layers are washed once with brine, dried (MgSO 4 ), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The residue is purified 210 by column chromatography eluting with 20-40% EtOAc-hexane to give the title compound as a clear film (24 mg, 60%). 'H-NMR (500 MHz, CDCl 3 ) 8 (ppm): 7.9 (s, 1H), 7.6 (s, 1H), 7.3 (s, 1H), 7.3 (m, 1H), 7.0 (s, 1H), 6.9 (d, 1H), 6.8 (d, 1H), 5.7 (m, 1H), 5.5 (m, IH), 5.4 (brd, 1H), 5.2 5 (t, 1H), 5.0 (m, 1H), 4.6 (brt, 1H), 4.0-4.2 (m, 4H), 2.9 (m, 1H), 2.6 (m, 1H), 2.0-2.3 (m, 5H), 1.4 (s, 9H), 1.2 (t, 3H). [M+Na]* = 758.63. Example 160. Compound of Formula IV, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, X = Y = thiophen-3-yl, Z = hydrogen, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = = hydrogen. 10 To a solution of the title compound in Example 159 (24 mg, 0.033 mmol) in THF/MeOH/H 2 0 (2/1/0.5 mL) is added lithium hydroxide (14 mg, 0.33 mmol). After stirring for 16 hours at room temperature, the mixture is acidified to pH 4 with citric acid and extracted three times with EtOAc. The combined organic extracts are washed once 15 with brine, dried (MgSO 4 ), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The residue is purified by column chromatography eluting with 5-10% methanol-chloroform to give the title compound (13 mg, 56%). [M+H]* = 708.3. 20 Example 161. Compound of Formula IV, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH. L = absent, X = Y = phenyl, Z = hydrogen, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R= hydrogen. The title compound is prepared by a double Suzuki coupling with phenylboronic acid and the title compound of Example 158 according to the procedure set forth in 25 Example 159, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method described in Example 160. [M+H] = 696.40 211 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Examip:6g., armpofneefFonula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G =H, L = absent, X = Y = 4-(NN-dimethylamino)phenyl, Z = hydrogen, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = = hydrogen. The title compound is prepared by a double Suzuki coupling with 4-(N,N dimethylamino)phenyl boronic acid and the title compound of Example 158 according to the procedure set forth in Example 159, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method described in Example 160. . [M+H]* = 782.30 Example 163. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, X = Y = -4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl, Z = hydrogen, j = 3. m = s = 1, and R 3 = R4= hydrogen. The title compound is prepared by a double Suzuki coupling with 4 (trifluoromethoxy)phenyl boronic acid and the title compound of Example 158 according to the procedure set forth in Example 159, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method described in Example 160. [M+H]* = 864.09 Example 164. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, X =_Y = 4-(methanesulfonyl)phenyl, Z = hydrogen, j = 3, m = s = 1. and R 3 = = hydrogen. The title compound is prepared by a double Suzuki coupling with 4 (methanesulfonyl)phenyl boronic acid and the title compound of Example 158 according to the procedure set forth in Example 159, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method described in Example 160. Example 165. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, X = Y = 4-(cyano)phenyl, Z = hydrogen, i = 3, m = s = 1. and R 3 = = hydrogen. 212 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 The title compound is prepared by a double Suzuki coupling using 4-cyanophenyl boronic acid and the title compound of Example 158 according to the procedure set forth in Example 159, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method described in Example 160. [M+H]* = 746.14 Example 166. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, X = Y = pyrid-3-yl, Z = hydrogen, i = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R4= hydrogen. The title compound is prepared by a double Suzuki coupling using 3-pyridyl boronic acid and the title compound of Example 158 according to the procedure set forth in Example 159, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method described in Example 160. [M+H]* = 698.3. Example 167. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, X = Y = 4-(morpholin-4-yl-methanonyl)phenyl, Z = hydrogen, j = 3, m = s = 1, and Ra = = hydrogen. The title compound is prepared by a double Suzuki coupling using 4 carboxyphenyl boronic acid and the title compound of Example 158 according to the procedure set forth in Example 159, followed by amide formation with morpholine, under standard amide bond formation conditions, e.g. PyBrOP, DIEA, and DMAP in DMF. The ethyl ester of the resulting compound is then hydrolyzed via the hydrolysis procedure of Example 160. Example 168. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, X = bromo, Y = methoxy, Z = hydrogen, j =3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = = hydrogen. 213 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 vTIm11itle igeg~ilad-ik10d from the title compound in Example 158 via hydrolysis of the ethyl ester according to the procedure described in Example 160, however addition of methoxy to the 5 position is observed in addition to hydrolysis of the ethyl ester. [M+H]* = 652.2, 654.2. Example 169. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, X and Y taken together = phenyl, Z = 4-methoxyphenyl, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = = hydrogen. The title compound is prepared according to the Mitsunobu conditions set forth in Scheme 20 with commercially available 4-(4-methoxy-phenyl)-2H-phthalazn-1 -one, and subsequent hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the procedure of Example 160. [M+H]* = 700.1. Example 170. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, X and Y taken together = phenyl, Z = 4-chlorophenyl, i = 3. m = s = 1, and R 3 = R4= hydrogen. The title compound is prepared according to the Mitsunobu conditions set forth in Scheme 20 with commercially available 4-(4-chloro-phenyl)-2H-phthalazin-1 -one, and subsequent hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the procedure of Example 160. [M+H]* = 704.2. Example 171. Compound of Formula 1I, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, X = 4-fluorophenyl, Y = hydrogen, Z = phenyl, i = 3, m = s = 1. and Ra = = hydrogen. The title compound is prepared according to the Mitsunobu conditions set forth in Scheme 20 with commercially available 4-(4-fluoro-phenyl)-6-phenyl-2H-pyridazin-3 one, and subsequent hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the procedure of Example 160. [M+H]* = 704.2. 214 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Example 172. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, X = hydrogen, Y = 1-piperidyl, Z = phenyl, i = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = Re= hydrogen. The title compound is prepared according to the Mitsunobu conditions set forth in Scheme 20 with commercially available 6-phenyl-5-piperidin-1-yl-2H-pyridazin-3-one, and subsequent hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the procedure of Example 160. [M+H]* = 702.3. Example 173. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OEt. L = absent, X = hydrogen, Y = bromo, Z = phenyl, j = 3, m =s= 1. and R 3 = = hydrogen. The title compound is prepared according to the Mitsunobu conditions set forth in Scheme 20 with commercially available 5-Bromo-6-phenyl-2H-pyridazin-3-one. [M+H]* = 726.3, 728.3. Example 174. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, X = hydrogen, Y = thiophen-3-yl, Z = phenyl, i =3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R4 = hydrogen. The title compound is prepared with the title. compound of Example 173 and thiophen-3-yl boronic acid according to the Suzuki coupling conditions described in Example 159, followed by the hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method described in Example 160. [M+H]* = 730.3 Example 175. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC. G = OEt, L = absent, X = bromo, Y = 1-pyrrolidyl, Z = hydrogen, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R= hydrogen. A mixture of the title compound in Example 158 (45 mg, 0.062 mmol), pyrrolidine (21 mL, 0.25 mmol), and potassium carbonate (34 mg, 0.25 mmol) in 2 mL of 215 acetonitrile is heated to reflux for 3 hours. After cooling to room temperature, the mixture is filtered through a sinter glass funnel and the filtrate is concentrated in vacuo. The residue is re-dissolved in ethyl acetate and then washed once with saturated sodium carbonate, once with brine, dried (MgSO 4 ), filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to 5 give a yellow residue which is chromatographed over silica gel eluting with 3% methanol-chloroform to give 37 mg (83%) of the title compound. [M+H]* = 719.2, 721.2. Example 176. Compound of Formula IV, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, X = 10 thiophen-3-yl, Y = 1-pyrrolidyl, Z = hydrogen, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R4= hydrogen. The title compound is prepared with the title compound in Example 175 and thiophen-3-yl boronic acid using the Suzuki conditions described in Example 159, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester according to the method set forth in Example 15 160. [M+H]* = 694.3. Example 177. Compound of Formula IV, wherein A = tBOC, G = OEt, L = absent, X = bromo, Y = azido, Z = hydrogen, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = = hydrogen. 20 A mixture of the title compound in Example 158 (45 mg, 0.062 mmol), sodium azide (16mg, 0.25 mmol), and potassium carbonate (34 mg, 0.25 mmol) in 2 mL of acetonitrile is heated to reflux for 3 hours. After cooling to room temperature, the mixture is filtered through a sinter glass funnel and the filtrate is concentrated in vacuo. 25 The residue is re-dissolved in ethyl acetate and then washed once with saturated sodium carbonate, once with brine, dried (MgSO 4 ), filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to give a yellow residue which is chromatographed over silica gel eluting with 3% methanol-chloroform to give 37 mg (83%) of the title compound. Example 178. Compound of Formula IV, wherein A = tBOC, G = OEt, L = 30 absent, X = thiophen-3-yl, Y = azido, Z = hydrogen, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = = hydrogen. 216 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 The title compound is prepared with the title compound in Example 177 and thiophen-3-yl boronic acid using the Suzuki conditions described in Example 159. Example 179. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, X = thiophen-3-yl, Y = azido, Z = hydrogen, =3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = = hydrogen. The title compound is prepared by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester of the title compound of Example 178 via the hydrolysis procedure of Example 160. Example 180. Compound of Formula 1I, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, X = thiophen-3-yI, Y = tetrazol-2-yl, Z = hydrogen, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = = hydrogen. To a solution of the title compound of Example 178 (2.63 mmol) in toluene (8 ml) is added KCN (10.53 mmol) and Et 3 N.HCI (10.53 mmol). The mixture is heated at 115 *C for 18 hrs, diluted with DCM, washed with 5% citric acid (aq), dried over anhydrous Na 2
SO
4 , and concentrated in vacuo to afford the ethyl ester of the title compound in crude form. Hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method described in Example 160 yields the title compound. Example 181. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, X = Y = mercapto-2-pryrimidine, Z = hydrogen, j =3, m = s 1, and R 3 = 4= hydrogen. Brr
K
2
CO
3 /ACN Nr H N H ' 0 bQ % S1a(46%)8b(19%) A mixture of the title compound in Example 158 (45 mg, 0.062 mmol), pyrimidine-2-thiol (0.25 mmol), and potassium carbonate (34 mg, 0.25 mmol) in 2 mL of 217 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 acAr d td hours. After cooling to room temperature, the mixture is filtered through a sinter glass funnel and the filtrate is concentrated in vacuo. The residue is re-dissolved in ethyl acetate arid then washed once with saturated sodium carbonate, once with brine, dried (MgSO4), filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to give a yellow residue which is chromatographed over silica gel eluting with 3% methanol-chloroform to afford 181b in a 19% yield. The ethyl ester of compound 181b is then hydrolyzed via the method described in Example 160 to give the title compound. [M+H]* = 764.3. Example 182. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH. L = absent, X = bromo, Y = mercapto-2-pryrimidine, Z = hydrogen, j = 3. m = s = 1, and R 3 = = hydrogen. The title compound is prepared by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester of compound 181a, formed in Example 181, via the method set forth in Example 160. [M+H]* = 732.2, 734.2. Example 183. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, X = thiophen-3-yl, Y = mercapto-2-pryrimidine, Z = hydrogen, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 R4= hydrogen. The title compound is prepared with compound 181a from Example 181 and thiophen-3-yl boronic acid according to the Suzuki coupling conditions set forth in Example 159, followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method described in Example 160. Example 184. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OEt. L = absent, X = Y = thiazol-2-yI, Z = hydrogen, j =3. m = s = 1. and R 3 = = hydrogen. To a degassed solution of the title compound of Example 158 (1 mmol) and thiazol-2-yl stannane (2 mmol) is added Pd(PPh 3
)
4 (10 mol%). The mixture is degassed 218 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 withnitrogren @ q i rpg ieated to 100 *C for 3 hour. The cooled mixture is concentrated under vacuum and the residue is purified by column chromatography eluting with 30% EtOAc/Hexane followed by the hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method of Example 160 to give the title compound. [M+H]* = 710.3. Example 185. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH. L = absent, X = Y = imidazol-1-yl, Z = hydrogen, i = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = Re = hydrogen. The title compound is prepared by adding to a dry mixture of the title compound from Example 158 (0.068 mmol), imidazole (2 eq.), Cs 2
CO
3 (3 eq.), Xantphos (30 mol %), and Pd(OAc) 2 under nitrogen dioxane. The reaction mixture is then degassed and stirred at 75 0 C for 18 hours. Upon completion of the reaction, monitored via TLC, the reaction mixture is diluted with DCM, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The reaction mixture is then purified via silica column chromatography with 5% MeOH/CHC 3 to afford the ethyl ester of the title compound. The ethyl ester is then hydrolyzed by the conditions set forth in Example 160 to afford the title compound. Example 186. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH. L = absent, X = 2-(cyclopropylamino)-thiazol-4-yi, Y = 4-methoxyphenyl, Z = hydrogen, j = 3, m = s = 1. and R 3 = R 4 = hydrogen. Formation of 4-(2-Cyclopropylamino-thiazol-4-yl)-5-(4-methoxy-phenvl)-2H pyridazin-3-one (186h) 219
N
0 N a A a B cl C D H BuaON~B Suuk KOH~n PhCH 2 Br N oxa N S
K
2 CO3- NI N H BPh4NBr Ph N ACN Ph Ph186d 186a 186b 186c Ph ~N (rf)2O E H G H2/Pd HN\ Pd(PPh 3
)
4 o N P NNN H P)N
(N)
3 KPh 186h 186186f 186e F 1. cyclopmpyl amine 2. Hexylnthyldiin Pd(PPh 3
)
4 D Br 186A. A mixture of commercially available 4,5-dichloropyridazin3(2H)-one (18 mmol), benzyl bromide (19 mmol), potassium carbonate (45 mmol), tetrabutylammonium bromide (1 mmol) and acetonitrile (45 nL) is stirred and heated 5 under reflux for 1h. After cooling, the solvent is evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue is purified by filtration on a small silica gel column eluting with 10% EtOAc/Hexane to give compound 186a as a white powder (81%). [M+H]*= 256.3. 186B. To a magnetically stirred solution of 186a (4.5 mmol) in dry dioxane (20 10 mL) is added 1.0 mL of 21 wt% solution of sodium methoxide at room temperature. After 1 hour, the mixture is poured into water/ethyl acetate and the organic layer is dried over MgSO 4 and concentrated to an oil. The oil residue is purified by column chromatography eluting with 10% EtOAc/Hex to give 85% of 186b. [M+H]* = 251.7. 15 Alternate substitution of pyridazinone 186a can be achieved via this step using MeOH rather than dioxane as a solvent, wherein the methoxy occupies the 5 position on the pyridazinone ring and the chloro resides at the 4 position. 220 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 I 81 q I *idd0P6I6% A mmol) is dissolved in DME. To this mixture is added Pd(PPh 3
)
4 (10 mol%) and the mixture is stirred at room temperature for 10 min before 4 methoxybenzeneboronic acid (2 mmol) and aqueous 1 mL of Na 2
CO
3 (10 wt%) are added. Subsequently, the reaction mixture is heated to reflux for 18 hours. The cooled reaction mixture is diluted with water and extracted 3 times with ethyl acetate. The combined organic layers are dried (MgSO 4 ), filtered and concentrated under vacuum. The residue is purified by column chromatography on silica gel eluting with 15% EtOAc/Hexane to give compound 186c. [M+H]* = 323.3. 186D. To a solution of 186c (3 mmol) in DME is added 2N KOH and the resulting mixture is heated to reflux for 1 hour. The cooled mixture is diluted with water and acidified with solid citric acid to pH - 5 and extracted 3 times with CH 2
CI
2 . The organic layers are washed once with brine, dried (MgSO 4 ), filtered and concentrated under vacuum to give compound 186d. [M+H]* = 309.3. 186E. To a cooled solution of compound 186d (2 mmol), triethylamine (0.4 mL) in dichloromethane (10 mL) (ice-acetone bath) is added trifluoromethanesulfonic anhydride (0.4 mL) dropwise. The resulting solution is stirred for 30 min at -5 0 C. The reaction mixture is then poured into dilute HCI (0.5 M) and extracted with CH 2 Cl 2 . The combined organic layers are washed with a 1% NaHCO 3 , brine and dried (MgSO 4 ), filtered and concentrated under vacuum to give a brown oil. Compound 186e is used immediately without further purification. [M+H]* = 441.4. 186F. Commercially available 2,4-dibromothiazole (2 mmol) is dissolved in cyclopropylamine (3 mL) and the reaction mixture is heated to 50 0 C for 8 hour. The cooled mixture is then poured into water and extracted 2 times with ether. After drying the combined organic fractions (MgSO 4 ), evaporation of solvents, and purification by flash column chromatography (silica gel, 15% EtOAc/Hexane) furnished 2 cyclopropylamine-4-bromothiazole which is further converted to the corresponding stannane 186f. A solution of 2-cyclopropylamine-4-bromothiazole in degassed DME is treated with hexamethylditin and Pd(PPh 3
)
4 and heated at 80 0 C for 18 hour. The cooled 221 mixture is concentrated under vacuum and the residue is purified by column chromatography eluting with 20% EtOAc/Hexane/2%Et 3 N to give Stannane 186f. [M+H]* = 304.1. 5 186G. To a degassed solution of compound 186e (1 mmol) and Stannane 186f (2 mmol) is added Pd(PPh 3
)
4 (10 mol%). The mixture is degassed two additional times with nitrogen and subsequently heated to 100 *C for 3 hour. The cooled mixture is concentrated under vacuum and the residue is purified by column chromatography eluting with 30% EtOAc/Hexane to give compound 186g. [M+H]* = 431.6. 10 186H. A solution of compound 186g and 10% Pd/C (wet) in MeOH is subjected to a hydrogen balloon for 2 hours. The mixture is filtered through a pad of celite and the filtrate is concentrated under vacuum to give compound 186h. [M+H]* = 341.4. 15 The title compound is prepared from pyridazinone 186h and the cyclic peptide precursor 1 of Example 1 via the Mitsunobu conditions set forth in Example 158, followed by the hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the hydrolysis conditions described in Example 160. 20 Example 187. Compound of Formula IV, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, X and Y taken together = 6-methoxy-isoquinolin-(3,4)-yl, Z = hydrogen, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R4= hydrogen. aA -B C SuMd
NII
4 OH |AO 3 WN 0 / I N CH 3 0H N NN N Ph W Ph Ph197c 186b 187a 187b 25 187A. Pyridazinone 186b (2 mmol) is dissolved in DME. To this mixture is added Pd(PPh 3
)
4 and the mixture is stirred at room temperature for 10 min before 2-formyl-4 methoxybenzeneboronic acid and aqueous Na 2
CO
3 (10 wt%) are added. Subsequently, the reaction mixture is heated to reflux for 18 hours. The cooled reaction mixture is 222 diluted with water and extracted 3 times with ethyl acetate. The combined organic layers are dried (MgSO 4 ), filtered and concentrated under vacuum. The residue is purified by column chromatography on silica gel eluting with 20% EtOAc/Hexane to give compound 187a. [M+H]+ = 351.4. 5 187B. A mixture of pyridazinone 187a (1 mmol), MeOH (20 mL) and NH 4 0H (10 mL, 28-30 wt%) is heated at 60'C for 30 min. After cooling, the precipitate, compound 187b, is filtered and rinsed with MeOH (15 mL). [M+H]* = 317.4. 10 187C. A mixture of pyridazinoisoquinolinone 187b (0.5 mmol), AlC1 3 and toluene is stirred and heated at 70*C for 1 hour. After cooling, water is added and the mixture is filtered and rinsed with water. The residue is purified by column chromatography on silica gel eluting with 50% EtOAc/Hex to give compound 187c. [M+H]* = 227.3. 15 The title compound is prepared from pyridazinoisoquinolinone 187c and the cyclic peptide precursor 1 of Example 1 via the Mitsunobu conditions set forth in Example 158, followed by the hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the hydrolysis conditions described in Example 160. 20 Example 188. Compound of Formula IV, wherein A = -(C=0)-O-Rl, wherein R' = cyclopentyl, G = OH, L = absent, X = Y = thiophen-3-yl, Z = hydrogen, j = 3, m = s = 1. and R 3 = R 4 = hydrogen. 25 188a - Amine deprotection. 0.041mmol of the title compound of Example 159 is dissolved in 4ml of a 4M solution of HCl in dioxane and stirred for 1 hour. The reaction residue 188a is concentrated in vacuo. 188b - Chloroformate Reagent 223 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 The phjoripfprpgpqe18loissprepared by dissolving 0.045mmol of cyclopentanol in THF (3ml) and adding 0.09mmol of phosgene in toluene (20%). The resulting reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for 2 hours and the solvent is removed in vacuo. To the residue is added DCM and subsequently concentrated to dryness twice in vacuo yielding chloroformate reagent 188b. 188c - Carbamate formation The title carbamate is prepared by dissolving residue 188a in 1ml of THF, adding 0.045mmol of TEA, and cooling the resulting reaction mixture to 0*C. To this 0*C reaction mixture is added chloroformate reagent 188b in 3ml of THF. The resulting reaction mixture is reacted for 2 hours at 00C, extracted with EtOAc, washed by 1M sodium bicarbonate, water and brine, dried over MgSO 4 , and concentrated in vacuo to dryness. The crude compound is purified by silica column and the ethyl ester is subsequently hydrolyzed by the procedure set forth in Example 160. Example 189. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = -(C=O)-O-R', wherein R' = cyclobutyl, G = OH. L = absent, X = Y = thiophen-3-yl, Z = hydrogen, i = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R 4 = hydrogen. The title compound is prepared by the method described in Example 188 with the title compound of Example 159 and cyclobutanol. Example 190. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = -(C=0)-O-Rl, wherein R' = cyclohexyl, G = OH, L = absent, X = Y = thiophen-3-vl, Z = hydrogen, j = 3. m = s = 1. and R 3 = R 4 = hydrogen. The title compound is prepared by the method described in Example 188 with the title compound of Example 159 and cyclohexanol. Example 191. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = -(C=O)-O-R', wherein R' = 0 , = OH, L = absent, X = Y = thiophen-3-yl, Z = hydrogen, I = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = = hydrogen. 224 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 ~igtie djpbd4@dby the method described in Example 188 with the title compound of Example 159 and (R)-3-hydroxytetrahydrofuran. Example 192. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = -(C=O)-O-R, wherein R = G = OH, L = absent, X = Y = thiophen-3-yl, Z = hydrogen, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R= hydrogen. The title compound is prepared by the method described in Example 188 with the title compound of Example 159 and (S)-3-hydroxytetrahydrofuran. Example 193. Compound of Formula 1l, wherein A = -(C=O)-O-R', wherein R' = 40- ,. G = OH, L = absent, X = Y = thiophen-3-y, Z = hydrogen, i = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R4= hydrogen. The title compound is prepared by the method described in Example 188 with the title compound of Example 159 and OH. Example 194. Compound of Formula 1I, wherein A = -(C=O)-R', wherein R' cyclopentyl, G = OH, L = absent, X = Y = thiophen-3-yi, Z = hydrogen, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R = hydrogen. The title compound is prepared with the title compound from Example 159 in 4ml of a 4M solution of HCI in dioxane and stirring the reaction mixture for 1 hour. The reaction residue is concentrated in vacuo. To this residue, 4ml of THF and 0.045mmol of TEA is added, the mixture is cooled to 0*C, to which is added 0.045mmol of the cyclopentyl acid chloride. The resulting reaction mixture is stirred for 2 hours at 0*C. The reaction mixture is then extracted with EtOAc, washed with 1M sodium bicarbonate, water and brine, dried over MgSO 4 and concentrated to dryness in vacuo. The crude compound is purified by silica column and the ethyl ester is subsequently hydrolyzed by the procedure set forth in Example 160. 225 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Example 195. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = -(C=O)-NH-R', wherein R' = cyclopentyl, G = OH, L = absent, X = Y = thiophen-3-yl, Z = hydrogen, j 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R 4 = hydrogen. The title compound is prepared with the title compound from Example 159 in 4ml of a 4M solution of HCI in dioxane and stirring for 1 hour. The resulting reaction residue is concentrated in vacuo, dissolved in 4ml THF, and cooled to 0*C. To the 0*C solution is added 0.045mmol of cyclopentyl isocyanate and the resulting reaction mixture is stirred at RT for 4 hours. The solution is then extracted with EtOAc, washed with 1% HCI, water and brine, dried over MgSO 4 , and concentrated in vacuo to dryness. The crude compound is purified by silica column and the ethyl ester is subsequently hydrolyzed by the procedure set forth in Example 160. Example 196. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = -(C=S)-NH-R', wherein R' = cyclopentyl, G = OH, L = absent, X = Y = thiophen-3-yl, Z = hydrogen, j =3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R4= hydrogen. The title compound is prepared with the title compound from Example 159 in 4ml of a 4M solution of HCI in dioxane and stirring for 1 hour. The resulting reaction residue is concentrated in vacuo, dissolved in 4ml THF, and cooled to O*C. To the O*C solution is added 0.045mmol of cyclopentyl isothiocyanate and the resulting reaction mixture is stirred at RT for 4 hours. The'solution is then extracted with EtOAc, washed with 1% HCI, water and brine, dried over MgSO 4 , and concentrated in vacuo to dryness. The. crude compound is purified by silica column and the ethyl ester is subsequently hydrolyzed by the procedure set forth in Example 160. Example 197. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = -S(O) 2
-R
1 . wherein R cyclopentyl, G = OH, L = absent, X = Y = thiophen-3-yl, Z = hydrogen, i = 3, m = s = 1,. and R 3 = = hydrogen. The title compound is prepared with the title compound from Example 159 in 4ml of a 4M solution of HCI in dioxane and stirring for 1 hour. To the resulting concentrated reaction residue, which has been dissolved in 4ml THF, is added 0.045mmol of TEA, 226 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 and cgoldtp- Qi G~I:WthgQi~o.iGtion is added 0.045mmol of cyclopentyl sulfonyl chloride and the resulting reaction mixture is stirred at 0*C for 2 hours. The solution is then extracted with EtOAc, washed with 1M sodium bicarbonate, water and brine, dried over MgSO 4 , and concentrated in vacuo to dryness. The crude compound is purified by silica column and the ethyl ester is subsequently hydrolyzed by the procedure set forth in Example 160. Example 198. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = -(C=0)-O-R, R' = cyclopentyl, G = -0-phenethyl, L = absent, X = Y = thiophen-3-vl, Z = hydrogen, j = 3. m = s = 1, and R 3 = = hydrogen. PYBrOP DMAP o H0 DIEA *( 40 0 H OH H
HO-
H 198a H 194 DCM 198b The title compound is prepared by adding to a solution of the title compound of Example 194 and phenethyl alcohol 198a in 0.5 ml DCM, is added 1.2 eq. PyBrOP, 4eq. DIEA, and catalytic amount of DMAP at 0*C. The resulting reaction mixture is stirred for 1 hour. at 00C and then warmed to RT over a period of 4-12 hours. The reaction mixture is purified by silica gel flash chromatography using different ratios of hexanes:EtOAc as elution phase (9:1-+5:1-->3:1-+1:1) to afford the title compound isolated phenethyl ester 198b. Other esters can be made using the same procedures. Example 199. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = -(C=O)-O-R'. R = cyclopentyl, G = -NH-phenethyl, L = absent, X = Y = thiophen-3-yi, Z = hydrogen, i = 3. m = s = 1, and R 3 = = hydrogen. 227 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 S 4A S ) S O EDC 0 ~DJEA0 H _ _ _ _ OH H H /t 199. / DMF 194 199b The title compound is prepared by adding to a solution of the title compound of Example 194 and phenethylamine 199a (0.05 ml) in 0.5 ml DMF, EDC (1.2 eq.) and DIEA (4eq.) at 0*C. The resulting reaction mixture is stirred at 1 hour. Subsequently, the reaction is warmed to RT over a period of 4-12 hours. The reaction mixture is purified by silica gel flash chromatography using different ratios of hexanes:EtOAc as elution phase (9:1->5:1-->3:1->1:1) to afford title compound phenethyl amide 199b. Other amides can be made via the same procedure. Example 200. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = -(C=O)-O-Rl. R' = cyclopentyl, G = -NHS(O) 2 -phenethyl. L absent X Y thiophen-3-yl, Z hydrogen. j=3. m= s =1, and R 3
=R
4 = hydrogen. PyBj0P DMAP 0 DIEAH J'l H OH 0~c & H H2N - H / 194 DCM. 200b 5 The title compound is prepared by adding to a solution of the title compound of Example 194 and a-toluenesulfonamide 200a (10mg) in 0.5 ml DCM, is added 1.2 eq. PyBrOP, 4eq. DIEA, and catalytic amount of DMAP at 0*C. The resulting reaction mixture is stirred for 1 hour and then allowed to warm to RT over a period of 4-12 hours. 228 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 The rqatjrig jgprig lby"iea gel flash chromatography using different ratios of hexanes:EtOAc as elution phase (9:1-+5:1->3:1->1:1) to afford the title compound sulfonamide 200b. .Other sulfonamides can be made via the same procedure. Example 201. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = -(C=O)-O-R', R = cyclopentyl, G = -(C=O)-OH, L = absent, X = Y = thiophen-3-yl, Z = hydrogen, j = 3. m = s = 1. and and R 3 = R 4 = hydrogen. 1) HONH 2 * H0 EDCIJ H DMF > , H 2) DIBAL-H HH/ 198 201a I) j2) HCI HOXCN H 2 0 dioxane TFA H H [01 H HH H H / H 201c 201b The title compound is prepared by adding to a solution of the title compound of Example 194 in 0.5 ml DMF, EDC (1.2 eq.) and DIEA (4eq.) at 0*C. The resulting reaction mixture is stirred at 1 hour. Subsequently, the reaction is warmed to RT over a period of 4-12 hours. The reaction mixture is purified by silica gel flash chromatography 229 to afford hydroxyamide. The hydroyamide is then treated with DIBAL-H at -78 0 C in THF for 2 hours. The reaction mixture is then diluted with 8 ml EtOAc, washed with water and brine, dried over Na 2
SO
4 , and concentrated in vacuo to yield aldehyde 201a. To a solution of aldehyde 201a in 0.5 ml THF, is added x-hydroxy-c-methyl 5 propionitrile (0.1 ml) and catalytic amount TFA at 0"C. The resulting reaction mixture is warmed from 0* C to RT over a period of 4-12 hours followed by hydrolysis with concentrated hydrochloric acid in dioxane. The reaction is then extracted with EtOAc, and washed with water and brine to yield x-hydroxy compound 201b in its crude form. The crude compound 201b undergoes a Dess-Martin oxidation in THF (0.5 ml), 10 providing the a-carbonyl compound 201c in crude form. The crude 201c is purified by silica gel flash chromatography using different ratios of hexanes:EtOAc as elution phase (9:1-+5:1-+3:1-,1:1) to afford the title compound isolated keto acid 201c. Example 202. Compound of Formula IV, wherein A = -(C=O)-O-Rl, R' = cyclopentyl, G = -(C=O)-O-phenethyl, L = absent, X = Y = thiophen-3-yl, Z = 15 hydrogen, j = 3, m= s = 1, and and R 3 = R4= hydrogen. The title compound is prepared with the title compound keto acid of Example 201 and phenethanol according to the procedure set forth Example 198. Example 203. Compound of Formula IV, wherein A = -(C=O)-O-R, R' = cyclopentyl, G = -(C=0)-NH-phenethyl, L = absent, X = Y = thiophen-3-yl, Z = 20 hydrogen, J = 3, m= s = 1, and and R 3 = R4= hydrogen. The title compound is prepared with the title compound keto acid of Example 201 and phenethyl amine according to the procedure set forth in Example 199. Example 204. Compound of Formula IV, wherein A = -(C=O)-O-R', R' = cyclopentyl, G = -(C=O)-NH-S(O) 2 -benzyl, L = absent, X = Y = thiophen-3-yl, Z = 25 hydrogen, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R3 = R4= hydrogen. The title compound is prepared with the title compound keto acid of Example 201 and a-toluenesulfonamide according to the procedure set forth in Example 200. 230 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Example 205. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = -(C=O)CHz-, X = Y = thiophen-3-yl, Z = hydrogen, j = 1, m = s = 1, and R 3 = hydrogen. The title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 88C and 4,5-di(thiophen-3-yl)-2H-pyridazin-3-one by the Mitsunobu conditions elucidated in Example 158 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 160. ) Example 206. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L -CH(CH 3 )CH--, X = Y = thiophen-3-yl, Z = hydrogen, j = 1, m = s = 1, R 3 = methyl, and
R
4 = hydrogen. The title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 89G and 4,5-di(thiophen-3-yl)-2H-pyridazin-3-one by the Mitsunobu conditions elucidated in Example 158 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 160. Example 207. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = -0-, X Y = thiophen-3-yl, Z = hydrogen, i = 0, m = s = 1, R 3 = methyl, and R 4 = hydrogen. The title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 90D and 4,5-di(thiophen-3-yl)-2H-pyridazin-3-one by the Mitsunobu conditions elucidated in Example 158 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 160. Example 208. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = -S-, X = Y = thiophen-3-yl, Z = hydrogen, i = 0, m = s = 1, R 3 = methyl, and R 4 = hydrogen. The title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 91E and 4,5-di(thiophen-3-yl)-2H-pyridazin-3-one by the Mitsunobu conditions elucidated in Example 158 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 160. 231 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Example 209. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = -S(O)-, X = Y = thiophen-3-yi, Z = hydrogen, i = 2, m = s = 1, R 3 = methyl, and R 4 = hydrogen. The title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 92B and 4,5-di(thiophen-3-yl)-2H-pyridazin-3-one by the Mitsunobu conditions elucidated in Example 158 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 160. Example 210. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = -S(O) 2 X = Y = thiophen-3-yl, Z = hydrogen, j = 2, m = s = 1, R 3 = methyl, and R 4 = hydrogen. The title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 93B and 4,5-di(thiophen-3-yl)-2H-pyridazin-3-one by the Mitsunobu conditions elucidated in Example 158 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 160. Example 211. Compound of Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L =
-SCH
2
CH
2 -, X = Y = thiophen-3-yi, Z = hydrogen, i = 0, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R4 = CH 3 . The title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 94B and 4,5-di(thiophen-3-yl)-2H-pyridazin-3-one by the Mitsunobu conditions elucidated in Example 158 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 160. Example 212. Compound of Formula II, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = CF 2
CH
2 , X = Y = thiophen-3-yi, Z = hydrogen, j = 1. m = s = 1, and R 3 = = hydrogen. The title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 95C and 4,5-di(thiophen-3-yl)-2H-pyridazin-3-one by the Mitsunobu conditions elucidated in Example 158 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 160. 232 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 Exapii in, .,.1 Formula 11, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L =
-CHFCH
2 --, X = Y = thiophen-3-yl, Z = hydrogen, j = 1, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R4 = hydrogen. The title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 96C and 4,5-di(thiophen-3-yl)-2H-pyridazin-3-one by the Mitsunobu conditions elucidated in Example 158 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 160. Example 214. Compound of Formula Ill, wherein A = tBOC, G = OH, L = absent, X = Y = thiophen-3-yI, Z = hydrogen, j = 3, m = s = 1, and R 3 = R4 = hydrogen. 214A. The saturated cyclic peptide precursor mesylate is prepared by catalytic reduction of the mesylate cyclic peptide precursor of Example 2 with Pd/C in MeOH in the presence of H 2 . The title compound is prepared with the saturated cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 214A and 4,5-di(thiophen-3-yl)-2H-pyridazin-3-one by the Mitsunobu conditions elucidated in Example 158 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 160. The compounds of the present invention exhibit potent inhibitory properties against the HCV NS3 protease. The following examples elucidate exemplary assays in which the compounds of the present invention are tested for anti-HCV effects. Example 215. NS3/NS4a Protease Enzyme Assay HCV protease actiyity and inhibition is assayed using an internally quenched fluorogenic substrate. A DABCYL and an EDANS group are attached to opposite ends of a short peptide. Quenching of the EDANS fluorescence by the DABCYL group is relieved upon proteolytic cleavage. Fluorescence was measured with a Molecular Devices Fluoromax (or equivalent) using an excitation wavelength of 355 nm and an emission wavelength of 485 nm. 233 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 p 7Fi stp i ryOir Wlte half-area 96-well plates (VWR 29444-312 [Coming 3693]) with full-length NS3 HCV protease 1b tethered with NS4A cofactor (final enzyme concentration 1 to 15 nM). The assay buffer is complemented with 10 yM NS4A cofactor Pep 4A (Anaspec 25336 or in-house, MW 1424.8). RET Si (Ac-Asp Glu-Asp(EDANS)-Glu-Glu-Abu-[COO]Ala-Ser-Lys-(DABCYL)-NH2,.AnaSpec 22991, MW 1548.6) is used as the fluorogenic peptide substrate. The assay buffer contained 50 mM Hepes at pH 7.5, 30 mM NaCl and 10 mM BME. The enzyme reaction is followed over a 30 minutes time course at room temperature in the absence and presence of inhibitors. The peptide inhibitors HCV inh I (Anaspec 25345, MW 796.8) Ac-Asp-Glu-Met Glu-Glu-Cys-OH, [-20 0 C] and HCV Inh 2 (Anaspec 25346, MW 913.1) Ac-Asp-Glu Dif-Cha-Cys-OH, were used as reference compounds. IC50 values were calculated using XLFit in ActivityBase (IDBS) using equation 205: y=A+((B-A)/(1 +((C/x)AD))). Example 216. Cell-Based Replicon Assay Quantification of HCV replicon RNA in cell lines (HCV Cell Based Assay) Cell lines, including Huh-I 1-7 or Huh 9-13, harboring HCV replicons (Lohmann, et al Science 285:110-113, 1999) are seeded at 5x103 cells/well in 96 well plates and fed media containing DMEM (high glucose), 10% fetal calf serum, penicillin streptomycin and non-essential amino acids. Cells are incubated in a 5% CO 2 incubator at 37 *C. At the end of the incubation period, total RNA is extracted and purified from cells using Qiagen Rneasy 96 Kit (Catalog No. 74182). To amplify the HCV RNA so that sufficient material can be detected by an HCV specific probe (below), primers specific for HCV (below) mediate both the reverse transcription of the HCV RNA and the amplification of the cDNA by polymerase chain reaction (PCR) using the TaqMan One Step RT-PCR Master Mix Kit (Applied Biosystems catalog no. 4309169). The nucleotide sequences of the RT-PCR primers, which are located in the NS5B region of the HCV genome, are the following: 234 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 . F6?~li6M5MfmeGi~Sltfor" 5'GCTGCGGCCTGTCGAGCT: HCV Reverse primer "RBNS5Brev": 5'CAAGGTCGTCTCCGCATAC Detection of the RT-PCR product was accomplished using the Applied Biosystems (ABI) Prism 7700 Sequence Detection System (SDS) that detects the fluorescence that is emitted when the probe, which is labeled with a fluorescence reporter dye and a quencher dye, is processed during the PCR reaction. The increase in the amount of fluorescence is measured during each cycle of PCR and reflects the increasing amount of RT-PCR product. Specifically, quantification is based on the threshold cycle, where the amplification plot crosses a defined fluorescence threshold. Comparison of the threshold cycles of the sample with a known standard provides a highly sensitive measure of relative template concentration in different samples (ABI User Bulletin #2 December 11, 1997). The data is analyzed using the ABI SDS program version 1.7. The relative template concentration can be converted to RNA copy numbers by employing a standard curve of HCV RNA standards with known copy number (ABI User Bulletin #2 December 11, 1997). The RT-PCR product was detected using the following labeled probe: 5' FAM-CGAAGCTCCAGGACTGCACGATGCT-TAMRA FAM= Fluorescence reporter dye. TAMRA:=Quencher dye. The RT reaction is performed at 480C for 30 minutes followed by PCR. Thermal cycler parameters used for the PCR reaction on the ABI Prism 7700 Sequence Detection System were: one cycle at 950C, 10 minutes followed by 35 cycles each of which included one incubation at 950C for 15 seconds and a second incubation for 60 0C for 1 minute. To normalize the data to an internal control molecule within the cellular RNA, RT PCR is performed on the cellular messenger RNA glyceraldehydes-3-phosphate 235 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 dehy~rgpengs~g@(lFH)4jlAP.H copy number is very stable in the cell lines used. GAPDH RT-PCR is performed on the same exact RNA sample from which the HCV copy number is determined. The GAPDH primers and probes, as well as the standards with which to determine copy number, are contained in the ABI Pre Developed TaqMan Assay Kit (catalog no. 4310884E). The ratio of HCV/GAPDH RNA is used to calculate the activity of compounds evaluated for inhibition of HCV RNA replication. Activity of compounds as inhibitors of HCV replication (Cell based Assay) in replicon containing Huh-7 cell lines The effect of a specific anti-viral compound on HCV replicon RNA levels in Huh 11-7 or 9-13 cells was determined by comparing the amount of HCV RNA normalized to GAPDH (e.g. the ratio of HCV/GAPDH) in the cells exposed to compound versus cells exposed to the 0% inhibition and the100% inhibition controls. Specifically, cells were seeded at 5x 103 cells/well in a 96 well plate and were incubated either with: 1) media containing 1% DMSO (0% inhibition control), 2) 100 international units, IU/mi Interferon alpha 2b in media/1 %DMSO or 3) media/1 %DMSO containing a fixed concentration of compound. 96 well plates as described above were then incubated at 37*C for 3 days (primary screening assay) or 4 days (IC50 determination). Percent inhibition was defined as: % Inhibition= [100-((S-C2)/C1-C2))Jx100 where S= the ratio of HCV RNA copy number/GAPDH RNA copy number in the sample; C1 = the ratio of HCV RNA copy number/GAPDH RNA copy number in the 0% inhibition control (media/1 %DMSO); and C2= the ratio of HCV RNA copy number/GAPDH RNA copy number in the 100% inhibition control (100 IU/mI Interferon-alpha 2b). The dose-response curve of the inhibitor was generated by adding compound in serial, three-fold dilutions over three logs to wells starting with the highest concentration 236 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 of a gpgiqc teggmat Pign fdgending with the lowest concentration of 0.01 uM. Further dilution series (1uM to 0.001uM for example) was performed if the IC50 value was not in the linear range of the curve. IC50 was determined based on the IDBS Activity Base program using Microsoft Excel "XL Fit" in which A=1 00% inhibition value (10U/mI Interferon-alpha 2b), B= 0% inhibition control value (media/1%DMSO) and C= midpoint of the curve as defined as C=(B-A/2)+A. A, B and C values are expressed as the ratio of HCV RNA/GAPDH RNA as determined for each sample in each well of a 96 well plate as described above. For each plate the average of 4 wells were used to define the 100% and 0% inhibition values. Although the invention has been described with respect to various preferred embodiments, it is not intended to be limited thereto, but rather those skilled in the art will recognize that variations and modifications may be made therein which are within the spirit of the invention and the scope of the appended claims. 237

Claims (69)

  1. 2. A compound according to claim 1 wherein W is substituted with one or more substituents, each of said substituents being independently selected from any of (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e): (a) alkenyl; alkoxy; alkoxyalkyl; alkyl; alkylamino; alkylaryl; alkylsulfonyl; alkynyl; amide; amido optionally mono-substituted with C-C 6 alkyl; aryl; arylalkanoylalkyl; arylalkyl; arylaminoalkyl; aryloxyalkyl; arylsulfonyl; cycloalkoxy; cycloalky; dialkylamino; dialkylaminoalkyl; diarylaminoalkyl; haloalkyl; heteroaryl; heteroarylalkyl; heterocyclo; heterocycloalkyl; heterocycloalkylalkyl; thioalkyl; monoalkylaminoalkyl; sulfonyl; (lower alkyl)sulfonyl; haloalkyl; carboxyl; amide; (lower alkyl)amide; heterocyclo optionally substituted with C-C 6 alkyl; perhaloalky; sulfonyl; thioalkyl; urea, C(=0)R"; OC(=O)R 1 ; C(=O)O-R 1 ; C(=O)N(R)2; C(=S)N(R" )2; S0 2 R"; NHS(0 2 )R"; N(R1 2 ) 2 ; N(R 12)C(=0)R"l; wherein each of the foregoing can be optionally be substituted with up to three groups selected from halogen, OH, alkoxy, perhaloalkyl; (b) C-rC1 4 aralkyl; C 2 -C 7 cycloalkyl; C 6 -C 1 O aryl; heterocyclo; (lower alkyl) heterocyclo; wherein each aralkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heterocyclo or (lower alkyl)-heterocyclo may be optionally substituted with R, where R 6 is halogen, C-C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl, C-C 6 alkoxy, C 3 -C 6 cycloalkoxy, NO 2 , N(R 7 ) 2 , NH-C(O)-R 7 or NH-C(O) NHR; where R is H, C-C 6 alkyl or C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl; or R 6 is NH-C(O)-OR 8 where R 8 is C-C 6 alkyl or C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl; PAGE 239 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 (bR(59 d) W C(O)-NH-.R 5 where R 5 is independently H, C-Cs alkyl or C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl, C 6 or C 10 aryl, C 7 -C 14 aralkyl, heterocyclo or (lower alkyl) heterocyclo; (d) NH-C(O)-0R 8 where R 8 is C-C 6 alky or C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl; (e) formyl; halogen;, hydroxy; NO 2 ; OH; SH; halo; CN; wherein each R" is independently H, OH, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, perhaloalkyl, alkoxy, aryl, arylalkyl, alkylaryl, heterocyclo, heterocycloalkyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, arylalkanoylalkyl, heterocycloalkylalkyl aryloxyalkyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino, monoalkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, arylaminoalkyl, diarylaminoalkyl, wherein any of the foregoing can be optionally be substituted with up to three groups selected from halogen, OH, alkoxy and perhaloalkyl; and each R 1 2 is independently H, formyl, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, perhaloalkyl, alkoxy, aryl, arylalkyl, alkylaryl, heterocyclo, heterocycloalkyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroaryl, arylalkanoylalkyl, heterocycloalkylalkyl aryloxyalkyl, monoalkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, arylaminoalky, or diarylaminoalkyl, wherein any of the foregoing can be optionally be substituted with up to three groups selected from halogen, OH, alkoxy and perhaloalkyl.
  2. 3.- The compound of claim 1 wherein W is selected from the group consisting of: (a) an aliphatic heteromonocyclic, heterobicyclic or heterotricyclic ring system having from five to sixteen ring atoms and up to four ring hetero atoms selected from O, N and S, wherein said ring system is optionally substituted with up to three ring substituents selected from the group consisting of OH, CN, halogen, formyl, R'" and R"; and (b) an aromatic heteromonocyclic, heterobicyclic or heterotricyclic ring system having from five to sixteen ring atoms and up to four ring hetero atoms selected from 0, N and S, wherein said ring system is optionally substituted with up to three ring substituents selected from the group consisting of OH, CN, halogen, formyl, and R' 0 ; wherein: PAGE 240 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 FblhW Ri isIr~e' ( 'lkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, perhaloalkyl, alkoxy, aryl, arylalkyl, alkylaryl, heterocyclo, heterocycloalkyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, heretoaryl, heteroarylalkyl, arylalkanoylalkyl, heterocycloalkylalkyl aryloxyalkyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino, monoalkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, arylaminoalkyl, diarylaminoalkyl, heteroaryl or urea, wherein any of the foregoing can be optionally be substituted with up to three groups selected from halogen, OH, alkoxy and perhaloalkyl; C(=O)-R", OC(=O)R, C(=O)O-R", C(=O)N(R")2, C(=S)N(R")2, SO 2 R", NHS(O 2 )R", N(R' 2 ) 2 , and N(R1 2 )C(=O)R"; each R" is independently H, OH, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, perhaloalkyl, alkoxy, aryl, arylalkyl, alkylaryl, heterocyclo, heterocycloalkyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, arylalkanoylalkyl, heterocycloalkylalkyl aryloxyalkyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino, monoalkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, arylaminoalkyl, diarylaminoalkyl, wherein any of the foregoing can be optionally be substituted with up to three groups selected from halogen, OH, alkoxy and perhaloalkyl; each R1 2 is independently H, formyl, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, perhaloalkyl, alkoxy, aryl, arylalkyl, alkylaryl, heterocyclo, heterocycloalkyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroaryl, arylalkanoylalkyl, heterocycloalkylalkyl aryloxyalkyl, monoalkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, arylaminoalkyl, or diarylaminoalkyl, wherein any of the foregoing can be optionally be substituted with up to three groups selected from halogen, OH, alkoxy and perhaloalkyl.
  3. 4. The compound of claim 3- wherein W is an aliphatic heteromonocyclic, heterobicyclic or heterotricyclic ring system having from five to sixteen ring atoms and up to four ring hetero atoms selected from 0, N and S, wherein said ring system is optionally substituted with up to three ring substituents selected from the group consisting of OH, CN, halogen, formyl, RIO and R 1 1 . -5. The compound of claim 3 wherein W is an aliphatic heteromonocyclic ring system having from five to seven ring atoms and up to four ring hetero atoms selected from 0, N and S, wherein said ring system is optionally substituted with up to three ring PAGE 241 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 substituitsisdIalet nifri 6dsiificbonsisting of OH, CN, halogen, formyl, R' 0 and R".
  4. 6. The compound of claim 5 herein said optionally substituted aliphatic heteromonocyclic ring system has five ring atoms and 1 or 2 ring hetero atoms selected from 0, N and S.
  5. 7. The compound of claim 6 wherein said optionally substituted aliphatic heteromonocyclic ring system is selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidines, pyrazolidines, pyrrolines, tetrahydrothiophenes, dihydrothiophenes, tetrahydrofurans, dihydrofurans, imidazolines, tetrahydroimidazoles, dihydropyrazoles, tetrahydropyrazoles, and oxazolines.
  6. 8. The compound of claim 5 wherein said optionally substituted aliphatic heteromonocyclic ring system has six ring atoms and 1 or 2 ring hetero atoms selected from 0, N and S.
  7. 9. The compound of claim 8 wherein said optionally substituted aliphatic heteromonocyclic ring system is selected froin the group consisting of pyridines, piperidines, dihydropyridines, tetrahydropyridines, dihydropyrans, tetrahydropyrans, dioxanes, piperazines, dihydropyrimidines, tetrahydropyrimidines, perhydro pyrimidine, morpholine, thioxane, and thiomorpholine.
  8. 10. The compound of claim 5 wherein said optionally substituted aliphatic heteromonocyclic ring system has seven ring atoms and 1 or 2 ring hetero atoms selected from 0, N and S.
  9. 11. The compound of claim 8 wherein said optionally substituted aliphatic heteromonocyclic ring system is selected from the group consisting of hexamethyleneimine, and hexamethylenesulfide. PAGE 242 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479
  10. 12. -K-oWibr6 iditof OdihVSMferein W is an aliphatic heterobicyclic ring system having from five to sixteen ring atoms and up to four ring hetero atoms selected from 0, N and S, wherein said ring system is optionally substituted with up to three ring substituents selected from the group consisting of OH, CN, halogen, formyl and R 10 .
  11. 13. The compound of claim 12 wherein said optionally substituted aliphatic heterobicyclic ring system has eight to twelve ring atoms and 1 to 4 ring hetero atoms selected from 0, N and S.
  12. 14. The compound of claim 13 wherein said optionally substituted aliphatic heterobicyclic ring system eight to twelve ring atoms and I or 2 ring hetero atoms selected from 0 and N.
  13. 15. The compound of claim 3 wherein W is an aromatic heteromonocyclic, heterobicyclic or heterotricyclic ring system having from five to sixteen ring atoms and up to four ring hetero atoms selected from 0, N and S, wherein said ring system is optionally substituted with up to three. ring substituents selected from the group consisting of OH, CN, halogen, formyl and R 10 .
  14. 16. The compound of claim 3 wherein W is an aromatic heteromonocyclic ring system having from five to seven ring atoms and up to four ring hetero atoms selected from 0, N and S, wherein said ring system is optionally substituted with up to three ring substituents selected from the group consisting of OH, CN, halogen, formyl and RIO.
  15. 17. The compound of claim 15 wherein said optionally substituted aromatic heteromonocyclic ring system has five ring atoms and 1 or 2 ring hetero atoms selected from 0, N and S.
  16. 18. The compound of claim 17 wherein said optionally substituted aromatic heteromonocyclic ring system is selected from the group consisting of pyrroles, PAGE 243 pyrazoles, porphyrins, furans, thiophenes, pyrazoles, imidazoles, oxazoles, oxadiazoles, isoxazoles, thiazoles, thiadiazoles, and isothiazoles.
  17. 19. The compound of claim 16 wherein said optionally substituted aromatic 5 heteromonocyclic ring system has six ring atoms and 1, 2 or 3 ring hetero atoms selected from O, N and S.
  18. 20. The compound of claim 19 wherein said optionally substituted aromatic heteromonocyclic ring system is selected from the group consisting of pyridines, 10 pyrimidines, pyrazines, pyrans, and triazines.
  19. 21. The compound of claim 16 wherein said optionally substituted aromatic heteromonocyclic ring system has five ring atoms and 3 or 4 ring hetero atoms selected from 0, N and S. 15
  20. 22. The compound of claim 21 wherein said optionally substituted aromatic heteromonocyclic ring system is triazolyl or tetrazolyl.
  21. 23. The compound of claim 3 wherein W is an aromatic heterobicyclic ring system 20 having from eight to twelve ring atoms and up to four ring hetero atoms selected from 0, N and S, wherein said ring system is optionally substituted with up to three ring substituents selected from the group consisting of OH, CN, halogen, formyl and RIO.
  22. 24. The compound of claim 23 wherein said optionally substituted aromatic 25 heterobicyclic ring system is selected from the group consisting of adenines, azabenzimidazoles, azaindoles, benzimidazoles, benzo isothiazoles, benzofurans, benzoisoxazoles, benzooxazoles, benzothiadiazoles, benzothiazoles, benzothienes, benzothiophenes, carbazoles, cinnolines, guanines, imidazopyridines, indazoles, indoles, isoindoles, isoquinolines, phthalazines, purines, pyrrolo pyridines, quinazolines, 30 quinolines, quinoxalines, thianaphthenes, and xanthines. 244 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479
  23. 25. wl)cd h *Mi rein W is an aromatic heterotricyclic ring system having from ten to sixteen ring atoms and up to four ring hetero atoms selected from 0, N and S, wherein said ring system is optionally substituted with up to three ring substituents selected from the group consisting of OH, CN, halogen, formyl, R 10 and R 1 1 .
  24. 26. The compound of claim 25 wherein said optionally substituted aromatic heterotricyclic ring system is selected from the group consisting of carbazoles, bibenzofurans, psoralens, dibenzothiophenes, phenazines, thianthrenes, phenanthrolines, phenanthridines.
  25. 27. A compound of Formula i W 1 MH m 0 O N G H 0 Is N -, R3 A' ' R4 CH H Formula I Wherein: A is selected from the group consisting of H, -(C=O)-R 2 , -(C=O)-O-R', C(=O)-NH-R', -C(=S)-NH-R 2 , -S(O)-R 2 , -(C=NR)-R', and -(C=NR')-NH-R'; G is selected from the group consisting of -OH, -O-(C-C 1 2 alkyl), NHS(O) 2 R', -(C=O)-R 2 , -(C=O)-O-R', and -(C=O)-NH-R 2 ; L is selected from the group consisting of absent, -S-, -SCH 2 -, -SCH 2 CH-, -S(O)z, -S(O) 2 CH 2 CHr, -S(O)-, -S(O)CH 2 CHr, -0-, -OCHr, -OCH 2 CHr, -(C=OCHr, -CH(CH 3 )CH 2 -, -CFHCHr, -CF 2 CH 2 -, and -CRx=CRx- where Rx = H or halogen; PAGE 245 WO 2004/072243 PCT/US2004/003479 N=N W is selected from the group consisting oft, N Y N--N .NN N--N N y 1\ N N Y1 NN 10 and Q is selected from the group consisting of absent, -CHr, -0-, -NH-, N(R')-, -S-, -S(0) 2 -, and -(C=O)-; Q' is selected from the group consisting of absent, -CH 2 -, and -NH-; Y is selected from the group consisting of H, C-C 6 alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; j = 0, 1, 2, 3, or4; m = 0, 1, or 2; s = 0,1 or 2; R' is selected from the group consisting of H, C-C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3 -C 1 2 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; R 2 is selected from the group consisting of H, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3 -C1 2 cycloalkyl, alkylamino, dialkyl amino, arylamino, diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; and R 3 and R 4 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen-and methyl.
  26. 28. A compound according to claim 27, wherein: A is -(C=O)-0-R'; G is hydroxyl; PAGE 246 L is absent; j= 3; m = s = 1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen. 5
  27. 29. A compound according to claim 27, wherein: A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; 10 j = 3; m = s = 1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen.
  28. 30. A compound according to claim 27, wherein: 15 A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; N N N Q W is j= 3; 20 m=s= l;and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen.
  29. 31. A compound according to claim 27 which is selected from the group consisting of: j = 3; m=s=1; and A G L W Q Y Ra, R4 tBOC OH absent N=N absent phenyl R' = R4= H; N Q tBOC OH absent N-N absent 2-bromophenyl R= R 4 = H; N Q tBOC OH absent N--N absent 3-bromophenyl = = H N Q 247 j = 3; m=s=1; and A G L W Q Y R", R tBOC OH absent N-N absent 4-bromophenyl R = R 4 = H; N Q tBOC OH absent N-N absent 5-Bromo-2-thienyl R: = R 4 = H; N Q tBOC OH absent N-N absent 2-bromo-4-pyridyl R = R4= H; N 0 tBOC OH absent N-N absent 2-biphenyl Rj = R 4 = H; N Q tBOC OH absent N-N absent 3-biphenyl R3 = R 4 = H; N,N Q tBOC OH absent N-N absent 4-biphenyl R = R 4 = H; N N 0Qt tBOC OH absent N-N absent 3-(3- Rj = R 4 = H; N 0--Q thienyl)phenyl tBOC OH absent N-N absent 3-(p- R = R 4 = H N N Q trifluoromethoxyph enyl)phenyl tBOC OH absent N-N absent 3-(p- R3= R 4 = H; N , cyanophenyl)phen yI tBOC OH absent N-N absent 4-(3- = R 4 = H N Q thienyl)phenyl tBOC OH absent N-N = absent 4-(p- R' = R= H; N / N Q' trifluoromethoxyph enyl)phenyl tBOC OH absent N-N absent 4-(p- R3= R= H N Q cyanophenyl)phen yI tBOC OH absent N-N absent 5-phenyl-2-thienyl R 3 = R 4 = H N Q tBOC OH absent N-N absent 5-phenyl-3-pyridyl R3 = R 4 = H; N N Q tBOC OEt absent N-N absent 3-chloro-4- R= R= H N N Q hydroxyphenyl 248 j = 3; m=s=1; and A G L W Q Y R3, R tBOC OH absent N-N absent 3-chloro-4- R" = R 4 = H hydroxyphenyl tBOC OH absent N-N absent 3-bromo-4- R'= R4= H N Nhydroxyphenyl tBOC OH absent N-N absent 2-methyl-4- R' = R 4 = H; NN Qbromophenyl tBOC OH absent N-N absent 3-methyl-4- Rj = R4= H; bromophenyl tBOC OH absent N=N absent n-propyl R' = R 4= H; N Q tBOC OH absent N-N absent n-butyl R3 = R 4 = H N 0LQ, tBOC OH absent N-N absent 4-ethoxyphenyl R= R 4 = H; N N tBOC OH absent N-N absent 4-propoxyphenyl R' = R 4 = H; IN,N Q tBOC OH absent N--N absent 4-butoxyphenyl R= R4= H; N Q tBOC OH absent N-N absent 3-methoxyphenyl Rj = R 4 = H; N N Q tBOC OH absent N-N absent 3, 4- R3 = R4= H; N dimethoxyphenyl tBOC OH absent N-N absent 4-methoxy-l- R3 = R4= H; N Y N Q naphthyl tBOC OH absent N-N absent 4-phenoxyphenyl R3= R4= H; N N Q tBOC OH absent N-N absent benzyl R = R4= H; N N Q tBOC OH absent N-N absent benzylR= R 4 = H; tROC OH bsen N- absent p-phenyibenzyl H N Q tBOC OH absent N-N absent 3-chlorophenyl = R 4 = H; N N 249 j = 3; m=s=1; and A G L W Q Y Rj, R4 tBOC OH absent N-N absent 3-fluorophenyl R= R 4 = H; N'N Q tBOC OH absent N-N absent 3-methoxyphenyl R3 = R 4 = H; NN Q tBOC OH absent N=N absent 3-phenoxyphenyl R = R4= H; N Q tBOC OH absent N-N absent 3- Rj = R 4 = H; N Y N Q benzyloxyphenyl tBOC OH absent N=N absent 3- R" = R 4 = H N' N Q trifluormethylphen yI tBOC OH absent N=N absent 4-bromophenyl R' = R 4 = H; N Q tBOC OH absent N-N absent 4-fluorophenyl R= R 4 = H; N Q tBOC OH absent N-N absent 4-methoxyphenyl R 3 = R 4 = H; N Q tBOC OH absent N=N absent 4-ethoxyphenyl R'= R 4 = H; N N Q tBOC OH absent N-N absent 4- R' = R 4 = H ' N Q trifluoromethylphe nyl tBOC OH absent N-N absent 3,5- R' = R 4 = H N Q di(trifluoromethyl) phenyl tBOC OH absent N-N absent 4-(N, N- R3 = R 4 = H N, Sj: Y N Q dimethylamino)-3, 5 di(trifluoromethyl) phenyl tBOC OH absent N=N absent 2, 4- R = R 4 = H N NN Q' dichlorophenyl tBOC OH absent N-N absent 3, 5- R' = R 4 = H; N Q dichlorophenyl 250 j = 3; m=s=l; and A G L W Q Y R, R 4 tBOC OH absent N-N absent 3, 4- R3= R 4 = H; dichlorophenyl tBOC OH absent N-N absent 2-pyridyl R'= R 4 = H; N Q tBOC OH absent -- N absent 2-pyridyl R = R4= H; N N Q tBOC OH absent N-N absent 3-pyridyl R3 = R 4 = H; N Q tBOC OH absent N-N absent 4-pyridyl R 4 = R 4 = H; NN Q tBOC OH absent N-N absent 4-methoxy-3- R3 = R 4 = H; 'N Q bromophenyl tBOC OH absent N-N absent 4- R3 = R 4 = H NN Q (methylcyclopropa ne)phenyl tBOC OH absent N-N absent 3-chloro-4- R= R 4 = H NY N Q (methylcyclopropa ne)phenyl tBOC OH absent NN absent 3-chloro-4- R'= R 4 = H N Y N Q methoxyphenyl tBOC OH absent N=N absent 3-chloro-4- R= R 4 = H NY N Q ethoxyphenyl tBOC OH absent N-N absent 3-bromo-4- R = R 4 = H N Q ethoxyphenyl tBOC O absenenyl tBOC OH absent NN absent 3-chloro-4-(2- = R 4 = H N Q hydroxyethoxy)ph enyl tBOC OH absent NN absent 3-bromo-4-(2- R3= R 4 = H; VN'N' Q' hydroxyethoxy)ph enyl tBO O aset -N absent 3-chloro-4-(0- R" = R = H; N Q allyl)phenyl tBOC OH absent N=N absent 3-bromo-4-(O- R' = R 4 = H; NN Q allyl)phenyl 251 j = 3; m=s=1; and A G L W Q Y R, R 4 tBOC OH absent N-N absent 3-chloro-4-(O- R;= R4= H N Q 'CH 2 SCH 3 )phenyl tBOC OH absent N-N absent 3-chloro-4-(O- R'= R 4 = H N Q CH 2 SCH 3 )phenyl tBOC OH absent N-N wherein Q' = - = R 4 = H; and N N -Y-CH2 tBOC OH absent N=N wherein Q' = R=R 4 = H. N -. N ,Y -C2 T NQ.. -OH 2 32. A compound according to claim 27 which is selected from the group consisting of: j=3; m=s=1; and A G L W Q Y R" ,R -(C=0)-0-R' OH absent N-N absent phenyl R6 = R 4 = H; wherein R 1 = \N'N Q cyclopentyl OH absent N N absent phenyl R=R 4 =H; wherein R 1 = 'NN Q cyclobutyl wherein A = OH absentN4 w N absent phenyl Rj = R 4 = H; -(C=0)-0-Rl \/'N Q' wherein R 1 = cyclohexyl wherein A = OH absent N-N absent phenyl R- = R 4 = H; -(C=0)-0-R' N Q wherein R 1 = 0 wherein A = OH absent N=N absent phenyl R = R4= H; and V NQ -(C=0)-0-R' \/NN Q' wherein R 1 = 252 j=3; m=s=1; and A G L W Q Y R' ,R 4 wherein A = OH absent N--N absent phenyl R 3 =R 4 =H -(C=O)-O-R1 N'N Q wherein R1 =
  30. 33. A compound according to claim 27 which is selected from the group consisting of: m=s=1; and A G L W Q Y j m, s R, R4 tBOC OH -(C=O)CH 2 _ N N absent phenyl 1 m=s= R = R = N, QL 1 H; tBOC OH -CH(CH 3 )CH 2 N--N absent phenyl 1 m = s = = -- N Q 1 methyl, R4=H tBOC OH -O_ N-N absent phenyl 0 m = s = ,N ,kQ- y 1 methyl, R 4 =H tBOC OH -S_ NN absent phenyl 0 m = s = N Q 1 methyl, R 4 =H tBOC OH -S(O)- N-N absent phenyl 0 m = s = N,N Q methyl, R 4 = H; tBOC OH -S(O) 2 - N-N absent phenyl 0 m = s R = N Y N Q 1 methyl, R4=H tBOC OH -SCH 2 CH 2 - N-N absent phenyl 0 m = s = = R N,N Y 1 CH 3 ; tBOC OH -CF 2 CH 2 - N-N absent phenyl 1 m = s = N Q 1 H; and tBOC OH -CFHCH 2 - N-N absent phenyl 1 m = s = =R N N Q 1 H 5 253
  31. 34. A compound according to claim 27 which is selected from the group consisting of: A G L W j m, s R3, R4 -(C=0)-O-R' -0-phenethyl absent N-N j = 3 m = s = 1 R= R 4 = H , N /j 3 ns Y R H R' = cyclopentyl \ 'N Q Q = absent Y = phenyl -(C=0)-O-R -NH-phenethyl absent NN j = 3 m = s = 1 RS = R 4 - H R1 = cyclopentyl \ 'N Q Q = absent Y = phenyl -(C=0)-O-R -NHS(O) absent N-N j = 3 m = s = 1 R = R 4 = H; R1 = cyclopentyl 2 -phenethyl \gN'N Q Q = absent Y = phenyl -(C=0)-O-R -(C=O)-OH absent N-j = 3 m s =1 Rd = R 4 = H; R' = cyclopentyl \ N Q Q = absent Y = phenyl -(C=0)-O-R -(C=0)-O-phenet absent N--N j = 3 m = s = 1 Rd = R 4 = H; R1 = cyclopentyl hyl \/NN Q Q = absent Y = phenyl -(C=0)-O-R -(C=O)-NH-phen absent N--N j 3 m= s= 1 Rd= R 4 = H; R1 = cyclopentyl ethyl N'N Q Q = absent Y = phenyl -(C=O)-O-R -(C=O)-NH-S(O) absent N-N j = 3 m = s = 1 Rd = R 4 = H. R1 = cyclopentyl 2 -benzyl N'N Q Q = absent Y = phenyl 254
  32. 35. A compound of Formula III: W IM H 0 NN N R 3 A' R i L Formula III wherein 5 A is selected from the group consisting of H, -(C=O)-R2, -(C=O)-O-R', -C(=O)-NH-R2, -C(=S)-NH-R2 , -S(O) 2 -R2, -(C=NR')-R', and -(C=NR )-NH-R'; G is selected from the group consisting of -OH, -O-(CI-CI 2 alkyl), -NHS(0) 2 -R', -(C=O)-R 2 , -(C=O)-O-R', and -(C=O)-NH-R 2 ; L is selected from the group consisting of absent, -S-, -SCH 2 -, io -SCH 2 CH 2 -, -S(O) 2 -, -S(O) 2 CH 2 CH 2 -, -S(O)-, -S(O)CH 2 CH 2 -, -0-, -OCH 2 -, -OCH 2 CH 2 , -(C=0)-CH 2 -, -CH(CH 3 )CH 2 -, -CFHCH 2 - , -CF 2 CH 2 -, and -CRx=CR- where R, = H or halogen; N -N W is selected from the group consisting of N Q N-N N =N N y N N Y N O 11 N Y" Q,,-,"Q , and av~ 15 Q is selected from the group consisting of absent, -CH 2 -, -0-, -NH-, -N(R')-, -S-, -S(O) 2 -, and -(C=0)-; Q' is selected from the group consisting of absent, -CH 2 -, and -NH-; Y is selected from the group consisting of H, Ci-C 6 alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, 20 substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; j = 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4; 255 m=0, 1,or 2; s = 0, 1 or 2; R' is selected from the group consisting of H, CI-C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3 -C 2 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted 5 arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; R 2 is selected from the group consisting of H, CI-C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 2 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3 -C 12 cycloalkyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino, arylamino, diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted 10 heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; and R 3 and R 4 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and methyl. 15 36. A compound according to claim 35, wherein: A is -(C=0)-O-R'; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; j = 3; 20 m = s = 1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen.
  33. 37. A compound according to claim 35, wherein: A is -(C=0)-O-tert-butyl; 25 G is hydroxyl; L is absent; j = 3; m = s = 1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen. 30
  34. 38. A compound according to claim 35, wherein: A is -(C=0)-O-R'; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; 256 N=N WN Q j= 3; m = s =1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen. 5
  35. 39. A compound according to claim 35, wherein: A is -(C=0)-O-tert-butyl; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; N===N 10 W is j = 3; m = s = 1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen. 15 40. A compound of Formula II: W m H N N 0 N G H R- 0i N R 3 A' R4 CH H Formula II wherein A is selected from the group consisting of H, -(C=O)-R 2 , -(C=0)-O-R', -C(=0)-NH-R 2 , -C(=S)-NH-R 2 , -S(0) 2 -R 2 , -(C=NR)-R', and -(C=NR)-NH-R'; 20 G is selected from the group consisting of -OH, -O-(Ci-C 1 2 alkyl), -NHS(0) 2 -RI, -(C=O)-R2, -(C=0)-O-R, and -(C=0)-NH-R 2 ; 257 L is selected from the group consisting of absent, -S-, -SCH 2 -, -SCH 2 CH 2 -, -S(0) 2 -, -S(O) 2 CH 2 CH 2 -, -S(O)-, -S(O)CH 2 CH 2 -, -0-, -OCH 2 -, -OCH 2 CH 2 -, -(C=0)-CH 2 -, -CH(CH 3 )CH 2 -, -CFHCH 2 -, -CF 2 CH 2 -, and -CRx=CRx where Rx = H or halogen; x y x N NN N N Y 5 W is selected from the group consisting of V and , where X and Y are independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, CI-C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 12 cycloalkyl, -CH 2 -alkylamino, -CH 2 -dialkylamino, -CH 2 -arylamino, -CH 2 diarylamino, -(C=0)-alkylamino, -(C=0)-diakylamino, -(C=0)-arylamino, -(C=O) diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted 10 heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; in the alternative, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms occupying the 4 and 5 positions of the triazole ring, to which X and Y are attached, form a cyclic moiety selected from the group consisting of aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, and substituted heteroaryl; 15 j = 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4; m = 0, 1, or 2; s = 0, 1 or 2; R1 is selected from the group consisting of H, CI-C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3 -CI 2 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, 20 heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; R2 is selected from the group consisting of H, CI-C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3 -C2 cycloalkyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino, arylamino, diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, 25 heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; and R 3 and RW are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and methyl.
  36. 41. A compound according to claim 40, wherein: 30 A is -(C=0)-O-R'; 258 G is hydroxyl; L is absent; j = 3; m=s=1; and 5 R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen.
  37. 42. A compound according to claim 40, wherein: A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; 10 j=3; m = s = 1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen.
  38. 43. A compound according to claim 40, wherein: 15 A is -(C=O)-O-R', G is hydroxyl; L is absent; x y N' N N W is j = 3; 20 m=s= 1;and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen.
  39. 44. A compound according to claim 40, wherein: A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; 25 G is hydroxyl; L is absent; 259 x y N N N W is ~~ ; j = 3; m = s = 1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen. 5
  40. 45. A compound according to claim 40 which is selected from the group consisting of: A G L W J m, s R, R tBOC OH absent X j=3 m = s = 1 R= R 4 = H N, NN X = Y = phenyl tBOC OH absent X j 3 m =s =1 R= R 4 =H. N X =Y = phenyl tBOC OH absent X Y j =3 m=s= 1 R=R 4 =H N,NN X = n-propyl Y = phenyl tBOC OH absent X Y' j= 3 m= s =1 R= R 4 = H N,NN X = m-methoxyphenyl Y =p methoxyphenyl tBOC OH absent X Y j=3 m=s=1 Rj=R4=H N,NN X = m-bromophenyl Y = p methoxyphenyl 260 A G L W J m, s ,R4 tBOC OH absent X ' j3 m =s =1 R3R H X =1-napthyl Y = p-methoxyphenyl tBOG OH absent x ' j3 m=s=1 R3=R 4 H; X =2-thienyl Y = p-methoxyphenyl tBOC OH absent X ' j3 m s 1 R3 R=H; N, N X = 3-thienyl Y = p-methoxyphenyl tBOC OH absent x ' j3 m s=1 RJ=R =H; X = 4-pyrazolyl Y = p-methoxyphenyl tBOC OH absent 3 m~ S= ms1 R3= R 4 H; N, N X = 3-pyridyi Y = p-methoxyphenyi tBOC OH absent x 'j3 m=s =1 R%"=R 4 =H; X = 2-pyridyl Y = p-methoxyphenyl tBOC OH absent x '~ 3 m s I W= R 4 H; X = 2-thiazolyl Y = p-methoxyphenyl 261 A G L W J m, S R3, P. 4 tROC OH absent X 'j3 m =s =1 W~=R 4 =H; X = benzyl Y = phenyl tBOC OH abts e nt X j3 m s 1 R'=R 4 =H X = n-butyl Y = phenyl tBOC OH absent X ' j3 m s 1 W 4 =R 4 H; N, N X = n-propyl Y = n-propyl tBOC OH absent x ' j3 m s 1 R'=R 4 =H N, N X = 4-(N,N-dimethylamino)phenyl Y = phenyl tBOC OH absent X 'j3 m ' s 1 R" R 4 H X = (N, N-diethylamino)methyl Y = phenyl tBOC OH absent x j3 m s=1 Rj R 4 H; L X = N, N-diethylamninocarbonyl Y = phenyl tBOC OH ab-sent x j~ j3 ms= i- l R "H X = m-chlorophenyl Y =4-ethoxyphenyl 262 A G L W J m,s R),R4 tBOC OH absent X Y3' j3 m=s=1 R'=R 4 =H N, NN X = 2-phenylethenyl Y = phenyl tBOC OH absent benzotriazole j = 3 m = s = 1 R" = R4 = H; tBOC OH absent 5, 6-methylbenzotriazole = 3 m = s = 1 R = R4= H; and tBOC OH absent X Y j =3 m = s = 1 R = R 4 = H N,NN X = N-ethylaminocarbonyl Y = phenyl tBOC OH absent HC Br j =3 m= s =1 R= R4= H H 3 C N ,NN tBOC OH absent s j =3 m= s =1 R= R 4 = H; and \ / HC HC / \ N, N tBOC OH absent j = j3 m=s =I R 3 =R 4 = H. N, N N,
  41. 46. A compound according to claim 40 which is selected from the group consisting of: A G L W J m, s R4, R 4 -(C=0)-0-Rl OH absent -X Y 3 m = s = 1 R = R 4 = H wherein R' = cyclopentyl NN N pn X = phenyl Y = phenyl 263 A G L W J m, s R3, R4 -(C=0)-0-R' OH absent x 3 m = s = 1 R' = R = H wherein R 1 = cyclobutyl N,NN X = phenyl Y = phenyl -(C=)--O--R OH absent x 3 m = s = 1 R" = R 4 = H wherein R 1 = cyclohexyl N, N N X = phenyl Y = phenyl -(C=0)-O-R OH absent X 3 m = s = 1 R' = R H SN,NN wherein R 1 = X = phenyl Y = phenyl -(C=0)--O-R OH absent x 3 m =s =1 R' R 4 =H; and o N,N wherein R 1 = X = phenyl Y = phenyl -(C=0)-O-R' OH absent X 3 m s =1 R 3 =R 4 = H. N,N N wherein R'= >; X = phenyl Y = phenyl
  42. 47. A compound according to claim 40 which is selected from the group consisting of: A G L W J m, s Rd , R4 tBOC OH -(C=O)CH 2 - X M = s =1 R'= R4= H N, NN X = phenyl Y = phenyl 264 A G L W JM, s W', R 4 tBOC OH -CH(CH 3 )CH 2 - x 1 M = S R' methyl N, %N R 4H; NI X = phenyl Y = phenyl tBOC OH -0- x 0 m s 1 R' methyl N, N A= 4H X = phenyl Y = phenyl tROC OH -S- x0 m =s =1 R'= methyl N, N NR H X = phenyl tBOC OH -S(O)- x 2 m =s = 1 R 4 = methyl N, N R 4 = H; X = phenyl Y = phenyl tBOC OH -S(0)2- x 2 m = s= 1 R" = methyl N, N N R = H; X = phenyl Y = phenyl tBOC OH -SCH 2 CH 2 - x0 m s=1 R' =RCH 3 1 N, N X =phenyl Y = phenyl tBOC OH -CF 2 CH 2 - x 1 m s 1 R;= R 4 H; and N, NN X =phenyl Y = phenyl 265 A G L W J m, s R 3 , R 4 tBOC OH -CFHCH 2 - x 1 m = s = 1 R3 = R4= H. N,NN X = phenyl Y = phenyl
  43. 48. A compound according to claim 40 which is selected from the group consisting of: A G L W J m, s R3, R4 -(C=0)-O-R -0-phenethyl absent x 3 m = s = 1 and R3 = R4 = H; R = cyclopentyl N,NN X = phenyl Y = phenyl -(C=O)-O-R 1 -NH-phenethyl absent x 3 m= s =1 and R3 =R4= H R= cyclopentyl N, N X = phenyl Y = phenyl -(C=0)-O-R -NHS(O) absent X m s =1 and R3= R4=H R = cyclopentyl 2 -phenethyl N, N N X = phenyl Y = phenyl -(C=O)-O-Rl -(C=0)-OH absent X 3 m= s =1 and R= R 4 = H R = cyclopentyl N, ,N N X = phenyl Y = phenyl -(C=0)-O-R -(C=O)-O-phenet absent X Y 3 m= s =1 and R= R 4 = H R = cyclopentyl hyl N, N N X = phenyl Y = phenyl 266 A G L W J m, s R3, R4 -(C=0)-O-R -(C=0)-NH-phene absent X 3 m = s = 1 and R = R 4 = H; R = cyclopentyl thyl N,NN and X n X = phenyl Y = phenyl -(C=O)-O-Rl -(C=O)-NH-S(0) 2 absent X 3 m = s = 1 and Rd = R 4 = H. R= cyclopentyl -benzyl NNN Xpn X = phenyl Y =phenyl
  44. 49. A compound of Formula III: W m H N N N G N R3 / '' R RJ4 Formula III wherein 5 A is selected from the group consisting of H, -(C=0)-R, -(C=0)-O-R, -C(=O)-NH-R 2 , -C(=S)-NH-R 2 , -S(O) 2 -R 2 , -(C=NR')-R', and -(C=NR')-NH-R; G is selected from the group consisting of -OH, -O-(CI-C 1 2 alkyl), -NHS(0) 2 -Rl, -(C=0)-R 2 , -(C=O)-O-R', and -(C=0)-NH-R 2 ; L is selected from the group consisting of absent, -S-, -SCH 2 -, -SCH 2 CH 2 -, 10 -S(O) 2 -, -S(0) 2 CH 2 CH 2 -, -0-, -OCH 2 -, -OCH 2 CH 2 -, -(C=O)-CH 2 -, -CH(CH 3 )CH 2 -, -CFHCH 2 -, -CF 2 CH 2 -, and -CRx=CRx- where Rx = H or halogen; x y x N N N N N W is selected from the group consisting of and 267 where X and Y are independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, C C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 12 cycloalkyl, -CH 2 -alkylamino, -CH 2 -dialkylamino, -CH 2 -arylamino, -CH 2 -diarylamino, -(C=O)-alkylamino, -(C=0)-dialkylamino, -(C=O)-arylamino, -(C=0)-diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, 5 substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; in the alternative, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms occupying the 4 and 5 positions of the triazole ring, to which X and Y are attached, form a cyclic moiety selected from the group consisting of aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, and substituted heteroaryl; 10 j = 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4; m = 0, 1, or 2; s = 0, 1 or 2; R' is selected from the group consisting of H, CI-C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3 -C 12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, 15 heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; R2 is selected from the group consisting of H, CI-C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 2 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3 -CI 2 cycloalkyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino, arylamino, diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, 20 heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; and R3 and R 4 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and methyl.
  45. 50. A compound according to claim 49, wherein: 25 A is -(C=O)-O-Rl; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; j = 3; m = s = 1; and 30 R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen.
  46. 51. A compound according to claim 49, wherein: A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; 268 G is hydroxyl; L is absent; j = 3; m = s = 1; and 5 R3 and R 4 are hydrogen.
  47. 52. A compound according to claim 49, wherein: A is -(C=O)-O-R, G is hydroxyl; 10 L is absent; x y N N N W is OA L j = 3; m = s = 1; and R 3 and R4 are hydrogen. 15
  48. 53. A compound according to claim 49, wherein: A is -(C=0)-O-tert-butyl; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; x y N' N 20 W/ is ; i= 3; m = s = 1; and R3 and R 4 are hydrogen.
  49. 54. A compound of Formula IV: 269 Y x z I o N O O Hj H N N G A/N \ R R 4 O S I-CH2 ,,CH H (IV) wherein A is hydrogen, -(C=0)-R', -(C=0)-O-R', -C(0)-NH-R 2 , -C(=S)-NH-R 2 -S(O) 2 -R 2 , (C=NR')-R', or -(C=NR')-NH-R'; 5 G is -OH, -O-(Ci-CI 2 alkyl), -NHS(0) 2 -R', -(C=O)-R 2 , -(C=0)-O-R', or -(C=O)-NH-R 2 ; L is -S-, -SCH 2 -, -SCH 2 CH 2 -, -S(0) 2 -, -S(0) 2 CH 2 CH 2 -, -S(O)-, -S(O)CH 2 CH 2 -, -0-, -OCH 2 -, -OCH 2 CH 2 -, -(C=O)-CH 2 -, -CH(CH 3 )CH 2 -, -CFHCH 2 -, -CF 2 CH 2 -, or -CRx=CRx- where Rx = H or halogen; 10 X, Y, and Z are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, N 3 , halogen, CI-C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 12 cycloalkyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino, Ci-C 6 alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, substituted aryl, -S-aryl, -S-substituted aryl, -0-aryl, -0-substituted aryl, NH-aryl, NH-substituted aryl, diarylamino, diheteroarylamino, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, -S-heteroaryl, 15 -S-substituted heteroaryl, -0-heteroaryl, -0-substituted heteroaryl, -NH-heteroaryl, -NH-substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; or, in the alternative, X and Y or Y and Z taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached form an aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or substituted 20 heteroaryl cyclic moiety; j = 0, 1, 2 , 3, or 4; m = 0, 1, or 2; 270 s = 0, 1 or 2; R' is hydrogen, CI-C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3 -CI 2 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, or substituted 5 heterocycloalkyl; R 2 is hydrogen, CI-C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3 -C 12 cycloalkyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino, arylamino, diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, or substituted heterocycloalkyl; and 10 R 3 and R 4 are each independently hydrogen or methyl.
  50. 55. A compound according to claim 54, wherein: A is -(C=0)-O-R'; G is hydroxyl; 15 L is absent; j = 3; m = s = 1; and R3 and R4 are hydrogen. 20 56. A compound according to claim 54, wherein: A is -(C=O)-O-tert-butyl; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; j = 3; 25 m = s = 1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen. 271
  51. 57. A compound according to claim 54 which is selected from the group consisting of: A G L X,Y Z j m,s R4 tBOC OEt absent X = Y =bromo hydrogen 3 m = s =1 R = R4 = hydrogen; tBOC OEt absent X = Y = thiophen- hydrogen 3 m = s = 1 Rj = R 4 = 3-yl hydrogen; tBOC OH absent X = Y = thiophen- hydrogen 3 m = s = 1 R3 = R = 3-yl hydrogen; tBOC OH absent X= Y =phenyl hydrogen 3 m = s = 1 Rj = R 4 = hydrogen; tBOC OH absent X = Y = 4-(N, N- hydrogen 3 m = s = 1 R' = R' = dimethylamino)ph hydrogen; enyl tBOC OH absent X = Y = 4- hydrogen 3 m = s = 1 R-k= R 4 = (trifluoromethoxy)p hydrogen; henyl tBOC OH absent X = Y = 4- hydrogen 3 m = s = 1 R = R 4 = (methanesulfonyl) hydrogen; phenyl tBOC OH absent X = Y = 4- hydrogen 3 m = s = 1 R= = R4 = (cyano)phenyl hydrogen; tBOC OH absent X = Y = 3-pyridyl hydrogen 3 m = s = 1 R3 = R 4 = hydrogen; tBOC OH absent X = Y = 4- hydrogen 3 m = s = 1 R" = R4 = (morpholin-4-yl- hydrogen; methanonyl)pheny tBOC OH absent X = Y = bromo hydrogen 3 m = s = 1 Rj = R = hydrogen; tBOC OH absent X and Y taken 4- 3 m = s = 1 = R4= together = phenyl methoxyphe hydrogen; nyl tBOC OH absent X and Y taken 4- 3 m = s = 1 Rj = R 4 = together = phenyl chloropheny hydrogen; tBOC OH absent X = 4-fluorophenyl phenyl 3 m = s = 1 Rj = R = Y = hydrogen hydrogen; 272 A G L X, Y Z j m, s R, R 4 tBOC OH absent Y = 1-piperidyl phenyl 3 m = s = 1 R; = R 4 hydrogen; tBOC OEt absent X = hydrogen phenyl 3 m = s = 1 R' = R 4 Y = bromo hydrogen; tBOC OH absent X = hydrogen phenyl 3 m = s = 1 R' = R 4 = Y = thiophen-3-yl hydrogen; tBOC OEt absent X = bromo hydrogen 3 m=s=1 R; = R4 = Y = pyrrolid-1-yl hydrogen; tBOC OH absent X = thiophen-3-yl hydrogen 3 m = s = 1 Rd = R 4 = Y = pyrrolid-1-yi hydrogen; tBOC OEt absent X = bromo hydrogen 3 m = s = 1 R3 = R4 = Y = azido hydrogen; tBOC OEt absent X = thiophen-3-yl hydrogen 3 m = s = 1 R = R 4 = Y = azido hydrogen; tBOC OH absent X = thiophen-3-yi hydrogen 3 m = s = 1 R3 = R= Y = azido hydrogen; tBOC OH absent X = thiophen-3-yI hydrogen 3 m = s = 1 R3 = R4= Y = tetrazol-2-yl hydrogen; tBOC OH absent X = Y = hydrogen 3 m = s = 1 R5 = R4 = mercapto-2- hydrogen; pryrimidine tBOC OH absent X = bromo hydrogen 3 m = s = 1 R' = R= Y =hydrogen; mercapto-2-pryri midine tBOC OH absent X = thiophen-3-yl hydrogen 3 m = s = 1 Rj = R 4 = Y =hydrogen; mercapto-2-pryri midine tBOC OH absent X = Y = thiazol-2- hydrogen 3 m = s = 1 Rj = R = yI hydrogen; tBOC OH absent X = Y = imidazol- hydrogen 3 m = s = 1 R; = R = 1-yI hydrogen; 273 A G L X, Y Z j m, s R;, R 4 tBOC OH absent X = 2- hydrogen 3 m = s =1 R = R 4 = (cyclopropylamino) hydrogen; -thiazol-4-yi Y = 4 methoxyphenyl tBOC OH absent X and Y taken hydrogen 3 m = s= R 3 = R= together = 6- hydrogen methoxy isoquinolinyl
  52. 58. A compound according to claim 54 which is selected from the group consisting of: A G L X, Y Z j m, s R, R -(C=0)-0-R OH absent X = thiophen-3-yl hydrogen 3 m = s = 1 R wherein R = Y = thiophen-3-yl hydrogen; cyclopentyl -(C=O)-O--R OH absent X = thiophen-3-yl hydrogen 3 m = s = 1 R =R wherein R = Y = thiophen-3-yl hydrogen; cyclobutyl -(C=0)-O-R OH absent X = thiophen-3-yl hydrogen 3 m = s = 1 R1 = R= wherein R = Y = thiophen-3-yl hydrogen; cyclohexyl -(C=0)-0-R OH absent X = thiophen-3-yl hydrogen 3 m = s = 1 R = R= 0 Y = thiophen-3-yl hydrogen; 0 wherein R 1 = -(C=0)-0-R OH absent X = thiophen-3-yl hydrogen 3 m = s = 1 R = R= 0 Y = thiophen-3-yl hydrogen; wherein R 1 = and -(C=0)-0-R' OH absent X = thiophen-3-yl hydrogen 3 m = s = 1 R =R= wherein R 1 Y = thiophen-3-yl hydrogen. 5 274
  53. 59. A compound according to claim 54 which is selected from the group consisting of A G L X Y Z j m, s R3 , FR tBOC OH -(C=O)CH 2 - thiophen-3-yl thiophen-3-yl hydro 1 m = s and R" = R 4 = gen = 1 hydrogen; tBOC OH -CH(CH 3 )C thiophen-3-yl thiophen-3-yl hydro 1 m = s R3 = methyl H 2 - gen =1 and R 4 = hydrogen; tBOC OH -0- thiophen-3-yl thiophen-3-yi hydro 0 m = s R= methyl gen =1 and R 4 = hydrogen; tBOC OH -S- thiophen-3-yl thiophen-3-yl hydro 0 m = s = R3 = methyl gen 1 and R = hydrogen; tBOC OH -S(O)- thiophen-3-yl thiophen-3-yi hydro 2 m = s R = methyl gen =1 and R 4 = hydrogen; tBOC OH -S(O) 2 - thiophen-3-yl thiophen-3-yl hydro 2 m = s R' = methyl gen =1 and R 4 = hydrogen; tBOC OH -SCH 2 CH 2 - thiophen-3-yl thiophen-3-yl hydro 0 m = s and R6 = R4= gen = 1 CH 3 ; tBOC OH -CF 2 CH 2 - thiophen-3-yl thiophen-3-yl hydro 1 m = s = and R3 = R 4 = gen 1 hydrogen; and tBOC OH -CFHCH 2 - thiophen-3-yl thiophen-3-yl hydro 1 m = s = and R3 = R = gen 1 hydrogen.
  54. 60. A compound according to claim 54 which is selected from the group consisting of: A G L X Y Z j m, s R", -(C=O)-O-Rl -0-phenethyl absent thiophe thiophen hydroge 3 m = s = Ri = cyclopentyl n-3-yl -3-yl n 1 hydroge n; -(C=O)-O-R -NH-pheneth absent thiophe thiophen hydroge 3 m = s = R =R R1 = cyclopentyl yl n-3-yl -3-yl n 1 hydroge n; 275 A G L X Y Z j m,s R4, R4 -(C=0)-O-R -NHS(O) absent thiophe thiophen hydroge 3 m = s = Rd =R R1 = cyclopentyl 2 -phenethyl n-3-yl -3-yl n 1 = hydroge n; -(C=O)-O-Rl -(C=O)-OH absent thiophe thiophen hydroge 3 m = s = R' = R4 R1 = cyclopentyl n-3-yl -3-yl n 1 = hydroge n; -(C=0)-O-R -(C=0)-O-ph absent thiophe thiophen hydroge 3 m = s = R1 = cyclopentyl enethyl n-3-yl -3-yl n 1 = hydroge n; -(C=0)-O--R -(C=0)-NH-p absent thiophe thiophen hydroge 3 m = s =R = R4 R1 = cyclopentyl henethyl n-3-yi -3-yl n 1 = hydroge n; and -(C=O)-O-Rl -(C=O)-NH-S absent thiophe thiophen hydroge 3 m = s = R R R = cyclopentyl (0) 2 -benzyl n-3-yl -3-yl n 1 = hydroge n.
  55. 61. A compound of Formula IV: Y x z o1 ONN O O 00 H N N G N A 4 O S CH2 ,,H L C// H (IV) 5 276 wherein A is hydrogen, -(C=O)-R', -(C=O)-O-R', -C(=O)-NH-R 2 , -C(=S)-NH-R2, or -S(O) 2 -R 2 , -(C=NR')-R', or -(C=NR')-NH-R'; G is -OH, -0-(C 1 -C 12 alkyl), -NHS(0) 2 -R', -(C=O)-R 2 , -(C=O)-O-R', or 5 -(C=O)-NH-R 2 ; L is absent, -S-, -SCH 2 -, -SCH 2 CH 2 -, -S(0)2-, -S(0) 2 CH 2 CH 2 -, -S(O)-, -S(O)CH 2 CH 2 -, -0-, -OCH 2 -, -OCH 2 CH 2 -, -(C=O)-CH 2 -, -CH(CH 3 )CH 2 -, -CFHCH 2 -, -CF 2 CH 2 -, or -CR,=CR,- where R, = H or halogen; X, Y, and Z are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, 10 N 3 , halogen, CI-C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 12 cycloalkyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino, CI-C 6 alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, substituted aryl, -S-aryl, -S-substituted aryl, -0-aryl, -0-substituted aryl, NH-aryl, NH-substituted aryl, diarylamino, diheteroarylamino, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, -S-heteroaryl, -S-substituted heteroaryl, 15 -0-heteroaryl, -0-substituted heteroaryl, -NH-heteroaryl, -NH-substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heterocycloalkyl; or, in the alternative, X and Y or Y and Z taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached form an aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or substituted 20 heteroaryl cyclic moiety; j = 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4; m = 0, 1, or 2; s = 0, 1 or 2 ; R' is hydrogen, CI-C 6 alkyl, C 3 -CI 2 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3 -CI 2 cycloalkyl, 25 aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, or substituted heterocycloalkyl; R 2 is hydrogen, CI-C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3 -CI 2 cycloalkyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino, arylamino, diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, 30 substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, or substituted heterocycloalkyl; and R 3 and R 4 are each independently hydrogen or methyl.
  56. 62. A compound according to claim 61, wherein: 277 A is -(C=O)-O-R'; G is hydroxyl; L is absent; j = 3; 5 m = s = 1; and R 3 and R 4 are hydrogen.
  57. 63. A compound according to claim 61, wherein: A is -(C=0)-O-tert-butyl; G is hydroxyl; 10 L is absent; j = 3 m = s = 1; and R 3 and R 4 e hydrogen. 15 64. A pharmaceutical composition comprising an anti-hepatitis C virally effective amount of a compound according to any one of claims 1 to 63, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or prodrug thereof, in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient. 278
  58. 65. A compound selected from the group consisting of B8r O Br S N\ON N O Br 0 OQN NQ BrN o 0 N0N N0 N 5 279 0 0 0: N o 4 0 s 0 0 0 0 0 NQ 280 0 0 O OF 0 0 F oOF 0 0 NO < 00 00 281 0 0 00 0 #N N 0 4 0 <0 282 0 c0 FF O F FOF <00 OF N\ON < 428 NN N N 0 N ) , o 0 o N N N ;o 0 0 O0C 00 284 00 Br o 0 0 03 Br CI 00 0 0/ 0 o N 0 QBr 0 ci N N 0 0 285 N. NL R0 0 O Br Zy/ 0 R 0N N r 0 N Qci O Br N 0 N 000 A% 4 N 0l 286 QN ci 'O CI 000 N K N NOJ >0' 0 0~. 0 ~L 0 O rBr QBr 0 B N0 287 tR 00 00AY 00 0 288 o0 NN N 0 and pharmaceutically acceptable salts and isomers thereof.
  59. 66. A compound selected from the group consisting of: 289 00 0 0 00 0,) I. 0 290 0 , O N OO /0 0 N N O O O0 291 0 0 00 0 0" 000 00 KON NKON 000 0 N 0 292 0 0 00 RR o 60 6R 0 029 0 c 00 0 0 0; N 0 0 go 7 00 l294 Q NQ ooo0 00 0N oO) NON N 0 QN o 0 * 295 ONQ 0 0 O0 00 0 0 0 00 QN 0 00 0 0 00 296 ON0 0 N 0U R 00 co 0 00 0 0 0-0 297 %0 00 0 0 0-0 00 9N N 298 0, 0 and pharmaceutically acceptable salts and isomers thereof 5
  60. 67. A compound selected from the group consisting of: F 0 00 0NF ~ 299 07 0 N I NN pN e I s ,,0 0 00 0 0 0300 0 0 0 7 N Q N o 0 00 0 B 0 030 eN R 00 and pharmaceutically acceptable salts and isomers thereof
  61. 68. A method for making a compound of Formula I in claim 1, comprising the steps 5 of: (i) reacting a proline derivative of formula VI: L / rR VI wherein, P is a nitrogen-protecting group; L is a leaving group; 10 R is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aralkyl, or optionally substituted heteroaralkyl; with a nucleophilic heterocyclic compound; and (ii) converting the resulting compound to a compound of Formula I in claim 1. 15 69. A method for making a compound of Formula I in claim 1, comprising the steps of: (i) reacting a compound of formula VII: 302 L om N N HN 3SG R4 j L E Formula VII wherein, L is a leaving group; 5 A is a nitrogen protecting group; and the remaining variables are as defined in claim 1; with a nucleophilic heterocyclic compound; and (ii) converting the resulting compound to a compound of Formula I in claim 1. x Y V N \Z 1o 70. The compound of formula I in claim 1, wherein W is I! wherein V, X, Y, and Z are each independently selected from: a) -Ci-C 6 alkyl containing 0, 1, 2, or 3 heteroatoms selected from 0, S, or N, optionally substituted with one or more substituents selected from halogen, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, 15 heterocycloalkyl, or substituted heterocycloalkyl; b) -C 2 -C 6 alkenyl containing 0, 1, 2, or 3 heteroatoms selected from 0, S, or N, optionally substituted with one or more substituents selected from halogen, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, or substituted heterocycloalkyl; 20 c) -C 2 -C 6 alkynyl containing 0, 1, 2, or 3 heteroatoms selected from 0, S, or N, optionally substituted with one or more substituents selected from 303 halogen, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, or substituted heterocycloalkyl; d) aryl; e) substituted aryl; 5 f) heteroaryl; g) substituted heteroaryl; h) heterocycloalkyl; or i) substituted heterocycloalkyl; or in the alternative, V and X, X and Y, or Y and Z are taken together with the carbons 10 to which they are attached to form a cyclic moiety selected from: aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, or substituted heterocycloalkyl. V x z
  62. 71. The compound of formula I in claim 1, wherein W is L wherein X, Y, and Z are each independently selected from: a) -CI-C 6 alkyl containing 0, 1, 2, or 3 heteroatoms selected from 0, S, 15 or N, optionally substituted with one or more substituents selected from halogen, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, or substituted heterocycloalkyl; b) -C 2 -C 6 alkenyl containing 0, 1, 2, or 3 heteroatoms selected from 0, S, or N, optionally substituted with one or more substituents selected 20 from halogen, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, or substituted heterocycloalkyl; c) -C 2 -C 6 alkynyl containing 0, 1, 2, or 3 heteroatoms selected from 0, S, or N, optionally substituted with one or more substituents selected from halogen, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, 25 heterocycloalkyl, or substituted heterocycloalkyl; d) aryl; e) substituted aryl; f) heteroaryl; g) substituted heteroaryl; 30 h) heterocycloalkyl; or i) substituted heterocycloalkyl; 304 or in the alternative, Y and Z are taken together with the carbons to which they are attached to form a cyclic moiety selected from: aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, or substituted heterocycloalkyl.
  63. 72. A compound produced by the method of claim 68 or claim 69. 5 73. A method of treating a hepatitis C viral infection in a subject, comprising administering to the subject an anti-hepatitis C virally effective amount of a compound according to any one of claims I to 63, 65 to 67 or 70 to 72 or a pharmaceutical composition according to claim 64.
  64. 74. A method of inhibiting the replication of hepatitis C virus, the method 10 comprising supplying a hepatitis C viral NS3 protease inhibitory amount of a compound according to any one of claims 1 to 63, 65 to 67 or 70 to 72 or a pharmaceutical composition of claim 64.
  65. 75. The method of claim 73 or claim 74 further comprising administering concurrently an additional anti-hepatitis C virus agent. 15 76. The method of claim 75, wherein said additional anti-hepatitis C virus agent is selected from the group consisting of a-interferon, fl-interferon, ribavirin, and adamantine.
  66. 77. The method of claim 75, wherein said additional anti-hepatitis C virus agent is an inhibitor of other targets in the hepatitis C virus life cycle which is selected from the 20 group consisting of helicase, polymerase, metal loprotease, and IRES.
  67. 78. Use of a compound according to any one of claims 1 to 63, 65 to 67 or 70 to 72 for the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of hepatitis C viral infection in a subject.
  68. 79. Use of a hepatitis C viral NS3 protease inhibitory amount of a compound 25 according to any one of claims 1 to 63, 65 to 67 or 70 to 72 for the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of hepatitis C viral infection, wherein the medicament inhibits the replication of hepatitis C virus. 305
  69. 80. A compound having the Formula I; a compound of Formula II; a compound of Formula III; a compound of Formula IV; a pharmaceutical composition according to claim 64; a compound according to any one of claims 65 to 67 or 70 and 71; a method according to claim 68 or claim 69; a compound according to claim 72; a method of 5 treating a hepatitis C viral infection in a subject according to claim 73; a method of inhibiting the replication of hepatitis C virus according to any one of claims 74 to 77; use according to claim 78 or claim 79; and substantially as herein described with reference to any one of the examples but excluding comparative examples. 306
AU2004211637A 2003-02-07 2004-02-06 Macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors Ceased AU2004211637C1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (7)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US36094703A 2003-02-07 2003-02-07
US10/360,947 2003-02-07
US36585403A 2003-02-13 2003-02-13
US10/365,854 2003-02-13
US10/384,120 2003-03-07
US10/384,120 US20040180815A1 (en) 2003-03-07 2003-03-07 Pyridazinonyl macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
PCT/US2004/003479 WO2004072243A2 (en) 2003-02-07 2004-02-06 Macrocyclic hepatitis c serine protease inhibitors

Publications (3)

Publication Number Publication Date
AU2004211637A1 AU2004211637A1 (en) 2004-08-26
AU2004211637B2 AU2004211637B2 (en) 2009-08-13
AU2004211637C1 true AU2004211637C1 (en) 2010-08-19

Family

ID=32872697

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
AU2004211637A Ceased AU2004211637C1 (en) 2003-02-07 2004-02-06 Macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors

Country Status (7)

Country Link
EP (1) EP1590442A4 (en)
JP (1) JP2007524576A (en)
KR (1) KR100940619B1 (en)
CN (1) CN1771050A (en)
AU (1) AU2004211637C1 (en)
CA (1) CA2515216A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2004072243A2 (en)

Families Citing this family (108)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
PL194025B1 (en) 1996-10-18 2007-04-30 Vertex Pharma Inhibitors of serine proteases, particularly hepatitis c virus ns3 protease
MY140680A (en) 2002-05-20 2010-01-15 Bristol Myers Squibb Co Hepatitis c virus inhibitors
US7601709B2 (en) 2003-02-07 2009-10-13 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
US7176208B2 (en) 2003-04-18 2007-02-13 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Quinoxalinyl macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
US7273851B2 (en) 2003-06-05 2007-09-25 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Tri-peptide hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
WO2004113365A2 (en) * 2003-06-05 2004-12-29 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Hepatitis c serine protease tri-peptide inhibitors
US7125845B2 (en) 2003-07-03 2006-10-24 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Aza-peptide macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
US7592419B2 (en) * 2003-09-26 2009-09-22 Schering Corporation Macrocyclic inhibitors of hepatitis C virus NS3-serine protease
NZ546663A (en) 2003-10-10 2010-01-29 Vertex Pharma Inhibitors of serine proteases, particularly HCV NS3-NS4A protease
CA2552319C (en) 2004-01-30 2012-08-21 Medivir Ab Hcv ns-3 serine protease inhibitors
EP1711515A2 (en) 2004-02-04 2006-10-18 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Inhibitors of serine proteases, particularly hcv ns3-ns4a protease
EP2626354A1 (en) 2004-02-20 2013-08-14 Boehringer Ingelheim International GmbH Viral polymerase inhibitors
MX2007007590A (en) * 2004-12-22 2007-12-10 Ambrx Inc Compositions containing, methods involving, and uses of non-natural amino acids and polypeptides.
US7323447B2 (en) 2005-02-08 2008-01-29 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US7608614B2 (en) * 2005-03-08 2009-10-27 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Process for preparing macrocyclic compounds
US7592336B2 (en) 2005-05-10 2009-09-22 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US7601686B2 (en) 2005-07-11 2009-10-13 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
TWI387603B (en) * 2005-07-20 2013-03-01 Merck Sharp & Dohme Hcv ns3 protease inhibitors
EP2305695A3 (en) 2005-07-25 2011-07-27 Intermune, Inc. Macrocyclic inhibitors of Hepatitis C virus replication
JP5426164B2 (en) 2005-07-29 2014-02-26 ヤンセン・アールアンドデイ・アイルランド Macrocyclic inhibitor of hepatitis C virus
MY139988A (en) 2005-07-29 2009-11-30 Tibotec Pharm Ltd Macrocylic inhibitors of hepatitis c virus
AU2006274862B2 (en) 2005-07-29 2012-03-22 Medivir Ab Macrocyclic inhibitors of hepatitis C virus
EP1913015B1 (en) 2005-07-29 2013-12-11 Janssen R&D Ireland Macrocyclic inhibitors of hepatitis c virus
ES2373685T3 (en) 2005-07-29 2012-02-07 Tibotec Pharmaceuticals MACROCYCLIC INHIBITORS OF HEPATITIS VIRUS C.
AU2006274861B2 (en) 2005-07-29 2012-11-08 Medivir Ab Macrocyclic inhibitors of hepatitis C virus
PE20070343A1 (en) * 2005-07-29 2007-05-12 Medivir Ab MACRO CYCLIC INHIBITORS OF HEPATITIS C VIRUS
PE20070211A1 (en) 2005-07-29 2007-05-12 Medivir Ab MACROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS AS INHIBITORS OF HEPATITIS C VIRUS
JP2009505966A (en) 2005-08-02 2009-02-12 バーテックス ファーマシューティカルズ インコーポレイテッド Inhibitor of serine protease
WO2007019674A1 (en) 2005-08-12 2007-02-22 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Viral polymerase inhibitors
SI2194043T1 (en) 2005-08-19 2014-04-30 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Processes
AR055395A1 (en) 2005-08-26 2007-08-22 Vertex Pharma INHIBITING COMPOUNDS OF THE ACTIVITY OF SERINA PROTEASA NS3-NS4A OF HEPATITIS C VIRUS
US7964624B1 (en) 2005-08-26 2011-06-21 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Inhibitors of serine proteases
CN101415705B (en) 2005-10-11 2011-10-26 因特蒙公司 Compounds and methods for inhibiting hepatitis c viral replication
US7772183B2 (en) 2005-10-12 2010-08-10 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US7741281B2 (en) 2005-11-03 2010-06-22 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
EP1951748B1 (en) 2005-11-11 2013-07-24 Vertex Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Hepatitis c virus variants
US7705138B2 (en) 2005-11-11 2010-04-27 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Hepatitis C virus variants
US7816348B2 (en) 2006-02-03 2010-10-19 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Viral polymerase inhibitors
US8268776B2 (en) 2006-06-06 2012-09-18 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Macrocylic oximyl hepatitis C protease inhibitors
US9526769B2 (en) 2006-06-06 2016-12-27 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Macrocylic oximyl hepatitis C protease inhibitors
US20070281884A1 (en) * 2006-06-06 2007-12-06 Ying Sun Macrocyclic oximyl hepatitis C protease inhibitors
PE20080992A1 (en) 2006-06-26 2008-08-06 Enanta Pharm Inc QUINOXALINYL MACROCYCLIC SERINE PROTEASE INHIBITORS OF HEPATITIS C VIRUS
RU2008152171A (en) 2006-07-05 2010-08-10 Интермьюн, Инк. (Us) NEW HEPATITIS C VIRAL REPLICATION INHIBITORS
CN101484444B (en) * 2006-07-07 2012-11-21 吉里德科学公司 Novel pyridazine compound and use thereof
PL2038275T3 (en) * 2006-07-07 2010-08-31 Gilead Sciences Inc Novel pyridazine compound and use thereof
WO2008008776A2 (en) 2006-07-11 2008-01-17 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis c virus inhibitors
EP2374812B1 (en) 2006-07-13 2015-04-15 Achillion Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 4-amino-4-oxobutanoyl Peptides as Inhibitors of Viral Replication
WO2008019303A2 (en) * 2006-08-04 2008-02-14 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Pyridazinonyl macrocyclic hepatitis c serine protease inhibitors
US7718612B2 (en) * 2007-08-02 2010-05-18 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Pyridazinonyl macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
MX2009000882A (en) 2006-08-17 2009-02-04 Boehringer Ingelheim Int Viral polymerase inhibitors.
US8343477B2 (en) 2006-11-01 2013-01-01 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Inhibitors of hepatitis C virus
US7772180B2 (en) 2006-11-09 2010-08-10 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US8003604B2 (en) 2006-11-16 2011-08-23 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US7888464B2 (en) 2006-11-16 2011-02-15 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US7763584B2 (en) 2006-11-16 2010-07-27 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
CA2679563A1 (en) * 2007-01-08 2008-07-17 Phenomix Corporation Macrocyclic hepatitis c protease inhibitors
NZ577568A (en) * 2007-02-01 2012-02-24 Tibotec Pharm Ltd Polymorphic forms of N-[17-[2-(4-isopropylthiazole-2-yl)-7-methoxy-8-methylquinolin-4-yloxy]-13-methyl-2,14-dioxo-3,13 -diazatricyclo[13.3.0.0^4,6]octadec-7-ene-4-carbonyl](cyclopropyl)sulfonamide
US8435984B2 (en) 2007-02-26 2013-05-07 Achillion Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Tertiary amine substituted peptides useful as inhibitors of HCV replication
CA2686051A1 (en) 2007-05-04 2008-11-13 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Combination therapy for the treatment of hcv infection
CN101801925A (en) 2007-06-29 2010-08-11 吉里德科学公司 antiviral compounds
CA2691442C (en) 2007-06-29 2014-01-21 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Antiviral compounds
EP2188274A4 (en) 2007-08-03 2011-05-25 Boehringer Ingelheim Int Viral polymerase inhibitors
US8383583B2 (en) 2007-10-26 2013-02-26 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Macrocyclic, pyridazinone-containing hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
US8263549B2 (en) 2007-11-29 2012-09-11 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. C5-substituted, proline-derived, macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
US8030307B2 (en) 2007-11-29 2011-10-04 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Bicyclic, C5-substituted proline derivatives as inhibitors of the hepatitis C virus NS3 protease
CA2708150A1 (en) 2007-12-05 2009-06-18 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Fluorinated tripeptide hcv serine protease inhibitors
WO2009076747A1 (en) 2007-12-19 2009-06-25 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Viral polymerase inhibitors
US8202996B2 (en) 2007-12-21 2012-06-19 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Crystalline forms of N-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)-3-methyl-L-valyl-(4R)-4-((7-chloro-4-methoxy-1-isoquinolinyl)oxy)-N- ((1R,2S)-1-((cyclopropylsulfonyl)carbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropyl)-L-prolinamide
CN101977915B (en) * 2008-02-04 2014-08-13 埃迪尼克斯医药公司 Macrocyclic serine protease inhibitors
US8163921B2 (en) 2008-04-16 2012-04-24 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US7964560B2 (en) 2008-05-29 2011-06-21 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
JP5529120B2 (en) 2008-05-29 2014-06-25 ブリストル−マイヤーズ スクイブ カンパニー Hepatitis C virus inhibitor
US8207341B2 (en) 2008-09-04 2012-06-26 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Process or synthesizing substituted isoquinolines
UY32099A (en) * 2008-09-11 2010-04-30 Enanta Pharm Inc HEPATITIS C SERINA PROTEASAS MACROCYCLIC INHIBITORS
US8044087B2 (en) 2008-09-29 2011-10-25 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US8563505B2 (en) 2008-09-29 2013-10-22 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
DK2364309T3 (en) 2008-12-10 2015-01-12 Achillion Pharmaceuticals Inc NEW 4-AMINO-4-OXOBUTANOYLPEPTIDER as inhibitors of viral replication
CA2746265A1 (en) * 2008-12-10 2010-06-17 Achillion Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 4-amino-4-oxobutanoyl peptide cyclic analogues, inhibitors of viral replication
US8283310B2 (en) 2008-12-15 2012-10-09 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
WO2010080874A1 (en) 2009-01-07 2010-07-15 Scynexis, Inc. Cyclosporine derivative for use in the treatment of hcv and hiv infection
WO2010118078A1 (en) 2009-04-08 2010-10-14 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Macrocyclic serine protease inhibitors
MX2011012155A (en) 2009-05-13 2012-02-28 Enanta Pharm Inc Macrocyclic compounds as hepatitis c virus inhibitors.
JP2013501068A (en) 2009-08-05 2013-01-10 アイディニックス ファーマシューティカルズ インコーポレイテッド Macrocyclic serine protease inhibitor
AU2009352688B2 (en) 2009-09-15 2014-04-17 Taigen Biotechnology Co., Ltd. HCV protease inhibitors
CN103025736B (en) * 2010-06-07 2016-07-06 Abbvie公司 The hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors of macro ring
JP5857053B2 (en) 2010-09-21 2016-02-10 エナンタ ファーマシューティカルズ インコーポレイテッド Macrocyclic proline-derived HCV serine protease inhibitor
CN103380132B (en) 2010-12-30 2016-08-31 益安药业 Phenanthridines macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
JP2014502620A (en) 2010-12-30 2014-02-03 エナンタ ファーマシューティカルズ インコーポレイテッド Macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitor
AR085352A1 (en) 2011-02-10 2013-09-25 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Inc MACROCICLIC INHIBITORS OF SERINA PROTEASA, ITS PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS AND ITS USE TO TREAT HCV INFECTIONS
US8957203B2 (en) * 2011-05-05 2015-02-17 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US10201584B1 (en) 2011-05-17 2019-02-12 Abbvie Inc. Compositions and methods for treating HCV
US8691757B2 (en) 2011-06-15 2014-04-08 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
LT2909205T (en) 2012-10-19 2016-12-27 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company 9-methyl substituted hexadecahydrocyclopropa(e)pyrrolo(1,2-a)(1,4)diazacyclopentadecinyl carbamate derivatives as non-structural 3 (ns3) protease inhibitors for the treatment of hepatitis c virus infections
EP2914598B1 (en) 2012-11-02 2017-10-18 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis c virus inhibitors
US9643999B2 (en) 2012-11-02 2017-05-09 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
WO2014070964A1 (en) 2012-11-02 2014-05-08 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis c virus inhibitors
WO2014070974A1 (en) 2012-11-05 2014-05-08 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis c virus inhibitors
CN105164148A (en) 2013-03-07 2015-12-16 百时美施贵宝公司 Hepatitis c virus inhibitors
KR20160005334A (en) 2013-03-14 2016-01-14 아칠리온 파르마세우티칼스 인코포레이티드 Novel Processes for Producing Sovaprevir
US9227952B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2016-01-05 Achillion Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Sovaprevir polymorphs and methods of manufacture thereof
US9006423B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2015-04-14 Achillion Pharmaceuticals Inc. Process for making a 4-amino-4-oxobutanoyl peptide cyclic analogue, an inhibitor of viral replication, and intermediates thereof
WO2014145600A1 (en) 2013-03-15 2014-09-18 Achillion Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Ach-0142684 sodium salt polymorphs, composition including the same, and method of manufacture thereof
WO2015103490A1 (en) 2014-01-03 2015-07-09 Abbvie, Inc. Solid antiviral dosage forms
EP2899207A1 (en) 2014-01-28 2015-07-29 Amikana.Biologics New method for testing HCV protease inhibition
CN105130916B (en) * 2015-09-30 2019-03-01 江西师范大学 A kind of efficient method for preparing NH-1,2,3 triazole compounds
TWI832917B (en) 2018-11-06 2024-02-21 美商富曼西公司 Substituted tolyl fungicides
WO2021127273A1 (en) * 2019-12-20 2021-06-24 Gb004, Inc. 1 -((6-oxo-1,6-dihydropyridazin-4-yl)methyl)piperazine and 1 -((6-oxo-1,6-dihydropyrimidin-4-yl)methyl)piperazine derivatives as prolyl hydroxylase, hif-1 alpha and pgk modulators for use in treating inflammatory diseases, cancer or infections
UY39189A (en) 2020-05-06 2021-12-31 Fmc Corp SUBSTITUTED TOLYL FUNGICIDES AND MIXTURES

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2000059929A1 (en) * 1999-04-06 2000-10-12 Boehringer Ingelheim (Canada) Ltd. Macrocyclic peptides active against the hepatitis c virus
AU2002360592A1 (en) * 2001-12-20 2003-07-09 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Inhibitors of hepatitis c virus

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2000059929A1 (en) * 1999-04-06 2000-10-12 Boehringer Ingelheim (Canada) Ltd. Macrocyclic peptides active against the hepatitis c virus
AU2002360592A1 (en) * 2001-12-20 2003-07-09 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Inhibitors of hepatitis c virus

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
KR20050111585A (en) 2005-11-25
WO2004072243A3 (en) 2005-11-03
AU2004211637A1 (en) 2004-08-26
KR100940619B1 (en) 2010-02-05
WO2004072243A2 (en) 2004-08-26
EP1590442A4 (en) 2007-07-18
CA2515216A1 (en) 2004-08-26
CN1771050A (en) 2006-05-10
EP1590442A2 (en) 2005-11-02
JP2007524576A (en) 2007-08-30
AU2004211637B2 (en) 2009-08-13

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
AU2004211637C1 (en) Macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
US7601709B2 (en) Macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
AU2010200619B2 (en) Quinoxalinyl macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
US7662779B2 (en) Triazolyl macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
US8785377B2 (en) Tetrazolyl macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
US20070021330A1 (en) Aza-peptide macrocyclic hepatitis c serine protease inhibitors
US20090035271A1 (en) Tetrazolyl macrocyclic hepatitis c serine protease inhibitors
US20090041721A1 (en) Arylalkoxyl hepatitis c virus protease inhibitors
WO2008019303A2 (en) Pyridazinonyl macrocyclic hepatitis c serine protease inhibitors
US20090035272A1 (en) Pyridazinonyl Macrocyclic Hepatitis C Serine Protease Inhibitors
WO2008021956A2 (en) Acylaminoheteroaryl hepatitis c virus protease inhibitors
AU2008322537A1 (en) Quinoxaline-containing compounds as hepatitis C virus inhibitors
IL195512A (en) Quinoxalinyl macrocyclic hepatitis c virus serine protease inhibitors, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same and use thereof for preparation of medicaments
WO2008021960A2 (en) Triazolyl macrocyclic hepatitis c serine protease inhibitors
WO2008021871A2 (en) Triazolyl acyclic hepatitis c serine protease inhibitors
WO2008022006A2 (en) Arylalkoxyl hepatitis c virus protease inhibitors
WO2009070692A1 (en) C5-substituted, proline-derived, macrocyclic hepatitis c serine protease inhibitors
WO2009085978A1 (en) Bridged carbocyclic oxime hepatitis c virus serine protease inhibitors
WO2009134987A1 (en) Difluoromethyl-containing macrocyclic compounds as hepatitis c virus inhibitors
WO2009117594A1 (en) Fluorinated macrocyclic compounds as hepatitis c virus inhibitors
WO2009076166A2 (en) Oximyl hcv serine protease inhibitors
WO2008021733A2 (en) Tetrazolyl acyclic hepatitis c serine protease inhibitors
EP2245015A1 (en) Difluorinated tripeptides as hcv serine protease inhibitors
WO2009094438A1 (en) Heteroaryl-containing tripeptide hcv serine protease inhibitors

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
DA2 Applications for amendment section 104

Free format text: THE NATURE OF THE AMENDMENT IS: AMEND THE CO-INVENTOR NAME FROM MIAO, ZENWEI TO MIAO, ZHENWEI AND FROM XU, GUOYOU TO XU, GOUYOU.

DA3 Amendments made section 104

Free format text: THE NATURE OF THE AMENDMENT IS: AMEND THE NAME OF THE CO-INVENTORS FROM MIAO, ZENWEI; XU, GUOYOU TOMIAO, ZHENWEI; XU, GOUYOU

FGA Letters patent sealed or granted (standard patent)
DA2 Applications for amendment section 104

Free format text: THE NATURE OF THE AMENDMENT IS: AMEND THE NAME OF THE INVENTOR FROM XU, GOUYOU TO XU, GUOYOU .

DA2 Applications for amendment section 104

Free format text: THE NATURE OF THE AMENDMENT IS AS SHOWN IN THE STATEMENT(S) FILED 05 FEB 2010.

DA3 Amendments made section 104

Free format text: THE NATURE OF THE AMENDMENT IS: AMEND THE NAME OF THE INVENTOR FROM XU, GOUYOU TO XU, GUOYOU

DA3 Amendments made section 104

Free format text: THE NATURE OF THE AMENDMENT IS AS SHOWN IN THE STATEMENT(S) FILED 05 FEB 2010

MK14 Patent ceased section 143(a) (annual fees not paid) or expired